Recreonics has remained a key player in the aquatic industry for over half a century, offering a wide array of more than 25,000 swimming pool and aquatic products. Catering to a variety of customers, including worldrenowned aquatic facilities, our unwavering focus is on delivering exceptional customer service and the highest quality products available anywhere.
Our catalog opens the door to a diverse array of aquatic equipment and supplies. As we look to the future, we have expanded our horizons and joined forces with Heritage to enhance our service and product range. If you find a product beyond your usual selection, our team is readily available to offer you personalized assistance. We want to provide you with an effortless and seamless experience as you explore our entire collection.
Your Aquatic Authority!® Personally Serving You!
Front Cover Photo Credit: Chad Baumer Photography
Table of Contents
NEW First Aid
See Page 14
NEW Manual Batter-Powered Vacuums
See Page 42
NEW Pool Coatings
See Page 48-50
NEW Rubberized Deck Coating
See Page 51
NEW Guard Chairs
See Page 72
NEW The BEAST Main Drain
See Page 109
NEW Lane Line Anchor
See Page 114
NEW End-Suction Pumps
See Page 117
NEW Vertical Hi-Rate Sand Filters
See Page 127
NEW Portable Undwater Sound System
See Page 179
NEW WIBIT Play Products
See Pages 190,191, 194
Recreonics Purchase Guide
PRICE CHANGES
Because of the rapidly changing prices of raw materials that our manufacturers are encountering, we must again remind our customer that our prices are subject to change without notice. You Can Be Sure We Will Do Everything In Our Power To Maintain Current Prices. Any typographical errors in pricing will be corrected in house. Recreonics reserves the right to substitute alternate and/or equal products when necessary.
MINIMUM ORDER
We do not have a minimum; however there will be an additional $3.50 handling charge for orders less than $25.00.
CREDIT POLICY
Credit accounts will be extended with an approved credit application. New accounts without prior credit approval will require payment in advance of shipment. All past due invoices will carry a service charge of 11/2% per month (18%) annum. Any past-due account will be turned over to a third party for collection, in which case the purchaser agrees to be responsible for all cost of collection and reasonable attorney’s fees.
TERMS
Terms are net 30 days from date of invoice, F.O.B. our warehouse unless otherwise specified. Shipments on open accounts are subject to credit approval. Orders with custom or special products may require a non-refundable deposit. Once orders for custom fabricated orders are released they are noncancellable and non-refundable. Orders absent credit approval will require payment in advance.
CREDIT CARDS
American Express, Discover, MasterCard and VISA are accepted from Institutional and government agencies only. Some restrictions apply.
WARRANTY
All products sold by Recreonics are strictly covered by the manufacturer’s warranty statements, policies regarding warranty determinations and warranty procedures. There are no other warranties expressed or implied by Recreonics or its subsidiaries. No dealer, agent or employee of Recreonics is authorized to make any promise, representation, guarantee or additional warranty. The customer is responsible for all freight charges on returns and replacements. Digital images indicating damage may be requested.
TRANSPORTATION
All shipments are on a F.O.B. Origin basis. Unless specified all shipments are shipped standard ground service, tailgate delivery and do not include any unloading or locating of shipment at the delivery destination. The buyer assumes title and control at the moment shipment is accepted by the freight carrier. Any additional service requested at delivery will incur additional charges.
DAMAGED GOODS OR SHORTAGES
It is the buyer’s sole responsibility to thoroughly inspect all shipments immediately upon arrival for shortages and/or damages. The buyer’s receiving personnel must note on the freight bill plus advise the freight company driver of any shortages, losses and/or damages and insist on a notation of shortages and/or damages by the freight company driver across the face of the delivery receipt. Otherwise no claim can be enforced against the carrier. All Shortages and/ or damages (including concealed) must also be reported to Recreonics in 24-48 hours from receipt of shipment. Reporting concealed damages does not automatically assure product or monetary replacement.
RETURNS
All returns must have a return authorization number provided by Recreonics customer service department. All return authorizations granted by Recreonics are valid for 30 days from date of issue. Approved merchandise returned to Recreonics or manufacturer must be in 100% resale condition and in original packaging. All return shipments must be properly packaged and must have the return authorization number displayed on the shipment. All returns with products designated as HAZMAT must be returned in the original box in which it was shipped and must have all required HAZMAT labeling. All returns will be inspected by Recreonics or manufacturer for final dispensation of credit. All returns are subject to restocking fees. Timeframe for return options varies per manufacturer(s) policy.
SALES TAX
All applicable sales taxes Recreonics is required to collect or pay are passed on to the final purchaser and are in addition to any pricing provided. Some tax exemptions are not accepted by manufacturers based on individual tax laws in certain states.
MasterCard, VISA, Discover and American Express available for Institutional Aquatic accounts ONLY.
(Some Restrictions Apply)
Recreonics National Catalog Division
• QUICK-ORDER FEATURE: This dynamic order feature allows you to quickly place your orders with us!
• REQUEST A QUOTE: Use this feature to create a quote request that will be quickly responded to by our trained sales consultants!
• AQUATHORITY BLOG: Learn more about featured products!
• 4,000 PLUS PRODUCTS AVAILABLE ON-LINE: Recreonics offers the largest selection of commercial swimming pool equipment and accessories.
• FLIP-N-ZOOM CATALOG: Our website offers our complete catalog for you to flip-nzoom through online.
• SALES AND CLOSE-OUT SPECIALS: Review our website for all of the latest savings opportunities and close-out specials.
• WIBIT PLAY SYSTEMS: Review the extensive information regarding the WIBIT inflatable play systems that will bring tremendous play value to your commercial swimming pool.
Commercial Project Division
The Recreonics Commercial Project Division offers the commercial swimming pool builder or contractor an unmatched resource for accurate, comprehensive equipment proposals, professional submittal documents, project tracking and close-out document services.
We coordinate your shipment of equipment and accessories from beginning to end and make sure that you get what you need when you need it!
Let our experienced, expert sales consultants and staff, provide you with a level of service unmatched in the industry.
The Recreonics Advantage
Large Volume Shipping = Reduced Freight Cost
Centralized Location = Quicker Delivery
Dedicated Order Expediting Department = Immediate Order Tracking
• Maximum Size: 165" in combined length and girth.
• Additional Handling: If the package is longer than 48" on its longest side, measures greater than 30" along its second-longest side, has an actual weight greater than 70 lbs. there will be an additional charge per package.
• Oversize Charge: If the package exceeds 96" in length or a combined length and girth of 130" there will be an additional charge per package. Rating is based on the greater of actual or dimensional weight.
Haz-Mat shipments require special arrangements & charges
Backboards, Head Immobilizers and Straps
12-318
Foam Filled Backboard ................... 12-318
The foam filled polyethylene backboard is constructed of medium density polyethylene for high impact resistance. Fully foam filled for water rescue. Backboard is Haz-Mat impermeable and made with FDA/UL approved resin. Structure is concave to minimize lateral movement. (16) hand holds, and (8) child strapping locations. Ships complete with 3 quick snap straps.
Replacement Strap (each) ........... P-STRAP
Backboard is constructed of medium density polyethylene for high impact resistance. Backboard is Haz-Mat impermeable. Ships complete with 3 quick-snap straps.
Dimensions: 16" W x 72" L
Shipping Weight: 15 Ibs.
12-337
Kemp AB Adult Backboard............. 12-337
The waterproof, foam-filled backboard is economical yet extremely strong. Made of durable polyethylene, this heavy-duty backboard has a weight capacity of 700 lbs. Features (21) handholds and (8) pins for your strapping needs. (Straps Sold Separately.)
Dimensions: 17.75" W x 72.75" L
Weight: 16 lbs
Replacement Strap Pak 12-315 (Includes 6 straps and 3 buckles)
Recreonics Backboard Package
Includes the 12-318 foam filled backboard, (3) quick-snap straps and the 12-783 universal head immobilizer.
Backboard Package…………………12-309
RECRE ONICS
Universal Head Immobilizer ........... 12-783
It features sideblocks with wide Velcro closures, allowing for a snug fit. It also comes with 2 head/chin straps and a base plate that fastens easily to the board. The universal head imobilizer has no metal components and can be worn during x-rays, MRI and CT scan procedures. It’s waterproof and buoyant, perfect for water rescues. Made with the highest grade of foam with a red vinyl coating that is sure to last.
Made from marine-grade okoume plywood and hardwood construction. Maintains neutral buoyancy and lightweight maneuverability for the life of the board. Includes complete head immobilizer, runner caps, board bumpers, and high-grade nylon body straps with Velcro® fastening system. Comes completely assembled.
CJ Prowood 1000 Rescue Kit 12-325
CJ Rescue 6 Rescue Kit
The CJ Rescue 6 rescue kit brings the renowned features of the CJ Prowood to a highly-visible, lightweight and affordable roto-molded plastic design. Includes complete head immobilizer and high-grade nylon body straps with Velcro® fastening system. Comes completely assembled.
CJ Rescue 6 Rescue Kit .................. 12-335
Prowood 1000 (Only)
Replacement Parts:
Head Immobilizer Kit ....................... 12-327
Includes (1 PR) head immobilizers, (1) head strap (2) Velcro® headbed strips, decal.
Custom made for either board. Will protect when not in use.
CJ Aquatics Rescue Kits, Replacement Parts and Accessories
Rescue Tubes & Rescue Cans
40" Rescue Tube with Clips
This high-quality rescue tube is made from high density, closed-cell foam that is encapsulated 8-10 mils of high-viscosity vinyl with anti-fade additives. Features sanded edges, tapered ends, ABS quick-release buckles, “GUARD” logo, 2" x 24" shoulder strap with 1" wide 68" towline that extends through the entire length of the tube. Manufactured in the U.S.A.
40" Rescue Tube with Clips ............................................................................................ 12-292
Approx. Dims: 40" L x 5.5" W x 4" Thick
Approx. Weight: 1.8 lbs.
50" Rescue Tube with Reach Assist
This high-quality rescue tube is made from high density, closed-cell foam that is encapsulated with 8-10 mils of high-viscosity vinyl with anti-fade additives. Features sanded edges, tapered ends, reach assist, “GUARD” logo, 2" x 24" shoulder strap with 1" wide 53" towline that extends through the entire length of the tube. Manufactured in the U.S.A.
50" Tube with Reach Assist ............................................................................................ 12-293
Approx. Dims: 50" L x 5.5" W x 4" Thick
Approx. Weight: 2.1 lbs.
40" ExoTube® with Reach Assist
This mildly rigid rescue tube's unique design is based on the fusion of closed cell foam, nylon mesh coated with a high-quality polyurethane coating. This combination provides excellent gripping and durability. Features 6' towline that extends through the entire length of the tube, 2" x 24" shoulder harness and “GUARD” logo. Manufactured in the U.S.A.
This mildly rigid rescue tube's unique design is based on the fusion of closed cell foam, nylon mesh coated with a high-quality polyurethane coating. This combination provides excellent gripping and durability. Features 6' towline that extends through the entire length of the tube, 2" wide shoulder harness and “GUARD” logo. Manufactured in the U.S.A.
50" ExoTube® Tube 12-295
Approx. Dims: 50" L x 5.75" W x 3" Thick
Approx. Weight: 2.25 lbs
NOTE: The Exo-Tube® comes with a 1-year limited warranty against a manufacturer defect. It does not cover normal wear and tear or miss-handling. Do not hang the tubes by the shoulder harness or towline. Tubes should be hung by the reach assist loop. Do not stack tubes on top of each other and do not wrap or tie the towline and shoulder harness around the tubes. Doing so will void warranty.
Ring Buoys, Holder, Throw Lines & Bags
Ring Buoys (U.S. Coast Guard Approved)
You can’t go wrong with these ring buoys. Manufactured under the strict codes and supervision of the United States Coast Guard, they are classified as U.S. Coast Guard Approved, PFD Type IV.
These ring buoys are made from solid closed cell plastic throughout, with a metal ring molded inside for durability and balance. They feature an integral rope for easy handling—even when the person in distress is fatigued. Soft and resilient to the touch, they are designed to be almost indestructible. The durable surface resists weather and temperature extremes.
Throw Lines
These Recreonics throw lines for the ring buoys above are made from polyethylene floating yellow rope and includes a “lemon float” that allows you to hold the line with your foot. We offer these throw ropes in five different lengths to accommodate the specific requirement of your swimming pool.
30' Ring Buoy Line 12-260
Weight: 8 oz.
60' Ring Buoy Line ........................... 12-261
Weight: 1 Ib.
75' Ring Buoy Line...................... 12-260.75
Weight: 1.5 Ibs.
100' Ring Buoy Line .................. 12-260.100
Weight: 2 Ibs.
150' Ring Buoy Line .................. 12-260.150
Weight: 2.5 Ibs.
NOTE: Ring Buoy line needs to be 11⁄2 times the width of the pool
We always have these ring buoys in stock so we can get them to you when you need them. We also offer our ring buoy throw lines below that are required for all swimming pools.
This quality ring buoy holder is made from T-304 stainless steel. Mount it to a wall or a lifeguard chair and provide a good place to store your ring buoys until needed. The throat on this holder is large enough to allow for the storage of the required throw line as well.
4" Ring Buoy Holder........................ 12-259 Features a 4" throat that facilitates easy access to the ring buoy and throw rope.
Weight: 1 Ib.
Ring Buoy Cabinet
This attractive cabinet will totally enclose a 24" ring buoy, including a 60 ft. Iife line and lemon foot anchor. Sturdy plastic will protect your equipment from long-term weather damage, as well as deter theft. Complete with an unbreakable polycarbonate window and stainless steel hinge and fittings. Ring Buoy not included.
Ring Buoy Cabinet .......................... 12-248
(For 24" Ring Buoy)
Dimensions: 26" diameter x 5" deep
Weight: 8 Ibs.
Ring Buoy Cabinet .......................... 12-249 (For 30" Ring Buoy)
Dimensions: 34" diameter x 6" deep
Weight: 14 Ibs.
Rescue Throw Bags
This life saving equipment is an appropriate alternative to loose, bulky rescue line. The rescue bag features a floating storage bag which allows for the rescue rope to be stored compactly until use. Available in two rescue rope lengths of 50' and 90'.
50' Throw Floating Bag .................. 12-223
Includes waist belt.
90' Throw Floating Bag .................. 12-224
RECRE ONICS
QUA LITY
RECRE ONICS
QUA LITY
Shepherd’s Crooks, Rescue Poles and EMS Trauma Bags
Shepherd’s Crook
This heavy-duty single aluminum crook can be attached directly to our super tough fiberglass poles. Includes mounting bolts and wingnuts.
This double loop hook is constructed of sturdy anodized aluminum. Includes mounting bolts and wing nuts to fit into our aluminum poles. Requires our 10-374 “quick-change” adapter if used with our super tough fiberglass poles.
Double Loop Shepherd’s Crook .... 12-239
Dimensions: 11" W x 27" L
Weight: 2 lbs.
Quick-Change Adapter ................... 10-374
Shepherd’s Crook with Pole
Features our heavy-duty single crook with our lightweight yet super tough, bright yellow fiberglass pole.
Shepherd’s Crook With 8' Pole ...... 12-226
Weight: 10 Ibs.
With 16' Pole .................................... 12-228
Weight: 17 Ibs. (2) - 95-1 /2" pole with connector.
Double Loop Shepherd’s Crook with Pole
Ideal for safe poolside or beach-front rescues. Complete with our double loop crook and sturdy aluminum pole.
Shepherd’s Crook with 8' Pole ...... 12-235
Weight: 8 Ibs., 8 oz.
Shepherd’s Crook with 16' Pole .... 12-237
Two 95-1/2" poles with sturdy connector collar for easy shipping and storage.
Deluxe Rescue Poles
Our deluxe rescue pole incorporates our sturdy bright yellow Super-Tough fiberglass pole in an 8'-0" or 16'-0' option. Included with the rescue pole are two black rubber end caps that will cover and protect the pole, rescuer and victim. The 16' pole will consist of (2) 8'-0" fiberglass poles connected together by our 10-347 aluminum pole connector. 8'-0"
Consists of (1) 95-1/2" fiberglass pole and (2) black rubber end caps.
Weight: 7 Ibs.
16’-0" Deluxe Rescue Pole .............. 12-220
Consists of (2) 95-1/2" fiberglass poles, (1) aluminum pole connector and (2) black rubber end caps.
Weight: 14 Ibs.
KEMP Trauma Bags Professional Trauma Bag
The Professional Trauma Bag is the most popular bag featuring replaceable bottoms, dual-density structural foam and strong 600D nylon construction.
Dimensions: 17.5" x 13" x 10"
Premium EMS Trauma Bag ............ 12-450
Same bag as the 12-447, but made out of 1680 Denier ballistic premium grade nylon.
Fluid Resistant Trauma Bag ........... 12-452
Same bag as the 12-447, but made out of heavy-duty red tarpaulin, fluid restistant material. Ultimate EMS
Backpack
The Ultimate Backpack is the most popular backpack featuring front, lower and side pockets and a several removable pouches. The bottom of the bag features straps to hold a D tank cylinder. Comes with highly visible reflective trim and black nickel hardware.
Dimensions: 13"x 16" x 25"
Premium EMS Backpack ................ 12-454
Same backpack as the 12-453, but made out of heavier duty 1680 Denier ballistic, premium grade nylon.
Fluid Resistant EMS Backpack ...... 12-456
Same backpack as the 12-453, but made out of red tarpaulin, fluid resistant material.
Life Jackets and Personal Flotation Devices
Adult Classic Series
This Coast Guard approved general boating classic series lifejacket is made out of nylon and PE foam. Features 3 buckles and open sides. Available in universal and oversize in both red (.R) and blue (.B).
This Coast Guard approved general boating classic series lifejacket is made out of nylon and PE foam. Features 3 buckles and open sides. Weight Limit Range is 50-90 lbs. Available in both red (.R) and blue (.B)
This Coast Guard approved general boating classic series lifejacket is made out of nylon and PE foam. Features 3 buckles, leg strap and open sides. Weight Limit Range is 30-50 lbs. Available in both red (.R) and blue (.B)
Child Jacket 12-883
Infant Classic Series
This Coast Guard approved general boating classic series life jacket is made out of nylon and PE foam. Features 3 buckles, leg strap, grab handle and open sides. Weight Limit Range is less than 30 lbs. Available in both red (.R) and blue (.B)
These life jackets are soft, durable, comfortable and easy to clean. Made from durable vinyl-coated, closed-cell foam. Features automatic slot-back size adjustment and Kwik-Snap® buckles.
Buoyant Life Vests
These vests offer an economical alternative in flotation devices. Constructed of Type II foam, these vests feature quick release buckles and vest ties. Good for calm inland water and quick rescues. USCG approved. Bright orange color.
Child’s Small Vest (30-50 lbs.) 12-279
Does not include ties.
Life Jacket Racks
Enhance your facility with a high quality life jacket rack. This rack offers quality, comfort and stylish design. Manufactured from high-density polyethylene (HDPE), which is recycled plastic derived from post consumer or post industrial waste.
(24) Capacity Rack 12-540
Dimensions: 55" L x 43" W x 36" H
Weight approx. 80 lbs
(48) Capacity Rack 12-542
Dimensions: 75" L x 36" W x 55" H
Weight: 116 lbs.
(64) Capacity Rack 12-544
Dimensions: 75" L x 48" W x 72" H
Weight approx. 165 lbs.
AED, Resusitators, CPR Kits
A picture is worth a thousand words.The AED Plus® unique graphical interfacepictures combined with text displays and voice prompts - helps rescuers every step of the way. Lights on the pictures draw the rescuer’s attention to actions in the proper sequence. Text and voice prompts correspond to the pictures and help the rescuer perform every important life-saving action. These pictures and prompts assure that everything is done in order, and that shocks, if required, are delivered rapidly.
Ordinary AEDs require that the rescuer use two confusing electrodes. ZOLL’s Full-Rescue AED features CPR-D•padz™, a onepiece, pre-connected pair of electrodes with Real CPR Help. By using CPR hand placement as the landmark, it is easy to place the CPR-D•padz™ on the victim quickly. The CPR-D•padz™ also last five yearsthe longest shelf life of any electrodes sold today.
ZOLL’s Real CPR Help converts compression data instantaneously from the CPR-D•padz™, and provides an adaptive metronome to help the rescuer with the proper rate and depth saying “Push harder” or “Good compressions", as needed. It also shows CPR compression depth on the display. ZOLL’s AED Plus is the only AED that can see your chest compressions and guide you to the correct rate and depth during CPR. No other AED provides Real CPR Help.
The AED Plus is the only AED to use inexpensive, consumer lithium batteries that are easy to replace and last five years in stand-by mode.
ZOLL AED Plus ................................. 12-430
CPR Replacement Pads .................. 12-432
AED Cabinet with Alarm ................. 12-434 Pediatric Electrodes ........................ 12-435
ZOLL
First Responder Kit
Developed for first arrivals to an emergency scene. Each kit comes complete with a medical grade oxygen cylinder (empty), oxygen regulator (0-25 lpm), nasal cannula, and a disposable bag mask resuscitator; all neatly packaged in a durable carry pack.
First Responder Kit .......................... 12-428
Ambu Resuscitators are lightweight, portable and easy-to-use. They provide immediate, on-site pulmonary ventilation that is superior to that obtained by mouthto-mouth resuscitation. Each new Ambu Resuscitator features a special inlet for feeding oxygen right at the valve.
The new Ambu comes complete with a carrying case and one adjustable face mask.
Child Resuscitator ........................... 12-469 450 ml max. stroke volume.
KEMP CPR Face/Mouth Disposable Shield
Provides protection for the rescue provider and for the patient by creating a barrier protection for the face and mouth. Sheilds the caregiver from pathogens. The shields come individually wrapped and feature a one-way valve filter. Lightweight and easy to pack and store in any medical kit.
CPR Face/Mouth Disposable Shield...12-031 Weight: 3 oz.
Nitrile Gloves
These Nitrile Gloves are blue nitrile powder-free gloves, with excellent puncture and chemical resistance. Nitrile is made from an allergy safe compound that feels like latex, but is much stronger and more comfortable to wear. Resistant to tears, cuts, punctures, abrasives, and chemicals. These gloves are ambidextrous, which means they can be worn on the left or the right hand. Comes in boxes of 50 pairs.
Nitrile Gloves (Box of 50................... 12-032 Weight: 2 lbs.
Deluxe Emergency CPR Kit
Our Emergency C.P.R. Kit is designed to provide protection against the hazard of cross-contamination associated with the handling of C.P.R. emergencies.
Kit Contents:
• 2 Microshield Rescue Breathers, complete with one pair of Latex gloves per box
• 2 Pairs of Latex Gloves
• Alcohol Prep Pads
• BioHazard Waste Bags
Our compact metal kit container has a hanging bracket for easy installation.
Deluxe Emergency CPR Kit ............ 12-017
Dimensions: 5" h x 4-½" w x 2-½" d
Weight: 4 Ibs. 7 ozs.
General Purpose First Aid Kits
General Purpose First Aid Kits are equipped to handle most minor aches, pains, bumps, bruises and sprains. These basic kits are designed to handle normal activities in aquatic facilities.
16 Unit Kit .......................................... 12-012
Weight: 3 lbs., 12 oz.
Class A First Aid Kit + PPE
The contents of this first aid kid are conveniently packed inside a 16-unit, gasketed, plastic cabinet. Suitable for indoor and outdoor use.
75-Person First Aid Station This 75-person first aid station has a 6-shelf, metal cabinet and is suitable for indoor use. Contents exceed the mininmu requirements of the latest ANSI Standard Z308.1-2021
75-Person First Aid Station ........... 12-054
50 – Person OSHA Aquatics
First Aid Center
The 326 piece aquatics OSHA first aid center has a multi-compartment organizer case that makes response to first aid emergencies easier and quicker. This first aid kit has a clear front for quick visibility, and a rubber gasket seal to keep out water, dirt and grime.
Bloodborne Kit
Mandated by many state agencies and ideal for pool areas or where bloodborne pathogens need to be dealt with. Compliant with OSHA standard (1910.1030). Includes plastic zip bag, fluid-solidifying powder, bio-scoop with detachable scraper, biohazard bag with tie, biohazard specimen bag, medical grade gloves, BZK antiseptic towelettes, trash bag with tie, and paper towels.
or carried by its handle. Exceeds OSHA & ANSI guidelines. See chart below listing what is included in this first aid kit.
Made from thermal material and evolved from insulation used in space exploration. Reflects back 90% of body heat.
Dimensions: 52" x 84" Weight: 6 oz.
Emergency Eyewash Stations and Phones
Emergency Eyewash Station (Single)
The eyewash station is made of high impact plastic and has full emergency instructions on its front panel. Comes complete with (1) 32 oz. bottle of Eyesaline® Emergency Eye Wash, which is a buffered, isotonic saline solution that is sterile and superior to tap water.
The 32 oz. bottle has a tamper-resistant, twist-off tab that employees can easily remove in emergencies and the extended flow nozzle provides a longer flow. Replacement refill bottles item #12-034, sold separately. Equip facilities and worksites with this portable, ready to use emergency eye wash station.
Emergency Eyewash Station (Double)
Same as the 12-033, but this station includes (2) 32 oz. bottles of saline emergency eye wash.
Shower/ Eyewash Combo
This combination shower and eyewash, features a 10-5/8" ABS plastic showerhead and a stainless steel eyewash receptor with twin Soft-Flo. A pull rod activates shower. Push flag or foot treadle (sold separately - item 12-049. FP) activates eyewash. Pipe and fitting: 1-1/4" Schedule 40 hot-dipped galvanized steel with green corrosion resistant epoxy coating. Supply and Waste: 1-1/4" IPS.
This unit is certified by CSA to meet ANSI Z358.1 Standard for Emergency Eyewash and Shower Equipment. Haws Combo
Shower ..................... 12-049
Dimensions: 68-1/2"T x 30-1/2" (Widest Point)
Shipping Weight: 51 lbs.
Portable Eyewash
This portable gravity operated eyewash features a 16-gallon capacity, FD highdensity green polyethylene tank that provides full pattern flushing at .4 gpm for over 15 minutes. Pulling the yellow activation arm down to the open position activates unit. Model supplied with wall bracket. Bacteriostatic additive sold separately.
This unit is certified by CSA to meet ANSI Z358.1 Standard for Emergency Eyewash and Shower Equipment.
Additive (4-5 oz. Pack) .................... 12-043
One 5 oz. bottle of this bacteriostatic solution will preserve 5 to 20 gallons of potable water for up to 3 months.
Push-Button
Emergency
Phone
Outdoor-rated, ADA-compliant handsfree call stations go beyond emergency communications with a clean and simple interface. Made with 316 marine grade stainless steel, they are IP66 water rated for harsh environments.
• Raised letter and braille signage for ADA compliance.
• Stainless steel metal button designed for long lasting usage and weather erosion.
• Two LED indicators for hearing impaired (calling, answered).
• Uses regular phone lines for communications and function.
• No power supply or battery back-up needed.
• Built-in auto-dialer can dial two numbers; if first number doesn’t answer or is busy, it dials the next number.
• Auto-answer allows security to monitor and initiate calls with the unit.
• Ability to automatically identify attendant of location of calling phone by recorded message and digital display.
• Auxiliary input and outputs to integrate with CCTV, Blue Light, Scream AlertTM and other devices.
Stainless Steel Housing Option
This painted stainless steel housing ONLY is made to accept the 12-424 emergency phone. Made from 16 gauge painted 304 stainless steel. Features the word EMERGENCY in black lettering down the side as shown.
Stainless Steel Housing Option ..... 12-426 Dimensions: 11.87” L x 8.87” W x 3.37” D
Weight: 4.35 lbs.
“Prevent Drowning” Sign 77-995 For all facilities. Dimensions: 18" x 24"
No
“No Diving” Sign
Swimming Pool Facility Signs
Our weatherproof plastic pool signs are designed specifically for the needs of a commercial aquatic facility.
Emergency ................................. 12-205 Caution Spa Users (Texas Code) ...................................... 12-210 Warning: No Lifeguard on Duty (for pool) (Texas Code) 12-213 Warning: No Lifeguard on Duty (for spa) (Texas Code) ...................................... 12-214
12-210 (12" x 18") (Texas Code)
12-213 (18" x 32") (Texas Code)
12-214 (18" x 32") (Texas Code)
12-211 (12" x 9")
Facility Signs
Constructed of thick and durable polyethylene plastic, these signs have a 3⁄16" eyelet in each corner for easy mounting.
Heavy-Duty Plastic Signs
These signs are made by engraving through the outer layer of ¼" HDPE sheet plastic and exposing the contrasting color core, making them bright & highly visible. This durable material maintains its appearance for years. The signs are offered as a red sign with white lettering. Mounting holes and hardware are not provided.
Other standard and custom signs are available. Call our sales consultants to find out what other signs are available.
Polyethylene Floor Sign
These floor signs are made from durable polyethylene construction. Black letter on a yellow sign. (Both sides.)
Clarion® Pool Safety Sign System
3 Developed by leading experts in safety standards, signage and aquatics
3 Designed with clear graphical symbols to draw attention to core safety messages
How to Build your System...
3 The ONLY sign system on the market tested by viewers and proven to be quickly recognized and easily understood
3 Complies with the latest standards to fulfill your legal "duty to warn"
Depth Markers and Messaging Tiles
6" x 6" Info-Tiles Depth Marking and Messaging with 4" Lettering
English System (Feet & Inches) (4" Tall Numbers)
Double digit marker requires 2
Metric System 0 to 4.3M Requires 2 tiles
Multiple Tile Messages (4" Tall Letters)
Single Tile Messages (2" Tall Letters) “NO
Installation Kit (REQUIRED)
Single Tile Messages
These single ceramic tile messages are available in both a smooth and skid-resistant finish. Each tile measures 6" high by 12" wide and features black 4" characters on a white background.
Depth Marking and Messaging Tiles
This extensive line of depth and safety markers is designed to meet code requirements for all applications.
Ceramic Smooth and Skid Resistant: For new construction at waterline and on the deck.
Vinyl Stickons: For deck renovations above waterline.
Glass Overlays: For waterline renovations.
Plastic Stickons: For stainless steel gutters, fiberglass surfaces and PVC membranes.
Ceramic Tiles
Barrier Floats, Buoys and Safety Recreational Line Kits
Barrier Float/Marker Buoy
For use in assembling barrier/swim area systems. High density foam with molded eyebolt connection and continuous passage. “SWIM AREA”.
12" x 59" buoy molded from heavy duty, rock-hard shell with 1/8" wall thickness; resists the hardest blows, acids, and weather extremes. Must Ship Motor Freight
Dimensions: 12" x 59" Weight: 38 Ibs.
Lok-On Rope Floats
Choose from three versatile sizes and color combinations: Blue and White with Red center band (.B), Yellow and White with Red center band (.Y), Red and White with Blue center band (.R). Rope locks sold separately to fit desired rope size. Floats and locks sold in case quantities only.
3" x 5" Float (case of 24) ................ 14-387 (Use 1⁄2" rope - requires (1) Rope-Lok per float)
5" x 9" Float (case of 24) ................ 14-388 (Use 3⁄4" rope - requires (1) Rope-Lok per float)
8" x 14" Float (case of 12) 14-389 (Use 3⁄4" rope - requires (2) Rope-Loks per float).
Rope-Loks (case of 24) 14-391 3⁄8" up to 3⁄4" rope diameter.
These floating safety lines are constructed from high-test floating ultraviolet-resistant polypropylene rope with twist lock floats. They’re ideal for any type of beach front, swimming pool safety lines or marker ropes. Available in blue and white in 30', 40', 50', 75', 83', 100', 170', 200', & 300' kits.
3/8 " Safety Line Kit ........................... 12-378
3/8" polypropylene rope, 3" x 5" HandiLock Floats to be spaced on 2' centers. 3/4 " Safety Line Kit ........................... 12-380
3/4" polypropylene rope, 5" x 9" HandiLock Floats to be spaced on 5' centers.
NOTE: Safety Line Kits are not preassembled. Rope hooks are sold separately.
Recreational Racing Lane Line Kits
3⁄8" Line Kit ....................................... 14-356
3⁄8" B/W polypropylene rope with 3"x 5" polyethylene lineal blue and white floats on 2' centers, float keepers and standard rope hooks on each end. Unassembled. 3⁄8" Line Kit yellow rope/red floats 14-356.Y Same assembly using yellow rope and
polyethylene lineal red and white floats. 3⁄4" Line Kit ....................................... 14-358
3⁄4" heavy-duty polypropylene rope with 5"x9" polyethylene lineal blue and white floats on 5' centers, float keepers and standard rope hooks. Unassembled. 3⁄4" Line Kit yellow rope/red and white floats 14-358.Y (All Kits available in 30', 40', 50', 75', 83', 100', 170', 200', & 300'.)
Blue)
Lifeguard Suits
Lifeguard Accessories
Lifeguard Hip Pack with Top Straps
This hip pack features a lifeguard and cross logo to make lifeguards identifiable from a distance. Top straps and three spacious pockets allow for versatility to carry all of your lifeguard accessories. The quick release buckle allows for fast removal. Water bottle is NOT included.
Lifeguard Hip Pack ........................... 12-219
Lifeguard Responder Kit
This responder kit includes (1) 12-219 Lifeguard Hip Pack with top straps, (1) 12-441 CPR Mask with gloves and alcohol wipe, (1) 12-449 Survival Blanket, (1) 12-361.R Red Whistle w/Break-Away Lanyard. Water bottle is NOT included.
Lifeguard Responder Kit .................. 12-218
Supervisor Hip Pack
Our Supervisor hip pack has multiple pockets to accommodate the needs of a supervisor. This hip pack features high density polyester fabric and multiple zippered pockets. Color is black. Supervisor Hip Pack ......................... 12-221
DrainEasy® Lifeguard Fanny Pack
Features integrated drainage throughout the hip pack, allowing additional air flow; and if submerged, allowing reduced weight and drying time. This Lifeguard hip pack includes Lifeguard logo imprinted in white, plus top straps to hold a water bottle or other lifeguard accessories. Water bottle NOT included.
Pocket Mask
The LSP face mask with one way valve, filter, O2 inlet head strap and carrying case are designed to provide any rescuer a safe and effective method of providing artificial ventilation, at the same time maintaining maximum protection for both the rescuer and the patient.
The Kemp AMBU CPR Mask is packaged in a compact, hard shell, pocket-sized carrying case and features a one-way valve with filter, pair of gloves and alcohol pad.
KEMP AMBU CPR Mask .................. 12-441
BigEasy® Mask
Key features of the BigEasy® include an elevated perimeter for additional grip, increased density bladder for durability, and one-way valve with built-in O2 port for administering supplemental oxygen. The cushioned circular shape of the BigEasy® mask allows for a superior faceto-mask seal on adults, plus secure inwater rescue breathing for lifeguards.
BigEasy® Mask (ONLY) .................... 12-437
SPF30 Gallon Sunscreen
This sunscreen formula is water-resistant and 100% rub proof. On average less than 3% of formula comes off skin during 80 minutes of being in the water. Significantly reduces pool scum and effect on filtration systems and maintenance. 7.5ml pump included.
SPF30 GALLON
Recycled Plastic Table Top Holders
Will not absorb moisture and is easy to clean. Extremely durable, attractive and maintenance free. Stainless steel fasteners included. Can zip tie bottle to secure.
Table Top Holder .............................. 12-384
Label Colors: Blue (.B) or Red (.R) Wall Bracket ..................................... 12-386
Label Colors: Blue (.B) or Red (.R)
Whistles, Lanyards and Wrist Coils
The Fox 40® Classic™
These whistles are the standard choice for referees and coaches at all levels. Used by rescue professionals and for general safety worldwide. No moving parts to freeze, jam or deteriorate. Easy to blow and cannot be overblown. Will be heard above ambient noise and loud crowds. Chambers are designed to self-purge when submerged under water. Available in Black (.BK), Blue (.B), Orange (.O), Red (.R) and Yellow (.Y) Available with and without Break-Away Lanyard.
These whistles are cushioned to enhance the original Classic whistle. The Cushioned Mouth Grip (CMG)’s thermoplastic material provides superior grip and protection for teeth. Ideal for those who need to hold whistle in mouth for extended periods of time. Chambers are designed to self-purge when submerged under water. Available in Black (.BK), Blue (.B), Orange (.O), Red (.R) and Yellow (.Y). Available with and without Break-Away Lanyard.
The Windstorm produces a low frequency sound and is a natural solution when safety is a consideration. With splashing water and deafening crowds, the sound of a whistle can be vital in preventing injury. Tests show that whistles producing a low frequency sound are more easily heard when compared to whistles generating high frequency tones. Lanyard included.
Our professional lifeguard whistle has such an extremely loud and piercing sound, it can even be heard under water. The storm whistle is currently being used in many areas of the U.S. Military, the U.S. Coast Guard, police departments and emergency and diving operations. Can be blown underwater.
This budget minded whistle is perfect for pool side use. The extremely loud and penetrating "pea-less" whistle has a unique futuristic shape.
“ACME” Thunderer Whistle ............ 12-352
Fox 40® Break-Away Lanyards
These lanyards are 36" in length. 3⁄16" woven-rope-style that will release with tension. Includes J-hook and button-style spring-loaded adjustable cord lock. Available in Black (.BK), Blue (.B), Orange (.O), Red (.R) and Yellow (.Y) Fox 40® Break-Away Lanyard ......... 12-372
Made from sturdy nylon braid. Whistle lanyards feature a metal clasp for attaching any whistle. Available in assorted colors or Blue (.B), Black (.BK), Red (.R)
Length: 19"
Weight: 2 oz.
Breakaway feature
Breakaway Neck Lanyard 12-362
Functional, safe and stylish. These lanyards are constructed of sturdy multicolored fashioned nylon braid. 15" long with black slider and black lanyard clip. Available in Red/White/Blue (.RWB), Black (.BLK), Black/Blue/Red (.BBR)
Fox 40® Flex Coils
Weight: 2 oz.
With an "ACME" Thunderer whistle, you can command attention even in noisy crowds. Made from nickel-plated brass for long life.
Rubber Whistle Tip Guard .............. 12-354
These rubber guards slip over the end of our “Acme Thunder” whistle for a soft, comfortable gripping surface. Easily replaceable. ................................. Weight: 1 oz.
These coils are made of high quality durable plastic with spring back memory. A convenient, flexible and comfortable accessory for wrist or arm. Every Flex Coil comes with a 1" brass ring. Available in Black (.BK), Blue (.B), Orange (.O), Red (.R) and Yellow (.Y)
Fox 40® Flex Coil .............................. 12-373
Swimming Pool Rope
Our rope is specially formulated for use in and around swimming pools. It’s made from color-safe, strong, floating polypropylene and allows minimal stretch, resists color fade, and deterioration.
Available in bright optic yellow, blue/ white, or red/white twist, by the foot or by the spool.
The new EZ-LOCK float is a 5”x 9” self-locking float with a twist lock design. The design eliminates floats from moving on a rope while using no hardware. The EZ-LOCK floats are an innovative product that allow the floats to quickly adhere to a rope. Competitor EZ-LOCK floats are the only floats available that fits 3⁄8", 1⁄2" and 3⁄4" ropes. EZ-LOCK floats are made of linear polyethylene and treated with LifeSpan+ for durability and longevity.
These self-locking floats are available in several sizes and colors.
5" x 9" Handi-Lock Floats For 1⁄2" Rope, Blue-White-Blue ..............................14-381.5 For 1⁄2" Rope, Red-White-Red ............................... 14-380.5 For 3⁄4" Rope, Blue-White-Blue .................................
3" x 5" Handi-Lock Floats For 3⁄8" Rope, Blue-White-Blue .........
Available in blue/white, red/white, and red/ white/blue. Sold individually or in cases of (24).
Polyethylene Lineal Floats
Ideal for safety and racing lines. 3" x 5" floats are available in blue/white (.BW), red/white (.RW), white (.W) and yellow/ white (.YW). 5" x 9" floats are available in blue/white (.BW), red/white (.RW), red (.R), white (.W) and yellow/white (.YW). Float keepers are sold separately.
Insert Float Keepers
Cup
Cup Anchors
These cup anchors are designed to be installed into concrete or gunite walls. They are used primarily for racing lanes and safety ropes. We offer a variety of styles and materials to best fit your specfic application. Please note that the depth dimension provided is from the front face of the anchor to the very back of the anchor.
CPB Cup Anchor with Eye Bolt ....... 14-501
Made from chrome plated bronze. Includes threaded eyebolt and grounding screw. Not intended for salt water pools.
2-11⁄16" I.D. x 2-7⁄8" O.D. x 3-1⁄2"
Total Depth
CPB Cup Anchor with Cross Bar ... 14-509
Made from chrome plated bronze. Includes integral cross bar and grounding screw. Not intended for salt water pools. 2-13⁄16" I.D. x 3-15⁄16" O.D. x 3-15⁄16"
Total Depth
CPB Cup Anchor with Eye Bolt ...... 14-530
Made from chrome plated bronze. Includes threaded eyebolt and grounding screw. Not intended for salt water pools. 2-13⁄16" I.D. x 3-15⁄16" O.D. x 3-15⁄16"
Total Depth
CPB Cup Anchor with Cross Bar ... 14-502
Made from chrome plated bronze.Includes integral cross bar and grounding screw. Not intended for salt water pools.
4" Square (Face) x 5" Total Depth
CPB Cup Anchor with Eye Bolt ...... 14-503
Made from chrome plated bronze. Includes threaded eyebolt and grounding screw. Not intended for salt water pools. 4" Square (Face) x 5" Total Depth
S/S Cup Anchor with Cross Bar ..... 14-505
Made from T-316 stainless steel. Includes integral cross bar and grounding screw.
4" Square (Face) x 5" Total Depth
S/S Cup Anchor with Eye Bolt ....... 14-508
Made from T-316 stainless steel. Includes threaded T-304 stainless steel eyebolt and grounding screw.
4" Square (Face) x 5" Total Depth
ABS Plastic Cup Anchor
w/Cross Bar ...................................... 14-507
Made from ABS plastic. Includes integral stainless steel cross bar and grounding screw. Not intended to be used for racing lanes.
3-7⁄32" Square (Face) x 2-1⁄4" Total Depth
Threaded Wall Inserts
These wall inserts are made out of brass and include a bonding screw. The threaded eyebolt is made from chrome plated bronze. Available in standard and heavy-duty models. Not intended for salt water pools.
(See Eyebolt Chart for Dimensions) Heavy-Duty Threaded Insert .......... 47-139 1" Dia. x 3-1⁄2" Long
Standard-Duty Eyebolt .................... 14-506
(See Eyebolt Chart for Dimensions)
Standard-Duty Threaded Insert ..... 47-142 1" Dia. x 3-1⁄2" Long
CPB Eyebolt with Anchor ............... 14-498
Outside Dia.of eyebolt: 1-3⁄8", Inside Dia. of eyebolt: 5⁄8", thread length of eyebolt: 1-7⁄8". Includes anchor and gasket. Not intended for salt water pools.
Replacement Eyebolts
Recreonics offers the widest array of replacement eyebolts in the industry. Please utilize the chart below to match your specific eyebolt need. If you are not sure, send us a sample of your eyebolt and we will try to match it for you.
Rope Hooks
Recreonics offers a variety of rope hook styles, materials of fabrication and sizes to fit every application. Choose the right rope hook from the selection below.
Recreonics offers the widest array of replacement accessory hardware including lever type snap hooks, tension springs, cable thimbles, and cable clamps.
CPB Swivel-Eye Snap Hook ........... 14-466
3-3⁄8" long, 5⁄8" Eye, 1⁄2" Throat
S/S Cable Thimble ........................... 14-560 For 5⁄32" dia. cable
S/S Cable Thimble ............................ 14-561 For 3⁄16" dia. cable
S/S Cable Thimble 14-562 For 7⁄32" to 1⁄4" dia. cable
S/S Cable Clamp .............................. 14-555 For 1⁄8" to 5⁄32" dia. cable
S/S Cable Clamp .............................. 14-556 For 3⁄16" to 7⁄32" dia. cable
S/S Cable Clamp .............................. 14-557 For 1⁄4" to 9⁄32" dia. cable
CPB Rope (2-Piece) Rope Clamps
Heavy-duty chrome plated bronze 2-piece rope clamps with
Heavy-Duty Float Collars
Nylon Rope (2-piece) Clamps
Portable Vacuum Filter Systems
Maxi-Sweep Vacuum Systems
These portable vacuum systems save pool water, chemicals and energy by filtering dirty water and returning clean water to the pool during vacuuming. Cleans and recycles over 8,000 gph. All units feature a 225 sq. ft. stainless steel cartridge filter, 2 hp self-priming pump with integral hair and lint strainer. Includes corrosion-resistant aluminum cart, (1) Maxi-Sweep vacuum head, 2" dia. x 50' heavy-duty vacuum hose, (1) 8'-24' telescoping pole with (2) additional 8' extensions, O.S.H.A. approved Twist-Lok plug and special tools. Must Ship Motor Freight.
Maxi-Sweep Little Electric ............... 10-813
Maxi-Sweep Little Electric filters 6,240 gph and is perfect for small pools and fountains. Features a 225 sq. ft. cartridge filter, a 1 hp 110V (15 amp) electrical self-priming pump and a 50' electrical cord. Includes (1) 14" and (1) 24" vacuum head, 1-1⁄2" x 50' vacuum hose and (1) 8'-15' telescopic pole. Operator is responsible for GFI outlet poolside.
Dimensions: 52" high x 31" wide
Weight: 125 Ibs. (Ship Wt. 244 lbs.)
Maxi-Sweep Electric, 50' Cord 10-814
Maxi-Sweep Electric cleans and recycles over 8,000 gph. Features a 225 sq. ft. cartridge filter, a 2 hp 110V (30 amp) or 220V (15 amp) electric self-priming pump with integral hair and lint strainer and a 50' electrical cord. Operator is responsible for GFI outlet poolside.
Dimensions: 52" high x 31" wide
Weight: 129 Ibs. (Ship Wt. 266 lbs.))
Maxi-Sweep Electric, 100' Cord 10-815
Maxi-Sweep Electric cleans and recycles over 8,000 gph. Features a 225 sq. ft. cartridge filter, a 2 hp 110V (30 amp) or 220V (15 amp) electric self-priming pump with integral hair and lint strainer and a 100' electrical cord. Operator is responsible for GFI outlet poolside.
Dimensions: 52" high x 31" wide
Weight: 145 Ibs. (Ship Wt. 282 lbs.)
Maxi-Sweep Honda 10-816
Gasoline powered portable pool vacuum system that cleans and returns over 8,000 gph. Features one 225 sq. ft. cartridge filter and a 4.0 hp gasoline powered aluminum engine.
Dimensions: 52" high x 31" wide
Weight: 125 Ibs. (Ship Wt. 262 lbs.)
Maxi-Sweep Honda 10-817
Gasoline powered portable pool vacuum system that cleans and recycles over 8,000 gph. Features 225 sq. ft. filter cartridge and a 5.5 hp Honda gasoline powered aluminum engine. Outdoor use only.
All units, except 10-813, come with your choice of the following:
• 42", 36" or 30" Maxi-Sweep flexible vacuum head
• 2" x 50' H.D. vacuum hose
• (1) 8'-24' telescopic pole along with (2) 8' extension poles
• O.S.H.A. approved twist-lok plug (2 HP electric units only)
Please specify vacuum head size and voltage when ordering.
CAUTION: The National Electrical Code requires that ground fault interruption protection be provided for outlets around pool areas. All pumps listed in this section are designated for use with existing GFI protection, or utilize a gasolinedrive, vacuum pump (outdoors only).
RECRE ONICS
Ultra-Sweep Vacuum Systems
These durable portable vacuum systems feature a stainless steel cartridge filter system, self-priming pump with integral strainers and pre-wired integral GFCI protector. All mounted on a stainless steel cart with heavy-duty rubber wheels. Each system includes a heavy-duty vacuum head, 8'-24' telescopic pole and 50' of heavy-duty vacuum hose. Must Ship Motor Freight.
1 HP Ultra-Sweep System ................ 10-818
105 sq. ft. filter, 1 HP pump 115-Volt (20 AMP-Dedicated Circuit) , 50' of electrical cord, 24" wide vacuum head. 1.5” suction and discharge.
Shipping Weight: (1) Pallet: 168 lbs., Pole Box: 6 lbs.
NOTE: All Recreonics Electric Powered Vacuum Filters & Pumps require a dedicated circuit.
Portable Vacuum Filter Systems
1 HP Ultra-Sweep System ................ 10-819
155 sq. ft. filter, 1 HP pump 115-Volt (20 AMP-Dedicated Circuit) , 100' of electrical cord, 24" wide vacuum head. 1.5" suction and discharge.
Shipping Weight: (1) Pallet: 168 lbs., Pole Box: 6 lbs.
2 HP Ultra-Sweep System .............. 10-826
155 sq. ft. filter, 2 HP pump 230-Volt (15 AMP-Dedicated Circuit), 50' of electrical cord, 29" wide vacuum head. 2" suction and discharge.
Shipping Weight: (1) Pallet: 200 lbs., Pole Box: 6 lbs.
2 HP Ultra-Sweep System ............... 10-821
155 sq. ft. filter, 2 HP pump 115-Volt (30 AMP-Dedicated Circuit) , 50' of electrical cord, 29" wide vacuum head. 2" suction and discharge.
Shipping Weight: (1) Pallet: 200 lbs., Pole Box: 6 lbs.
3 HP Ultra-Sweep System .............. 10-827
This gas-powered version of the Ultra-Sweep is perfect for outdoor swimming pools. Features 155 sq. ft. filter, 3 HP gas-driven pump, 2" aluminum quck-connects on suction and discharge, 29" wide vacuum head..
Shipping Weight: (1) Pallet: 195 lbs., Pole Box: 6 lbs.
Portable Vacuum Filters, Pumps and Maintenance Kits
Portable Vacuum Filters
These durable units come complete with a stainless steel single cartridge filter, a high performance thermal plastic pump with weatherproof switch and a pre-wired GFCI protector all mounted on a stainless steel cart with heavy-duty rubber wheels.
1 HP Vacuum Filter .......................... 10-805
Features 105 square foot filter. 1-1⁄2" suction and discharge connections. 50' electrical cord (115 volt-20 amp – Dedicated circuit).
Dimensions: 44"H x 13"W x 30"L
Shipping Weight: 135 Ibs. (Motor Freight)
1 HP Vacuum Filter .......................... 10-806
Features 155 square foot filter. 1-1⁄2" suction and discharge connections. 100’ electrical cord (115 volt-20 amp –Dedicated circuit).
Dimensions: 56"H x 13"W x 30"L
Shipping Weight: 153 Ibs. (Motor Freight)
2 HP Vacuum Filter (115V) ................10-811
Features 155 square foot filter. 1-1⁄2" suction and discharge connections. 50’ electrical cord (115 volt-30 amp – Dedicated circuit)
2 HP Vacuum Filter (230V) ............. 10-810
Same features as 10-811. (230 volt-15 amp – Dedicated circuit).
Dimensions: 56"H x 13"W x 30"L
Shipping Weight: 150 Ibs. (Motor Freight)
Portable Vacuum Filter (GAS)
This gas-powered version of our portable vacuum system is perfect for outdoor pools. This unit features a 155 square foot filter and a 3 HP gas-driven pump. 2" aluminum quick connects on the suction and discharge allow for easy use. The entire unit is mounted on a stainless steel cart.
This robust submersible pump is designed for draining and utility applications. Capable of running water levels down to 1-3⁄8" inches in depth. Includes external float switch and 15' electrical cord.
NOTE: All Recreonics Electric Powered Vacuum Filters & Pumps require a dedicated circuit.
Portable Vacuum Pumps & Watercannon Aeration Systems
Economy Vacuum Pumps
These units have all the quality and durability of the Recreonics pump system for a budget minded facility. Each unit is furnished with an electrical pump, stainless steel cart, 50' of electrical cord, weather proof switch, pre-wired GFCI protector, and barbed hose fittings for discharge and suction fittings.
Dimensions: 34" h x 18" w x 44" l
Weight: 75 Ibs.
Shipping Weight: Shipped assembled by motor freight only: 85 lbs.
1 HP Economy Vacuum Pump ........ 10-830
Features 1-1⁄2" suction and discharge. (115V, 20 amp – Dedicated circuit).
1-1⁄2 HP Economy Vacuum Pump ... 10-832
Features 2" suction and 1-1⁄2" discharge with flow rates up to 6,000 gph. (230V, 15 amp – Dedicated circuit)
Each unit includes an electric pump, stainless steel pump cart, a check valve on the pump suction, a gate valve on the pump discharge, hose bib connection for easy priming, a weatherproof switch, pre-wired GFCI protector, barbed hose fittings for discharge and suction fittings and 50' of power cord. Requires dedicated circuit
Dimensions: 34" h x 18" w x 44" l
Weight: 80 Ibs.
Shipping Weight: Shipped assembled by motor freight only: 90 lbs.
1 HP Vacuum Pump System ........... 10-820
Features 1-1⁄2" suction and 1-1⁄2" discharge. (115V, 20 amp)
1-1/2 HP Vacuum Pump System ..... 10-822 Features 2" suction and 1-1⁄2" discharge. (230V, 15 amp)
1-1/2 HP Vacuum Pump System ..... 10-823 (115V, 20 amp – Dedicated circuit).
2 HP Vacuum Pump System 10-824
Features 2" suction and 1-1⁄2" discharge. (230 volt, 15 amp – Dedicated circuit)
Recreonics 3 HP
Gasoline Powered Vacuum Pump
This heavy-duty portable vacuum features a 3 HP gas-driven pump, with 2" aluminum quick-connects on suciton and discharge. All mounted on a stainless steel cart.
Recreonics 3 HP Vacuum Pump .... 10-975
Weight: 115 Ibs.
WaterCannon Aerators
The Watercannons use the natural process of aeration found in ocean waves, river rapids, and waterfalls to cool your pool. Used consistently at night, it cools the average pool 10-12 degrees. Each unit includes (1) flexible intake assembly with (3) hydro-flow safety fitting covers, (1) sprayer arm assembly with (2) adjustable brass elbows, (2) adjustable brass/ chrome sprayer nozzles (1) Electrical safety cord with ground fault circuit interrupter (GFCI) and twist-lock watertight connections. Includes stainless steel cart with solid tires and Sunbrella cover.
Watercannon 1.5 (115-Volt/20 AMP)
Produces a flow rate up to 230 gallons per minute.
Produces a flow rate up to 310 gallons per minute.
Watercannon
NOTE: Both Watercannons require a dedicated 20 AMP circuit (either 120 or 240 volt) with a NEMA approved receptacle run in close proximity by a licensed electrician.
Recreonics
Vacuum, Backwash Hoses & Accessories
Swimming Pool Vacuum Hoses
A vacuum hose is an essential item around every aquatic facility, so we offer three grades of hose to meet everyone's needs–standard, heavy-duty and industrial.
Standard Vacuum Hose (3-Year Warranty)
Color: Blue/Black
1-1⁄2" x 25' length w/swivel .............. 10-399
Weight: 4.6 lbs.
1-1⁄2" x 30' length w/swivel .............. 10-400
Weight: 5 lbs.
1-1⁄2" x 35' length w/swivel ............... 10-401
Weight: 6.5 lbs.
1-1⁄2" x 40' length w/swivel .............. 10-402
Weight: 7.5 lbs.
1-1⁄2" x 50' length w/swivel 10-404
Weight: 8 lbs.
Heavy-Duty Vacuum Hose (5-Year Warranty)
Color: Blue/White
1-1⁄2" x 35' length w/swivel ............... 10-412
Weight: 9.5 lbs.
1-1⁄2" x 40' length w/swivel ............... 10-413
Weight: 11 lbs.
1-1⁄2" x 50' length w/swivel............... 10-414
Weight: 14 lbs.
Industrial Vacuum Hose (5-Year Warranty)
Color: White/Black
1-1⁄2" x 75' length w/swivel 10-429
Weight: 20.5 lbs.
2" x 50' length w/swivel ................. 10-422
Weight: 21.5 lbs.
2" x 75' length w/swivel ................... 10-431
This durable vacuum hose reel will hold up to 100 feet of 2" vacuum hose. The solid stainless steel construction ensures it’s user of many years of use. Each unit is portable and will easily pass through a regular door opening.
We offer both vinyl and heavy-duty PVC reinforced discharge hose.
Vinyl Discharge Hose
This high quality vinyl discharge hose is 20% thicker than the competition. The 25' and 50' rolls include a stainless steel clamp.
1-1⁄2"
“Quick-Connect Hose Couplings”
Ingenious "quick-connect" aluminum couplings mount into the cuffed end of a hose to provide a sturdy, water- and leak-tight metal end connection.
“Quick-Connect” Couplings
1 Ib., 14 oz.
Deluxe See-Thru Vacuum Head..... 10-207
These vacuum heads are exclusively designed for fiberglass and/or liner pools. Fits a 1-1⁄2" vacuum hose only.
Dimensions: 11-1⁄8" wide x 11-1⁄8" deep
Weight: 5 lbs.
12" Flexible Vacuum Head .............. 10-210
Features polyethylene housing with enclosed weights. Adjustable solid plastic wheels and snap-adapt handle. Fits 1-1⁄2" vacuum hose only.
Dimensions: 12" wide x 7" deep
Weight: 5 lbs.
14" Wide Flexible Vacuum Head .... 10-201
Features additional weights, urethane wheels and a swivel handle. Fits 1-1⁄2" vacuum hose only.
Dimensions: 14.5" wide x 7" deep
Weight: 6 lbs.
22" Gyro-Vac+ Vacuum Head ......... 10-204
The unique Gyro-Vac+ features multi-directional wheels that allow the user to glide the vacuum in any direction with ease. Features carbon reinforced swivel handle, heavy-duty polymer wheels and improved bottom clearance. Fits 1-1/2" vacuum hose only.
Dimensions: 22" wide x 8.25" deep
Weight: 11 lbs.
18" Commercial Vacuum ................ 10-238
Vacuum comes complete with adjustable wheels. Fits 1-1⁄2" vacuum hose.
Dim.: 18" wide x 6" deep Weight: 11 Ibs.
18" Bendervac Vacuum Head ......... 10-215
This 18" vacuum head has a rubber body that conforms to all pool contours. Standard 1-1⁄2" hose connection. Add 10-384 for 2" hose connection.
Giant, super strong leaf rake with alumi num edge. Heavy-duty fiberglass screen bag.
Dimensions: 9-1⁄2"T x 29"W x 13"D
Weight: 1 Ib., 8 oz.
DuraPro Maxi Rake
The pocket "stays" on this leaf rake keep the pocket open moving forward and closed coming back, allowing debris to enter and empty effortlessly. The leafing edge rotates to make leaves and debris glide into the pocket.
Specially designed to be used with automatic suction-side pool vacuum heads. Rainbow Leaf Traps capture large amounts of leaves, twigs, rocks, hair pins, and other debris before it reaches the skimmer or pump basket. Features snap open and close lid, clear housing, and large handle for ease of carrying. Includes 3 feet of flexible 1-1⁄2" vacuum hose.
“Snap Open” Leaf Trap .................... 10-281
Weight: 5 Ibs.
Replacement Bag ......................... 10-281.S
This lightweight yet indestructible leaf rake features a frame that won’t corrode or break and a 10" deep seamless pocket.
Dimensions: 10"T x 20-1⁄2"W x 10"D
The Wall Whale Swimming Pool Brush
The wall whale swimming pool brush is a pool brush with nylon bristles and a special spoiler assembly. The spoiler, or tail, holds the brush against the pool surface with more than 10 times the force of a normal brush. Brushing a swimming pool is the most important part of algae control and removing mineral deposits.
A professional-duty, stiff brush for heavy daily use. This 24" wide curved brush features heavy-duty blue nylon bristles.
Weight: 1 Ib., 4 oz.
Olympic Wall Brush 10-160
A heavy-duty tool for frequent cleaning of large commercial or private pools. Extra-wide 36" brush has curved ends and 5 rows of white nylon bristles.
Weight: 1 Ib., 14 oz.
Poolblok Tile and Concrete Cleaner(each) ................................... 10-284
Dimensions: 6" x 3" x 3"
Weight: 1 lb.
Poolblok Tile and Concrete Cleaner .......................................... 10-284.C
Case of 12 individually wrapped blocks. Shipping Weight: 19 lbs.
Brushes & Squeegees
Indestructible Squeegees
When we found these rugged high performance cleaning tools we couldn’t resist offering them.
Available with a 24" or 36" straight blade, our squeegees feature unique indestructible all-steel frames, connectors, and 5' steel handles. Ships unassembled.
Indestructible Deck and Floor Brushes
Our indestructible brushes feature a "Miracle Tip" all-steel handle adapter that clamps the handle firmly to the brush with bolts. It comes loose only when you want it to! High-tech polystyrene bristles will not sag, take a set, or mat down in oil or water. These brushes are scientifically engineered to match every sweeping need. Each brush comes complete with a 23" brush head and a 5' steel handle guaranteed unbreakable.
Indestructible Squeegee 24" .......... 10-188
Features straight blade, includes handle
Weight: 12 oz.
Indestructible Squeegee 36" .......... 10-189
Features straight blade, includes handle.
Weight: 1 lb. 4 oz.
Classic Squeegees
Each of these heavy-duty reinforced deck and floor squeegees features a reversible neoprene black rubber blade and cadmium plated parts. The Classic Squeegee is always a favorite and is ideal for water removal on large deck and floor areas. All Squeegees below are compatible with our 10-345 - 54" tapered handle (see Page 39).
36" Blade, Curved Ends ................... 10-196
Weight: 3 Ibs., 4 oz.
24" Blade, Curved Ends ................... 10-195
Weight: 2 Ibs., 4 oz.
Smooth Surface Brush .................... 10-176 (Blue bristles) The tips of the bristles are frayed to give each individual bristle hundreds of soft filaments in contact with the floor. Recommended for tiled areas, painted surfaces or slightly rough surfaces.
Dimensions: 23" head, 5' handle
Weight: 5 Ibs., 6 oz.
All-Purpose Brush ............................ 10-177 (Black bristles) A blend of stiff and soft bristles. Ideal for wet or soiled areas around the pool or in the locker room.
Dimensions: 23" head, 5' handle
Weight: 5 Ibs., 6 oz.
Deck and Floor Brush
This sturdy polystyrene bristle brush is ideal for wet or muddy floors or dry heavily soiled areas. It will not rot, mat, or fall apart even with heavy daily use. It is easily washed, dries quickly, and maintains its stiff sweeping ability indefinitely. Brush head measures 16" wide and comes complete with a 60" heavy-duty 1-1⁄8" diameter lacquered hardwood handle.
Coarse Brush .................................... 10-178 (Brown bristles) A blend of stiff bristles. This is an excellent brush for scrubbing large, rough areas or sweeping heavy debris.
Dimensions: 23" head, 5' handle
Weight: 5 Ibs., 6 oz.
Deck and Floor Brush ..................... 10-198
Weight: 2 lbs.
10-177
10-178
10-176
Handles and Poles
Handles and Poles
NOTE: Handles and poles 8'-0" or longer are required to ship motor freight. Poles shipping small package service are subject to additional handling fees depending on dimensions
Super-Tough Fiberglass Handle
These non-conductive fiberglass handles are available in the standard 8' length, or in 12', 16' and 24' [(3) 8' poles] lengths. Each handle measures 1-1⁄4" outer diameter to allow equipment that snaps over a pole to fit firmly. However, for use with brushes, vacuum heads or skimmers that snap into a pole, you will need the 10-374 Quick-Change Adapter, listed below.
Set includes two 8' handles with a connector sleeve.
Actual pole lengths are 95-1⁄2".
Weight: 3 Ibs., 10 oz.
24' Aluminum Handle Set .............. 10-320
Set includes three 8' handles with two connector sleeves.
Actual pole lengths are 95-1⁄2".
Weight: 5 Ibs., 12 oz.
1-1⁄4" Pole Connector Collar ............ 10-347
Includes bolts and wing nuts.
Shipping Weight: 1 Ib.
(3) 8' HD (Snap-Together) Poles .... 10-350
These heavy-duty aluminum poles ship in a set of three and can be snapped together for 16' or 24' poles.
Actual pole lengths are 95-1⁄2".
Dually Telescopic Poles
These poles are made of the heaviest wall tubing available. They feature a three-piece design, which allows the pole to be shipped FedEx.
is 95-1⁄2".
Aluminum Telescoping Handles
Fabricated from high-quality anodized aluminum, these corrosion-resistant handles. 4'-8'
Note: 10-323, 10-333, 10-334 and10-344 must ship motor freight.
Fiberglass Telescoping Handle
Fabricated from the highest quality fiberglass, these telescoping handles withstand heavy usage and abuse. Expandable to 16' and 24', each handle is coated with a UV protective layer that prevents splintering and features a vinyl handle grip and E-Z lock compression cam for positive handle locking.
Fiberglass Handle .................
Dimensions: 1-1⁄4" x 12' to 24' Ships via motor freight only.
Wooden Handles
Made from quality hardwood, carefully smoothed to a 1-1⁄8" diameter. Ideal for replacing existing wooden handles or for pairing with our many brushes.
Hangers, Adapters and Connectors
Hose, Pole, Accessory Hangers 10-367
Large multi-purpose wall hangers will hold vac hose, pole, skimmer and brush.
Weight: 1 lb.
Economy Pole Hangers .................. 10-354
Made from molded ABS plastic, these economical double hooks will hold two poles. 2 hook set.
Weight: 4 oz.
Standard Pole Hangers 10-355
One pair of durable plastic double hooks for hanging two poles. 2 hook set.
Weight: 4 oz.
Metal Pole Hangers 10-365
Set of blue anodized aluminum hangers.
Weight: 10 oz.
Plastic Hose Hangers 10-356
Sturdy hangers designed especially for vacuum hose. They project 3-1⁄2" and are recommended for hanging one 50' section of hose.
Weight: 4 oz.
Missing Linx Fence Hanger ............ 10-366
This simple device takes advantage of the chain link fence. Fits into fence mesh and a convenient hanger is created.
“Spring Type” Pole Clamps ............ 10-353
Mount these stainless steel pole clamps to any wall to hold poles or handles vertically or horizontally. Sold in pairs.
Sturdy stainless steel hooks recommended for hanging heavy-duty hose. Sold in pairs.
Weight: 8 oz.
Pole Storage Clips (Pair) 10-369
These injection molded rubber clips will hold poles with outside diameters of 1" to 1-1⁄2".
1-1⁄4" Pole Connector....................... 10-347
Made out of aluminum. Includes bolts and nuts.
Deluxe “Quick Change” Handle Adapter 10-341
Includes built-in spring clip, wing nuts and bolts. Allows for quick change of pole accessories. Use with our aluminum handles.
Male Thread Adapter ...................... 10-338 For use with female threaded ends.
ProDaptor Pole Adapter ............... 10-336
Pole adaptor enables you to use a pool pole for applications such as painting/ acid washing, etc. 1-1⁄8" slip by 3⁄4" threaded connections.
Plastic Spring Clip .......................... 10-339
Replaces nuts and bolts for quick connection of cleaning tools or adapters to most handles.
Underwater Cleaning/Diving Outfit, Manual Vacuums
Hammer-Head Pool Cleaning System
The Hammer-Head is the perfect tool for fast and easy on-site cleaning. It will operate in as little as 12" of water depth. Can be used safely while swimmers are still in the water. The unit includes a lightweight cart with wheels, 30" wide vacuum head with 3-blade propeller, 60’ of cord, 7.2 AMP battery charger and (2) debris bags. Not included, but required is a 12-Volt deep cycle marine battery. (Pole is sold separately.)
Hammer-Head Cleaner .... 10-275
Shipping Weight: 85 lbs.
The Pool Blaster PRO 1000
Precision V10
Standard Bag with Cleat...................11-106
Superfine Bag with Cleat.................. 11-113 Volcano X-Fine Bag ...........................11-120
This heavy-duty commercial underwater breathing unit is designed to facilitate cleaning, repair or inspection of pools too wide or deep to permit easy access or cleaning from the pool side. Unit is suitable for single-man operation to a maximum depth of 30' with standard air supply hose. Complete outfit includes 2HP compressor (115-volt, 13.5 amp), (2) 3-1⁄2 gallon holding tanks, diving mask w/ air control valve, 100' air supply hose and weight belt with four 3 Ib. weights.
Underwater Cleaning/
Diving Outfit 10-465
Shipping Weight: (1 box: 133 lbs.)
This commercial cleaner has been updated with a sealed battery for enhanced durability. Features (3) filter bags (all purpose, sand & silt, & xtreme multi-layer), a flexible 14.75" wide vacuum head, shoulder strap, and wall charger. The included shoulder strap allows for convenient transport to and from the pool site. Attach to any standard telescopic pool pole (sold separately).
The unit must be under water to operate.
The Pool Blaster PRO 1000 ............. 10-601
Shipping Weight: 11.4 lbs.
The Pool Blaster PRO 2000
This commercial rechargeable vacuum comes with two vacuum heads, one 19" gunite vacuum head and one 14.5" wide vinyl liner vacuum head. This commercial Cleaner has been updated with a sealed battery for enhanced durability and includes (3) filter bags (all purpose, sand& silt, & xtreme multi-layer), a shoulder strap, and wall charger. Attach to any standard telescopic pole (sold separately)
The unit must be under water to operate.
The Pool Blaster PRO 2000 ........... 10-602
Shipping Weight: 19.8 lbs. NEW
The Precision V10 has been updated with a sealed battery for enhanced durability. This powerful vacuum is self-contained and can be attached to a standard pole (sold separately). Will operate up to 2 hour on a single batter pack. Includes a standard vacuum head for pools with a PVC membrane, and a flexible vacuum head with polyurethane ballbearings designed for pools with plaster surfaces. Minimum Operating Depth: 28" at a 45-degree angle. Unit must be underwater to operate.
Precision V10 10-600
Shipping Weight: 16.8 lbs. NEW
The Pool Blaster MAX CG
The Max CG features rechargeable lithium technology, a push button on/off switch. Comes with (1) multilayer bag and (1) all purpose bag as well as a 12.75" wide vacuum head. The unit will attach to any standard telescopic pool pole (sold separately). The unit must be under water to operate.
The Pool Blaster MAX CG .............. 10-307
Shipping Weight: 7 lbs.
Robotic Pool Cleaners
Magnum Jr. (100' Cable)
The Magnum Jr. is a great robotic pool cleaner for small to medium sized commercial swimming pools up to 67' long. Features the GYRO navigation system that allows the cleaner to fully and efficiently clean your swimming pool. Includes control for “spot-cleaning”, PVC brushes, and trolley for transportation to and from the pool edge. Cleans pool floor, walls and waterline.
Magnum Jr. (100' Cable) ................... 10-311
Magnum (120' Cable)
The Magnum is suitable for medium sized commercial swimming pools up to 98' long. Features the GYRO navigation system that allows the the cleaner to fully and efficiently clean your swimming pool. Includes control for “spot-cleaning”, PVA brushes, and trolley for transportation to and from the pool edge. Cleans pool floor, walls, and waterline.
Magnum (120' Cable) ...................... 10-309
Automatic Commercial Pool Cleaners
Gemini (150' Cable) with IR Sensor
The Gemini robotic pool cleaner is the perfect solution for pools up to 164' long. Features the GYRO navigation system that allows the the cleaner to fully and efficiently clean your swimming pool. Includes control for “spot-cleaning”, PVC brushes, and trolley for transportation to and from the pool edge. Cleans pool floor only, but does have manual wall cleaning capability using the remote control.
Ultramax (150' Cable) with IR Sensor
The Ultramax robotic pool cleaner is the perfect solution for pools up to 164' long. Features the GYRO navigation system that allows the the cleaner to fully and efficiently clean your swimming pool. Includes control for “spot-cleaning”, PVC brushes, and trolley for transportation to and from the pool edge. Cleans pool floor only, but does have manual wall cleaning capability using the remote control.
The Wave 20 is an automatic robotic low profile cleaner for wading/reflection pools and fountains. Will operate in as little as 8" of water depth. Floor cleaner only. Caddy included.
WAVE 100 10-418
Designed for mid-sized pools up to 88 feet, such as those found in gyms, fitness clubs, YMCAs, and water parks. Ensures comprehensive cleaning with its superior filtering capabilities, and highly effective scrubbing of the floor, walls, and waterline. Caddy included.
Ideal solution for small hotel, condo, and apartment pools up to 50 feet. Ensures comprehensive cleaning with its superior filtering capabilities, and highly effective scrubbing of the floor, walls, and waterline. Caddy included.
WAVE 120 10-425
Designed for large pools up to 148 feet, put the power of two robots to work at once. Ideal for universities, YMCAs, and water parks, With superior filtering capabilities and an extra-wide cleaning path, this cleaner expertly cleans the pool with maximum effectiveness and efficiency. Caddy included.
Ideal solution for small to mid-sized condo, apartment, and neighborhood pools up to 68 feet. Equipped with dual brushes and a center active brush for highly effective scrubbing of the floor, walls, and waterline. Caddy included.
Extra-wide for maximum cleaning efficiency, the Wave 140 is the perfect solution for large university, fitness clubs, YMCA, and resort pools up to 127 feet, including those with beach entry. Features fully automated operation, and multiple cleaning options and a wide cleaning path of 22 inches. Caddy included.
Water Broom, Pressure Washer,
WYSIWASH
Before your pool can reopen, you need an easy way to sanitize public areas quickly, affordably, & effectively. You need the Wysiwash Sanitizing System. Spray down your entire pool deck - including the chairs, railings, and showers - in just minutes.
Wysiwash is no mix, no rinse, so you can sanitize and get back to business. Wysiwash's pool-safe formula is formulated to kill viruses, bacteria, and mold, including coronavirus.
Wysiwash's patented dispensing technology ensures that the Sanitizer-V emits the correct ratio of chlorine to water.
Replacement Parts for Sanitizer-V (ONLY)
Flow Control Valve .......................... 10-295
The Flow Control Valve allows water to flow directly through the hose to the body of the Sanitizer-V.
Female Quick Connect ................... 10-296
The Wysiwash Female Quick Connector makes connecting and disconnecting a hose to the Wysiwash Sanitizing System easy and fast.
Replacment Hydro Body ................. 10-299 Made from ABS Polycarbonate.
Replacement Caplet Container 10-301 Attaches to the Hydro Body and holds the Wysiwash Jacketed Caplets
Adjustable Spray Nozzle… 10-303
The Zinc-Coated Adjustable Spray Nozzle emits the Wysiwash Sanitizing Solution. Twist to adjust the spray from a wide cone to a narrow stream.
Includes the all new Flow Control Valve! It's so easy to use, you will clean more often with increased effectiveness. Simply connect the Applicator to a hose and spray.
WYSIWASH Sanitizer-V ................... 10-292
Designed to work with all Wysiwash Sanitizing Systems, this set of 9 jacketed caplets kills germs, algae, mold and dangerous pathogens. Combined with the Sanitizer-V unit, they provide a no-rinse, environmentally friendly solution that saves time and money. With proper drainage and storage, one caplet is good for up to 3-1⁄2 hours of continuous cleaning. A nine count bucket is equivalent to approximately 45 gallons of bleach.
WYSIWASH Jacketed Caplets ...... 50-230
Commercial Hand Pressure Washer
This hand held electric cold water pressure washer delivers up to 2 gpm at 1450 psi. Features include an industrial motor that is totally enclosed and thermal overload protected, industrial triplex plunger pump with ceramic plungers and stainless steel valves is protected by unloader valve. This pressure washer is equipped with low pressure chemical injection for application of concentrate liquid detergents and is activated by a hi-low pressure adjustable nozzle on the trigger gun. Includes 35' of power cord with GFCI. 2 HP Pressure Washer 10-286
120-Volt, 20 AMP, Single Phase
Dimensions: 18"L x 12"W x 11"H
Shipping Weight: 68 lbs.
Winterizing Accessories, Stainless Steel Cleaner and Kits
Deluxe Skim Insure
This specially designed sealed plastic cylinder threads into the skimmer opening to seal the skimmer line and to prevent skimmer damage caused by ice expansion. Has both 1-1⁄2" and 2" thread connection.
Deluxe Skim Insure 37-916
Winter Plugs
We offer several different sizes of highquality rubber winter plugs. Each plug features steel bolts and plates with nylon wing nuts.
Winterizing Plug #6 ......................... 37-926 For 1" Fitting.
Winterizing Plug #7 ......................... 37-927 For 1-1⁄4" Pipe.
Winterizing Plug #8 ......................... 37-928 For 1-1⁄2" Pipe.
Winterizing Plug #9 ......................... 37-929 For 1-1⁄2" Pipe and 1-1⁄4" Fittings.
Winterizing Plug #10 ....................... 37-930 For 1-1⁄2" Fitting.
Winterizing Plug #11 ........................ 37-931 For 2" Pipe.
Winterizing Plug #12 ....................... 37-932 For 2" Fitting.
fitting.
Stainless Steel SuperClean™
This citric acid cleaning and passivation product is based on a new technology using safe and environmentally friendly citric acid to remove the free iron from the surface of stainless steel and chromium thereby enriching the surface.
Although not really "new", an emerging technology that is proving to be a vast improvement over the mineral acids is the use of safer organic acids such as citric acid. These are very effective materials which remove a variety of metallic ions that would otherwise affect the corrosion resistance of the stainless steel. These acids are materials that work in aqueous solutions to tie up metal ions so that they are no longer effective or able to have a negative impact. By their very nature, these products are non-toxic, non-corrosive and biodegradable.
SS SuperClean™ is a high quality blend of chemicals formulated for the general cleaning and passivation of stainless steel products.
22 oz. Spray Bottle .......................... 51-400 1-Gallon Bottle 51-402
SS SuperClean™ Plus is formulated for cleaning and passivation of stainless steel with visible rust.
22 oz. Spray Bottle .......................... 51-403 1-Gallon Bottle .................................. 51-405
SS SuperClean™ Gel is a thick liquid citric acid solution for cleaning and passivating. Intended for general cleaning of stainless steel, removing light corrosion while passivating the surface.
Recreonics has put together this starter stainless steel cleaner kit for beginning maintenance on all stainless steel deck equipment. The kit includes (1) green scour pad, (4) wipes, (1) pair of latex gloves and (1) 22 oz. spray bottle of organic citric acid cleaning and passivation solution. All required cleaning instructions and MSDS information is included.
Stainless Steel Cleaning Kit ...........
51-425
Shipping Weight: 3 Ibs.
Stainless Steel Cleaning Kit ........... 51-430
Includes all the same components of the 51-425 kit, but with a 1-gallon container of the organic cleaning and passivation solution.
Shipping Weight: 12 lbs.
37-914
Univ. Winterizing Plug #7-#10
Will fit 1-1⁄4" pipe up to 1-1⁄2"
Specialty Patching and Sealing Products
AquataPoxy Coatings
AquataPoxy coatings are known for their extraordinary moisture tolerance that facilitates superior bonding capabilities in difficult field conditions, including underwater applications. All coatings are certified to requirements of ANSI/NSF Standard 61.
AquataPoxy A-6 Paint
A solvent free,100% solids, corrosion resistant epoxy coating that can be applied to dry or damp metal or concrete, including underwater. Color is white. Coverage is 160 square feet per gallon at a 10-mil thickness.
A solvent free, 100% solids, high build epoxy coating formulated for broad range corrosion protection and a 5-hour quick return to service. Can be applied to dry, wet or underwater surfaces. Color is white. Coverage is 20 square feet per gallon at an 80-mil thickness.
EPOXYBOND® Pool Putty is a unique epoxy putty you can mix in your hands. Simple to use. . .CUT, MIX and FIX ! There’s no need to drain concrete pools to repair leaks and cracks because EPOXYBOND® Pool Putty cures under water.
EPOXYBOND® Pool Putty has been keeping pools usable for more than 25 years.
EPOXYBOND® Pool Putty ................74-107
Weight: 1 lb.
3M Concrete Repair
This self-leveling urethane ® flows smoothly into cleaned cracks and gaps and hardens in as little as 5-minutes. Hardens to any depth without cracking or shrinking. Works on horizontal repairs and is great for setting anchors.
Applied with a standard caulking gun (not included).
Aquaguard is 2-part self-leveling, nonsagging epoxy system that includes a (1) dispensing gun, (1) 50 ml cartridge and (2) mixing tips. Adheres to concrete, fiberglass and steel surfaces. Great for filling in cracks, installing tiles and fixing cracks in skimmers.
Aquaguard 50 ML Kit ......................74-962
Small Injector Gun ........................... 74-963
50 ML Cartridge ...............................74-964
Mixing Tips 74-965
Epoxy-Putty
A unique hand mixable epoxy sealant that cures in minutes. Ideal for wet surfaces and underwater repairs. Epoxy-Putty contains fading blue dye and becomes pure white after mixing. When mixed, EpoxyPutty bonds tenaciously to wet surfaces even when totally immersed and will cure under water down to 40°F.
Epoxy-Putty 4 oz. tube .................... 74-195
Epoxy-Putty 12 tube box ................. 74-196
Weight: 6 Ibs., 4 oz.
Underwater Magic
NEVER EMPTY YOUR POOL AGAIN! Underwater Magic is an extremely strong one component adhesive and sealant, utilizing plastics technology. It is designed for a wide variety of indoor and outdoor swimming pool repair applications. It is 100% silicon free, odorless, chlorine and UV resistant. Color is white.
Underwater Magic 74-976
9.13 oz. Cartridge
Silicone Sealant
This one-part 100% silicone moisture curing RTV (room temperature vulcanizing) compound forms a tough and durable seal with the longterm flexability. Adheres to surfaces such as chrome, aluminum and stainless steel without priming.
Coverage: standard 10.2 oz. cartridge covers approximately 97.65 linear feet of 1⁄8" x 1⁄8" bead. Color is white. Not to be used for underwater applications or to be painted over.
Silicone Sealant 74-360 10.2 oz. Cartridge Case of 24 Cartridges .................
Epoxy Pool Coatings
Ramuc Coating Systems for Commercial Pools
Ramuc® is the leading manufacturer of specialty aquatic coatings that has been trusted for over 90 years to protect and rejuventate commercial pools, spas, fountains, waterslides and other aquatic features.
Hi Build Epoxy Coating
Ramuc Hi Build Epoxy™ provides unsurpassed stain, chemical and abrasion resistance. Renovates aged concrete, plaster, and fiberglass surfaces. VOC compliant in US and Canada. This superior high-build epoxy coating is formulated to provide the longest lasting finish of any pool paint. Packaged in an easy to use 1:1 mix ratio, Hi Build Epoxy rolls easily and builds up to 8 mils dry per coat, rendering “smoothing” qualities on rough surfaces. Two coats offer up to 8 years of service life. Apply with brush, no thicker than 3/8" mohair or lambskin roller, airless or conventional sprayer. Avalable in 2-gallon kits.
2-Gallon Can Kit ...............................74-054
Weight: 20 lbs.
Black (BK), Dawn Blue (B) and White (W) Coverage: 150-200 square feet per gallon. Recoat coverage is 250-300 square feet.
NOTE: Preparation Tips
NEW
HB31 High-Build Epoxy Coating
This 3:1 high-build coating cures to a satin finish with excellent coverage rates, especially on previously painted epoxy surfaces. Because of their chemical cure, epoxies are the paints of choice for indoor and outdoor pools. HB31 Epoxy rolls or sprays easily up to 8 mils dry per coat rendering “smoothing” qualities on rough surfaces. Two coats offer up to 8 years’ service life. Apply with brush, no thicker than 3/8" mohair or lambskin roller, airless or conventional sprayer. Avalable in 1 and 4-gallon kits.
1-Gallon Can Kit ...............................74-055
Weight: 28 lbs.
(Black (BK), Dawn Blue (B), Glacier Blue (GB), Ocean Blue (OB), White (W)
4-Gallon Can Kit ...............................74-056
Dawn Blue (DB), White (W) ONLY)
Weight: 62 lbs.
Coverage: 150-200 square feet per gallon on bare, sandblasted or rough surfaces. Recoat coverage is 250-300 square feet.
SURFACE PREPARATION
EP Epoxy Coating
Ramuc EP Epoxy™ cures to a hard, tough, and durable finish. It provides stain, chemical and abrasion resistance for protection of concrete, plaster and fiberglass swimming pools, spas and slides. High solids, high gloss epoxy coating provides 3 to 4 years of service life. VOC compliant in US and Canada. Excellent coverage rates, especially on previously painted epoxy surfaces. EP Epoxy has been a proven performer for more than 50 years. Epoxies are the coating of choice for indoor pools due to their chemical cure. Apply with brush, no thicker than 3/8" mohair or lambskin roller, airless or conventional sprayer. Avalable in 1-gallon kits only.
1-Gallon Can .....................................74-022
Weight: 13 lbs.
(Black (BK), Aqua Green (AG), Dawn Blue B), Dark Blue (DB), Royal Blue (RB), White (W)
Coverage: 175-200 square feet per gallon on bare, sandblasted or rough surfaces. Recoat coverage is 375-400 square feet.
Whatever coating you use will adhere best to a solid and clean surface. Inspect the surface condition of your empty pool. Repair minor cracks or chips and sand down all peeling or flaking areas. Follow this by power washing the entire surface to remove loose paint and other debris. Let it dry, then sweep away loose impediments.
CLEAN THE SURFACE
Your pool surface must be completely clean and free of loose paint, dirt, oils, or solutions before you apply your new coating system. We recommend using Ramuc’s Clean & Prep Solution for this process, which replaces the traditional three-step pool cleaning process with one step. Flush the surface three times with a strong stream of clean water from a garden hose. Do not flush using a power washer.
LET THE SURFACE
DRY
The type of coating you will be using dictates how dry the surface must be before you begin. Acrylic paint can be applied to a damp surface, but epoxy must be applied to a completely dry surface. Check the instructions on your product label to determine dryness requirements.
BLACK DAWN BLUE WHITE
BLACK DAWN BLUE WHITE GLACIER BLUE
OCEAN BLUE
BLACK AQUAGREEN WHITE DAWN BLUE
ROYAL BLUE DARK BLUE
Ramuc Coating Systems for Commercial Pools
Rubber-Based, Acrylic Pool & Deck Coatings
Ramuc® is the leading manufacturer of specialty aquatic coatings that has been trusted for over 90 years to protect and rejuventate commercial pools, spas, fountains, waterslides and other aquatic features.
A-2 Synthetic Rubber Coating
Ramuc A-2 is a premium rubber coating formulated to provide excellent hiding, coverage and protection. It restores and upgrades previously painted chlorinated rubber and synthetic rubber surfaces, and is VOC Compliant in all 50 states and Canada. For upgrading and restoring previously painted synthetic or chlorinated rubber surfaces. Self priming, 2-coat system. High-gloss finish allows for easty cleaning. Up to 4 years of service life. Excellent coverage rates. Apply with brush, no thicker than 3/8" mohair or lambskin roller, airless or conventional sprayer. Avalable in 1-gallon cans and 5-gallon pails.
1-Gallon Can
Weight: 13 lbs.
1-Gallon Pail
Weight: 65 lbs.
74-014
74-016
Black (BK), Dawn Blue (B), White (W)
Coverage: 200-300 square feet per gallon on bare surfaces and 300-400 square feet per gallon on recoats.
Ultra Pro 2000 Synthetic Rubber Coating
Ramuc Ultra Pro 2000 Synthetic Rubber Coating is VOC compliant in all 50 states and Canada. It is designed for commercial use where a competitively priced paint is required and pool maintenance is performed every few years. This coating is an excellent choice for recoating previously painted chlorinated rubber and synthetic rubber surfaces. For use on previously painted chlorinated or synthetic rubber surfaces, as well as bare concrete. Selfpriming 2-coat system. Up to 2 years service life. Apply with brush, no thicker than 3/8" mohair or lambskin roller, airless or conventional sprayer. Avalable in 1-gallon cans and 5-gallon pails.
1-Gallon Can ..................................... 74-018
Weight: 13 lbs.
Dawn Blue (B), Royal Blue (RB), and White (W) 5-Gallon Pail 74-019
Weight: 65 lbs.
Dawn Blue (B), White (W) ONLY
Coverage: 175 - 200 square feet per gallon on bare surface and up to 300 square feet per gallon on recoats.
ADC Acrylic Deck Coating
DS Acrylic Pool Coating
Ramuc DS acrylic aquatic coating is formulated to offer all the advantages of water-based technology, and can be applied to damp surfaces, previously painted chlorinated and synthetic rubber surfaces. DS can be used when short down times are critical, as the pool can be filled within 3 days after the final application. Water-based acrylics are extremely colorfast and UV resistant. Self priming, 2-coat system. Provides a matte finish. Up to 2 years of service life. Clean up with soap and waterApply with brush, no thicker than 3/8" mohair or lambskin roller, airless or conventional sprayer. Avalable in 1-gallon kits only. Not for use on fiberglass surfaces or pools previously coated with epoxy.
1-Gallon Can .................................... 74-050
Shipping Weight: 12.25 lbs.
1-Gallon Pail 74-052
Weight: 62 lbs.
Black (BK), Dawn Blue (B), Royal Blue (RB), White (W)
Coverage: 350 - 400 square feet per gallon.
This durable product is water-based, featuring soap and water clean-up, and allows a concrete deck or patio to return to service in 48 hours. The coating is colorfast, UV resistant and excellent for restoring bare or previously painted concrete surfaces. Elevate the aesthetics and functionality of your textured concrete deck surfaces with Ramuc® Acrylic Deck Coating. Designed for both beauty and safety, this coating provides a non-slip finish ideal for high-traffic areas. Fast dry formula. Self-priming, 2-coat system. Provides a matte finish. VOC compliant in US and Canada. Apply with brush, no thicker than 3/8" non-shedding roller.
1-Gallon ADC Acrylic Deck Coating…………….………74-025
Weight: 12.5 lbs.
Honey Sand (HS), Dune Shadow (DS), Silver Creek (SC), Sandstone (SS), Cayman Sand (CS), and Whisper White (WW)
Coverge: 175 square feet per gallon.
BLACK DAWN BLUE WHITE
DAWN BLUE ROYAL BLUE WHITE
BLACK DAWN BLUE ROYAL BLUE WHITE
Specialty Coatings, Patching & Sealing Products
Ramuc Coating Systems for Commercial Pools
Ramuc® is the leading manufacturer of specialty aquatic coatings that has been trusted for over 90 years to protect and rejuventate commercial pools, spas, fountains, waterslides and other aquatic features.
PSL Nitrile Rubber Caulk
Ramuc PSL is an excellent choice for repairing cracks that may develop over time in pool walls, steps, and other vertical or sloped surfaces. Its unique formulation allows it to be applied directly into cracks up to ½” wide, even under wet conditions, without sagging, ensuring the integrity of the repair. This material is also effective for sealing grout lines in tiled pools, particularly in areas prone to water intrusion or where traditional grouts may fail. Permanent, flexible bond, non-sag formula. Excellent adhesion to most surfaces Can apply down to 32 degrees. Cures under water. Applied with standard caulking gun. Color is off-white
PAL Caulk Cartridge (Each) ............74-982
Weight: 1 lbs.
Epoxy Patching Compound
Epoxy Patching Compound creates a superior bond to all epoxies, polyester resins, metals and wood. It can be sanded, machined, cut, filed, planed, drilled, tapped, or nailed making it perfect for filling, filleting, forming, fairing, and fastening. This low odor formula is resistant to chemicals and is safe to use above and below the waterline. Epoxy Patching Compound can be molded and shaped during aplication and is easily tinted with paints and stains. Epoxy Patching Compound can be over coated by most paints and stains. Will not sag, run or shrink. Great for large or small repairs. Will remain flexible. Applicable above or below the waterline. Applied with caulking gun.
Ramuc Clean & Prep™ Solution is used to clean and degrease; while simultaneously dissolving mineral deposits and increasing porosity for good adhesion on surfaces for painting. It can be used on: painted surfaces, bare plaster, concrete or fiberglass. Clean & Prep is VOC compliant in US and Canada, odor and fume free, water-rinse neutralize and is biodegradable. It is safe to use near plants or grass. Cleans, degreases and prepares surface for proper adhesion prior to painting.
Odor free and biodegradable. Replaces TSP/ Acid Etch/TSP process. Apply with garden sprayer.
1-Gallon Clean & Prep 74-987
Weight: 10.5 lbs.
Coverage: 400 to 800 square feet per gallon depenging on surface.
Ramuc Solvent Thinner
Specially formulated to reduce spray applied solvent-based coatings. Cleans rollers and spray equipment.
1-Gallon Ramuc Solvent .................. 74-043
Weight: 7.5 lbs.
Tuff Coat UT-200 Rubberized Non-Skid Coating
Tuff Coat UT-200 is a single component, flexible, water-based non-skid coating created through a unique process of cross-linking urethanes, acrylics, copolymers and recycled rubber granules to create a long-lasting non-slip finish. This product can be applied by a Tuff Coat textured roller, low-pressure hopper spray gun, or commerical texture sprayer. This product is designed to provide an attractive, highly durable, impact-resistant, non-slip surface for splash pads, kiddie,
Tuff Coat’s flexible matte finish dries to 30-35 mils of thickness creating a finish that hides significant imperfections on all surfaces as well as improves existing nonskid finishes to provide additional safety.
Fiberglass, Concrete & Wood Application Guide
UT-200 Submersible, Medium Texture
Tuff Coat UT-200 series is a single component, flexible, water-based non-skid coating created through a unique process of cross-linking urethanes, acrylics, co-polymers and recycled rubber granules to create a long-lasting non-slip finish. Exceptionally easy one-part application. Soap and water clean-up. Highly durable and impact resistant. This product is low odor and should be applied with a Tuff Coat roller or low-pressure hopper spray gun.
1-Gallon Can .................................... 74-060
(Reference color chart for available choices) Coverage is 45 square feet per gallon.
UT-15 Tuff Coat Cleaner & Degraser
Tuff Coat Cleaner and Degreaser UT-15 is a commercial strength, concentrated formula that contains a proprietary blend of biodegradable surfactants, detergents and emulsifiers in a water-based solution. Apply with cleaning rag, brush, pour or pressure washer.
1-Gallon Jug ...................................... 74-067
Weight: 5 lbs.
Coverage is 250 square feet per gallon at full strength.
Tuff Coat Texttured Rollers
Tuff Coat non-skid coatings must be applied by Tuff Coat rollers. Tuff Coat rollers are designed to ensure a uniform finish and proper dispersion of the rubber granules.
Tuff Coat UT-80 is a two-component water-based epoxy primer/sealer. Excellent for concrete, masonry, fiberglass, wood, and previously painted substrates for heavy use and moisture areas. Tuff Coat UT-80 can be applied to damp concrete surfaces. This primer is compatible with all Tuff Coat rubberized non-skid coatings. Simple 1:1 mix ratio. This product is low odor and should be applied with a Tuff Coat roller or low-pressure hopper spray gun.
1-Gallon Can Kit ...............................74-064
2.5-Gallon Pail (Part B) ....................74-066
Shipping Weight: 35 lbs.
Coverage is 250 square feet per gallon.
ADA Compliant - Battery Powered Lifts
PAL2 with Lift Operator®
The PAL2 pool lift features a sleek, modern design with attractive matte finish and is availale in both standard and HI/LO models. This lift is completely portable and easily removed from the deck when the pool is closed. It comes standard with our Secure-It Kit, which allows the lift to be fixed to the deck. The PAL2 features the LiftOperator®
Controller located on the mast that provides true operational redundancy from the control box and the handset. The PAL2 has been third party tested and verified ADA compliant. The PAL2 has a lifting capacity of 300 lbs. and offers a 240° rotation to ensure safe transfer. Constructed of powder coated stainless steel and aluminum. Requires completed pool profile worksheet.
Aquatic Lift Series
Splash™ Pool Lift
The Splash™ Lift series meets the Americans with Disabilities Act Access Guidelines (ADAAG 2010). The Splash™ lift installs into your pool deck via an anchor (sold separately), and can be easily removed for winter storage. 359° rotation ensures a safe transfer area. The standard Splash™ pool lift has 400 pound lifting capacity.
The Extended Reach version of the Splash™ pool lift has a 300 pound lifting capacity. The Splash™ frame is fabricated out of powder coated stainless steel and aluminum. Review the chart below for the different available versions of the Splash™ lift and choose the one that best fits your facility needs. Anchor sold separately. Requires completed pool profile worksheet.
and
Splash™ Accessories and Replacement
S.R. Smith California Compliant Lift Operator Kits
ADA Compliant - Battery Powered Lifts
MultiLift2™ Access Lift
The multiLift2® series meets the Americans with Disabilities Act Access Guidelines (ADAAG 2010). Featuring a field reversible seating design, the flange mounted lift is built with powder-coated stainless steel and aluminum construction with a 350lb. lifting capacity. The updated design increases previous deck-to-water level
capacity from 8" to 14.5" as well as improvements to both minimum and maximum setback clearances. The multiLift2 comes standard with the LiftOperator® Intelligent Control System and is available in three color options (see below). Order 48-001 anchor kit for new construction installations. Requires completed pool profile worksheet. Anchor sold separately. Installation Template comes with the anchor.
MULTI-LIFT2 Series
aXs2 Pool Access Lift
The aXs2 is a low profile pool lift with a compact footprint. It is ideal for community and hospitality swimming pools. Constructed from stainless steel and powder-coated aluminum extrusions. Provides 360-degree rotation to ensure sufficient clear deck space for safe transfers.
and
Third-party tested and verified this ADA compliant access lift has a 300 lb. lifting capacity. Features integrated armrests and a sturdy roto-molded seat. Ships complete with the LiftOperator® Intelligent Controller, 24-volt battery, charger, electronic console cover, seat belt assembly. Anchor sold separately.
and
Battery and Water Powered ADA Compliant Lifts
Aqua Creek Ranger 2 Pool Lift
This compact, non-rotational lift is ADA and UL Safety Certified. Field-reversible design with durable stainless steel components. Anchor sold separately.
Ranger 2 Lift (White/Tan) ......... 46-900.WT
Also available in white with blue seat (.WB), white with gray seat (.WG), white with white seat(.WW)
Shipping Weight: 160 lbs
Anchor Kit for Ranger 2 ................. 46-902
(Standard Installation Applications)
Cover for Ranger 2 ......................... 46-903
Available in Blue (.B), Gray (.G) and Tan (.T)
Aqua Creek Scout Excel Pool Lift
ADA Compliant and UL Safety Certified with 360° rotation and adjustable seat height, the Scout Excel is versatile enough to fit almost any pool profile. Anchor Sold Separately.
Scout Excel Lift (White/Blue) .. 46-920.WB
Also available in white with tan seat (.WT), white with gray seat (.WG), white with white seat (.WW)
Shipping Weight: 275 lbs
Anchor Kit for Scout Excel 46-922
(Standard Installation Applications)
Cover for Scout Excel ..................... 46-924
Available in Blue (.B), Gray (.G) and Tan (.T)
Shipping Weight: 6 lbs
Note: All Aqua Creek lifts can be custom powder-coated if provided with RAL number.
Aqua Creek Mighty 400 Lift
The ADA Compliant, UL Certified, Mighty 400 pool lift has a 400 lb. lifting capacity, 360-degree rotation, and can reach out acroos the pool deck by as much as 44”.
Also available in white with tan seat (.WT), white with gray seat (.WG), and white with white seat (.WW)
Shipping Weight: 290 lbs
Anchor Kit for Mighty 400 ............. 46-922
(Standard Installation Applications)
Cover for Mighty 400 46-927
Available in Blue (.B), Gray (.G) and Tan (.T)
Shipping Weight: 8 lbs
Aquatic Access Lift IGAT-180 AD (Automatic 180º Seat Turn)
Including all of the ADA-compliant features of the IGAT-180, the IGAT-180AD for pools with covers is entirely above the deck until the seat is lowered. Lifts 350 lb. at 55-65 PSI. This lift requires a heavy-duty anchor.
The green water-powered solution to pool access complies with the 2010 Standards for Accessible Design. Mounts into a socket in the deck and rolls away for storage. Features independent operation from deck and water via dual controls. Lifts 400 lb. with 55-65 PSI water pressure. Includes padded flip-up footrest, seatbelt, and anchor socket with cover.
NOTE: Add (.LA) to the 46-640, 46-670, 46-671 and 46-673 to order the lift less anchor.
Aquatic Access Accessories
ADA Easy Stair
The ADA Easy Stair is a proven economical solution for all pools requiring a primary or secondary means of ADA access. This durable marine-grade fiberglass stair system is lightweight, compact and with the included dolly is easily portable. The ADA Easy Stair requires no anchoring to the pool deck or any pool modification. Each pool stair is custom fabricated and manufactured to your pool profile with just a few simple measurements. Our solid construction includes entrapment skirts with protective wear strips for increase durability; white non-conductive polymer coated steel handrails, and non-skid ADA compliant gel-coated steps for secure footing. The approach platform is designed based on deck edge and gutter profiles, to fit both corner and standard placement.
Maximum load capacity is 500 lbs. Ships fully assembled. Available in Light Blue (.LB), Medium Blue (.B) and Safety Yellow (.Y).
ADA Easy Stair ................................ 46-800
Will accommodate a top-of-deck to pool floor distance of 32" to 67".
Shipping Weight: Will vary from 160 to 190 lbs.
ADA Compliant Steps and Ladders
AquaTrek 2 ADA Compliant Steps
This ADA compliant step system is designed for frequent installs and removals in and out of the swimming pool. Eash step unit is custom made based on a detailed measurement guide that must be completed to determine how many steps will be required to accommodate your pool/deck profile. Available from 3 to 8 step tread models. Designed with inside ADA rails 24” wide between rails-closed risers and a safety side skirt on one side only. Additional side skirt for the other side can be ordered separately. The step systems have a 600 lbs. weight capacity 12” tread depth and 7” maximum riser height. No bonding required.
Replacement Tread for Step .......... 46-613 (30” L x 13.5” D)
4” x 28” Yellow Safety Strip .......... 46-608 4” x 28” Black Safety Strap............ 46-610
Aqua Step ADA
The Aqua Step ADA is built to meet or exceed the current ADA mandates for pool stairs. The ADA model is portable, extremely durable, and carries an exclusive limited lifetime frame warranty. Standard ADA features include shielded riser openings, a full 11" of exposed foot strike area to allow easy forward entry, hand rails that extend a minimum of 12" onto the top platform entry area, and a 34" to 38" railing height depending on the model. Per ADA guidelines the railings are no more than 24" apart and the non skid surfaces meet or exceed OSHA guidelines. The Aqua Step ADA frame is constructed of extruded high density plastic. The railings are crafted from fluted UVA protected high density plastic for durability and enhanced grip. An aluminum subframe is installed for added durability to each railing. Individuals treads and all hardware are stainless steel. The Aqua Step ADA weight capacity exceeds 600 pounds and will safely facilitate all users. Transport wheels are standard for easy maneuvering on the deck. Aqua Step ADA units incorporate Custom Approach Platforms at no extra cost to accommodate any/all deck configurations. Pool profile drawings must be submitted when ordering as each Aqua Step ADA is custom built for your pool.
Optional Safety Side Guards are installed after securing the Aqua Step ADA to the deck for patrons pool access. The Side Guards hook over the frame and are secured with a twist lock system.
Light Blue (.LB) Safety Yellow (.Y)
Med. Blue (.B)
Note: Shown with (2) side skirts. One comes standard, the other would be in addition.
Wheelchairs and Underwater Platforms
Mobile Aquatic Chair (MAC)
This chair is essential for facilities utilizing a ramp, zero-depth entry or movable floor. The MAC is built specifically for use in aquatic environments. Features a powder coated stainless steel frame to resist corrosion and a swing away arm for easy transfer. Front and rear stabilizer wheels eliminate the tendency of a chair to pitch forward or back while going down the ramp. The chair has a 300 lb. weight capacity and features an 18" wide seat.
Mobile Aquatic Chair (MAC) 46-723
Dims: 43" Long x 25" Wide x 22" High
Shipping Weight: 60 lbs.
AquaTrek™ Wheelchair
Designed for use in swimming pools, spas and showers. Features a swinging side arm, retractable footrest, and graphite hand rims. Seatbelt, shoulder harness and anti-tip are add-on options. New non-sacral seating option also available.
The Swim Teaching Platform is a standing deck designed for teaching lessons in deeper water. The platform creates a sturdy, non-slip surface above the pool bottom, creating a safe and enjoyable learning experience. Made out of a uniquely molded fiberglass, the Swim Teaching Platform is sturdy and built to withstand chlorine and sun damage.
Railing creates a safe and clear distinction between teaching areas and can be connected to create larger platforms. In order to accommodate the varying swimming pool depths the legs of the Swim Teaching Platforms can be cut to varying lengths in the field by the purchaser. Assembly instructions as well as a dimensional chart comes with each unit. The Swim Teaching platform structure has wheels for easy storage and is light enough to be moved by one person.
Shipping Weight: 85 lbs.–Ships Motor Freight 46-715 46-716
Swim Station
The swim station is incredibly strong, lightweight, versatile and easy on your budget. Builds confidence quickly and safely in young swimmers teaching platforms open many possibilities for swimming games, drills, and skills while maintaining interest levels of young swimmers. Fabricated out of construction grade fluted PVC with an aluminum sub-frame. Simply flipping the platform over provides 2 teaching heights (14"and 20") to quickly adjust for different age groups. Exclusive textured plastic surface provides sure footing for young swimmers.
Swim Station .....................................46-717
Dims: 32" W x 54" L x 14"/20" H
Shipping Weight: 75 lbs.
QUA LITY
The RECREONICS Underwater Platform provides the instructor with a portable and durable platform 60" x 40" and is designed to be free standing with variable and adjustable height. PVC guard rails can be assembled and installed for further student stability and security. The rails are locked in an “L” arrangement that provides confidence but with easy, non-impeded access to the swimming area outside the Underwater Platform.
Your students will push-off sooner and with less coaxing and make those first independent swimming motions without the fear and trepidation that is sometimes companion to hanging on to a gutter and pushing off a vertical wall.
The RECREONICS Underwater Platform is available in three heights. Comes complete with easy to follow instructions. All you supply is the sand. Requires a minimum (2) people 15-20 minutes to get in and out of pool.
Underwater Platform 46-730.PLTFM
Decreases water depth by 12"
Shipping Weight: 150 lbs. (4 Boxes)
Underwater Platform 46-731.PLTFM
Decreases water depth by 15"
Shipping Weight: 150 lbs. (4 Boxes)
Underwater Platform 46-732.PLTFM
Decreases water depth by 18"
Shipping Weight: 185 lbs. (5 Boxes)
Swim Stations and Underwater Bikes
Portable Swim Station
This Swim Station is lightweight, colorful, and fun to use. The Swim Station helps build confidence and dramatically accelerates learning time. The platform is equipped with 2 railings, 1 long and 1 short. Makes available a wide variety of new games and drills incorporating the Swim Station.
Unique features include an innovative linking system when 2 or more platforms are used. The 100% modular rail system allows a wide variety of configurations for creative drills and games covering all age groups. Adjustable legs allow quick adjustments between different ages and heights of young swimmers. Options include: Oversize leg kits and additional railings.
Portable Swim Station .................... 46-733
Dimensions: 60" W x 38" Depth
Height: Adjustable (12"-16")
Weight: 50 lbs.
Optional Side Rail ...................... 46-733.SR
Weight: 8 lbs.
Optional
Weight: 11 lbs.
Stainless Steel Teaching Platform
Tidalwave Aquatic Exercise Bike
The Tidalwave aquatic bike uses a transmission with a unique flywheel design. The adjustable handlebars allow users of all types to customize their workout. The frame is fabricated out of powder-coated stainless steel. Weight capacity is 300 lbs. Features an easy fold frame design and comes standard with a bicycle style seat. The Tidalwave is an excellent option for physical therapy and rehabilitation limited applications. Three year limited warranty on metal frame, one year for parts and transmission.
Tidalwave Aquatic Exercise Bike.. 95-425
Available in Neon Green (.G) Pink (.P) and Yellow (.Y),Gray (.GR), Tan (.T), White (.W). Shipping Weight: 60 lbs.
NOTE: The Pool Platform is a teaching aid intended for aquatic instruction. It is not meant to be used as a permanent pool fixture.
This adjustable height instructional platform is a fantastic aid for both young swimmers and their instructors. The platform is constructed out of T-304 stainless steel with all “worked areas” electro-chemically passivated stainless steel for maximum corrosion resistance. The main platform deck is constructed out of white non-skid resin coated fiberglass reinforced grating in a “T” bar configuration. The adjustable legs with white rubber bumpers will allow the user to adjust the height of the platform from 18" to 26" above the pool floor in 2" increments.
Stainless Steel Teaching Platform 46-735
Overall Dimensions: 60" wide x 39" deep
Weight: 185 lbs.
The ProWave pool bike offers an incredible physical, cardiovascular, and most importantly fun workout right in the pool. The unique flywheel design provides a smooth operation and you can adjust your resistance to create a more invigorating workout with a simple tun of the tension knob. Three year limited warranty on frame.
ProWave Pool Bike ......................... 95-430
Available in Neon Green (.G), Pink (.P) and Yellow (.Y), Gray (.GR), Tan (.T), White (.W)
Shipping Weight: 51 lbs.
Training Bar Option ......................... 95-431
Comfort Seat Option 95-432
Diving Towers with Stair Entry Systems
Dive Towers with Stair Entry
These 3-meter dive towers with stair entry systems are an evolution of design based on years of both user and aquatic consultant request for a safer and more comfortable way for the swimmer to ascend to the diving board. They are available both with a new diving tower or as a retro-fit to an existing Paragon diving tower.
Each new tower is furnished complete with railings, rear and front anchors, pedestal, and fulcrum. Intermediate railings have a thickness of .065" guard rails are .109" and all structural members are .145".
Standard tower pedestals come with a red prime coat, ready for painting to match your facility. T-304 stainless steel pedestals are available as an upgrade and at an additional cost.
The stair entry system includes 1" outside diameter vertical pickets, not greater than 5" on center. All treads and platforms to be made from white Duradeck fiberglass decking. Stair treads shall be 11" standard and risers shall not exceed 9". Standard models satisfy most pool configurations; however, the stair entry system can be varied to suit specific job requirements or specifications. Many custom architectural elements are also available including plexiglas panels (in place of pickets).
AutoCAD® drawings and Revit models are available. Diving boards are ordered separately and must be specified at time of order.
WARNING: Diving equipment shown
3-Meter Diving Towers with Stair Entry System
Diving board length and style must be specified at time of order.
RETROFIT Stair Entry To Exisiting Paragon 3-Meter Dive Towers
*Standard access is on Right Side (viewed from rear of tower, facing pool). Left side access also available upon request. Custom retrofit solutions available for other styles.
Paragon Paraflyte Diving Tower (Ladder at Side)
Recommended whenever deck space is limited. Access ladder can be mounted on either side. Includes flanged pedestal, geared adjustable fulcrum and rear swivel.
Paragon Paraflyte Diving Tower (Ladder at Rear)
The most common option, designed for competition and larger commercial or institutional recreational pools where ample space is available. Includes flanged pedestal, geared adjustable fulcrum and rear swivel.
Three-Meter
Three-Meter
NOTE: Pedestals ship with red primer paint coat only.
NOTE: Pedestals ship with red primer paint coat only.
Paragon Sportflyte Diving Tower (Ladder at Rear)
These diving towers are not for competition use, but instead offer an economical option for recreation diving. Includes flanged pedestal and a fulcrum that can be repositioned.
NOTE: Type and length of board must be specified when ordering. Diving boards are sold separately. Duraflex or Maxiflex boards can’t be used in conjunction with Sportflyte diving towers.
Three-Meter
NOTE: Pedestals ship with red primer paint coat only.
WARNING: Diving equipment shown here should be used only on pools that conform to FINA, NCAA, NFSHSA and US Diving standards. Please refer to your local, municipal and state statutes, ordinances, rules and regulations which may vary.
Paragon Duradapt Towers
Three-Meter Duradapt
NOTE: Pedestals ship with primer paint coat only.
NOTE: Pedestals ship with primer paint coat only.
Diving Boards
Paragon Dive Tower General Information
Paragon Paraflyte diving stands/towers are designed to receive either a 16' or 14' diving board. Duraflex 16' springboards are the only board that should be used for competitive diving. 16' or 14' S.R. Smith aluminum or fiberglass/wood boards are to be used for recreational diving purposes. Diving boards are ordered separately, but must be specified when order the dive tower.
Diving Tower Material of Construction
Paragon offers three material grades of diving towers/stands Ultraflyte offer the premium material grade. All tubing in fabricated from (1.90” O.D. x .145” wall T-304 stainless steel). Superflyte is the general purpose material grade. All tubing is fabricated from a mix of (1.90" O.D. x .145" wall (Structural Components), .109" and .065" T-304 stainless steel).
Topflyte is the economy material grade. All tubing except for flexural members are fabricated out of (1.90" O.D. x .065" T-304 stainless steel).
Geared Adjustable Fulcrums
The geared fulcrum permits divers to select the right amount of spring preference. Calibrated markings on the gear-holder make it easy for the diver to re-set the fulcrum. Smooth, precise adjustments are easy due to the machined gears and freely turning sleeve on the axle. The adjusting wheel is operated by hand or foot for the full 24" fulcrum range. Stops are provided to limit the range for recreational usage. Holders keep the roller gears locked into the gear track and shields all gears from contact by divers and spectators.
The Paragon Paraflyte (Ultraflyte and Superflyte material grade) dive towers come with the deluxe geared adjustable fulcrum. The Topflyte material grade dive towers are provided with the economy grade geared adjustable fulcrum.
Paragon Duradapt Dive Towers (Sloping Pedestals)
Made to accept the Duraflex Short Stand (fulcrum and anchor/hinged assembly). Recommended only for competition pools and made only for 16' Duraflex (40-326) or Maxiflex “B” (40-329) boards. Ladder can be mounted at side or rear of tower. Include flanged style pedestal, and two rear anchors. The Duraflex Short Stand without guard rails (42-209) for the Duradapt dive tower is not included and must be ordered separately.
All railings are .109" wall thickness except for flexural members. (Order fulcrum and anchor/hinge assembly separately).
Shipping Weight: 490 lbs.
Duraflex Short Stand ......................
42-209
Includes fulcrum and rear hinge assembly. Does not include guard rails. Specify board length when ordering. See Anchors on page 61.
Weight: 140 lbs.
WARNING: Diving equipment shown here should be used only on pools that conform to FINA, NCAA, NFSHA and US Diving standards. Please refer to your local, municipal and state statues, ordinance, rules and regulations which may vary.
Duraflex Competitive Dive Stands
Duraflex Dive Stands
The Duraflex 1-meter and 3-meter stands are designed to provide a firm foundation for mounting Duraflex aluminum springboards. The stands consist of a ladder assembly, fulcrum assembly and main support assembly. These components are fabricated from heavy-duty aluminum castings coated with a top quality epoxy powder coating. The double rails on both sides are made from high-quality stainless steel. For anchorage you can choose to use either the (set of 8) bronze castings that are set before the concrete is poured or the Hilti stainless threaded inserts that can be installed after the concrete deck has been poured. Castings are recommended for new deck installation and Hilti anchors are recommended for existing deck installations. Anchor layout template is provided with all dive stands.
Duraflex Short Stands
Following Duraflex’s tradition of innovation and providing world-class competition diving boards, the all-new Duraflex Short Stand gives divers increased confidence, consistency, and performance between diving board stands.
Duraflex Replacement Parts
NOTE: When ordering a Duraflex Dive Stand, a dive stand questionnaire and a FINA standard confirmation form must be completed before stand can be fabricated. The pool where the stand/ board will be installed must have diving-well dimensions conforming to FINA, USA Diving, and/or NCAA dimensional requirements.
43-133 524 Roller Bearing
43-138 517 Roller Block Assembly
43-139 518 Slide Bearing
43-140 515 Rubber Bumper
43-141 516 Anti-Rattle Clamp
43-143 C208A Track with Bolts
43-145 529 Track Bolt
Competitive Springboards and Recreational Diving Boards
Duraflex Board Refinish Service
Duraflex Aluminum Springboards
The 16' Maxiflex model B springboard (pictured above) is the diving board that is used in all major competitive diving events worldwide. Collegiate dive programs exclusively use the Maxi-B diving boards, as do many high schools. The Maxi-B is lighter in weight, and is said to give a slightly quicker action in the hurdle-step.
The 14' and 16' Duraflex springboards (not pictured) are used for recreational diving purposes at commercial pool facilities that conform to FINA, USA Diving and/or NCAA dimensional requirements.
The new Duraflex Board Cover provides improved protection to your Duraflex board and will help maintain board performance and longevity. Available in black and shale gray. Save on the cover by ordering it with the board.
This service allows you to ship your Duraflex or Maxi-Flex springboard back to the Duraflex International fatory to be refinished. When preparing your springboard for shipment is it important to protect it from freight damage. You should remove the hinges, wrap the board in a mininum of 3/8” thick corrugated cardboard, using duct tape. Do not wrap 2 or more boards together. A single board can be carried by two people. Do not use a forklift to load the board into the truck trailer. We strongly recommend that you take clear images of your springboard prior to packaging and shipment. This will be helpful evidence if you do have to file a freight claim.
Replacement Vinyl Channels
For Duraflex diving boards. Channels are available in two lengths. Includes glue and application brush. When ordering, please specify length.
6"
2 lbs.
7
NOTE: All orders for Duraflex springboards will require the purchaser to sign-off affirming comparison to the current World Aquatics (Formerly FINA) / USA Diving / NCAA / NFHS Depth and Dimensions regulations for diving facilities to the depths and dimensions of the diving well located the facility where the the springboard will be utilizied. Confirmaton that the swimming pool diving well where this diving board(s) or diving stand(s) will be installed and used, meets or exceeds all of the current minimum depths and dimensions required for a competitive diving well as specified by World Aquatics (Formerly FINA), USA Diving, the NCAA, or the NFHS is required.
S.R.Smith Aluminum Diving Board
This aluminum diving board is intended for heavy duty recreational use on commercial swimming pools. Features an epoxy and welded beam extrusion construction with welded ends, providing exceptional durability, and a non-slip tread for maximum safety. Available in White and (.B) Marine Blue (Sides).
S.R. Smith Frontier III Board
The Frontier III Commercial board features a durable acrylic outer body with non-slip tread. They are available in 10', 12', 14' and 16' lengths. 12', 14' and 16' boards are available in White, (.B) Marine Blue (Sides) and (.BMT) Marine Blue with matching tread.
NOTE: Please specify the desired color of the diving board sides. Add (.B) for marine blue after the catalog number.
Dive Stand Anchors, Fulcrums & Accessories
Anchor Bolt Assembly
The (8) anchor j-bolts are carbon steel, 3⁄4" in diameter. Each bolt is hooked at the bottom. A threaded busing is provided at the top. A template is included for accurate setting for alignment with the dive tower pedestal.
Anchor Bolt Assembly ................... 42-088
Weight: 15 lbs.
Cage Anchor Assembly
Must be used as the pedestal anchor with the tower is supported on a framed slab. Anchor consists of 3⁄4" thick carbon steel plates, 3⁄4" threaded rods with threaded bushings. Can be fabricated to accommodate a beam or slab of any thickness greater than 6".
Cage Anchor Assembly 42-087.5
Weight: 95 lbs.
Rear Anchor Deluxe
Used to anchor rear legs of all Paragon diving towers. Includes two-piece heavy cast bronze with chrome-plated upper flange and required hardware.
Rear Anchor Deluxe 44-319
Weight: 7 lbs.
Geared Adjustable Fulcrums
A readily adjustable fulcrum is required for competitive diving. A geared fulcrum permits each diver to select just the right amount of spring for his or her weight and specific dives. Calibrated, full-view markings on the gear-holder make it simple for each diver to re-set the fulcrum where desired. Smooth, precise adjustments are easily made because of the machined gears and freely turning sleeve on the axle. The adjusting wheel is easily operable by hand or foot for the full 24" fulcrum range. Stops are provided to limit range for recreational applications. Holders keep the rolling gears locked into the gear track and shields all gears from contact by divers and spectators.
26" Deluxe Geared Fulcrum .......... 40-088
Shipping Weight: 75 lbs.
30" Deluxe Geared Fulcrum .......... 40-089
Shipping Weight: 77 lbs.
26" Economy Geared Fulcrum...... 40-409
Shipping Weight: 50 lbs.
30" Economy Geared Fulcrum 40-410
Shipping Weight: 52 lbs.
Rear Swivel Assemblies (Pair)
Permits free movement of the butt end of the diving board, thereby improving diver performance and increasing board life.
Rear Swivel for Duraflex Board ..... 40-417
Weight: 8 Ibs.
Rear Swivel for Maxiflex Board ...... 40-418
Weight: 7 Ibs.
Rear Swivel for all other boards .... 40-416
Weight: 7 Ibs.
Diving Board Mounting Kits
Diving board mounting kits reduce clatter, board noise and greatly extend diving board life. Kit includes stainless butt plates, rubber pads, bottom plate and carriage bolts. Be sure to include center-to-center distance of two-hole mounting and specify board length when ordering.
Diving Board Anchor Plate Set ........................................... 40-024
For 18" wide boards.
Weight: 2 lbs.
Diving Board Anchor Plate Set ......................................40-024.20
Replacement Diving Board Assembly Includes a heavy-duty stainless steel bolt and fitting nut. Fits most diving board anchor plate sets.
Dimensions: 5-1⁄2" long
Weight: 3 oz.
Fulcrum Covers
Paragon Starting Platforms
How To Size Your Starting Platforms
1. Establish the maximum desired height above water using applicable rulings that govern competitive swimming. Information provided is the latest available at the time of printing. Please confirm that rules have not changed.
IMPORTANT: Please refer to your local, municipal, and state statues, ordinances, and regulations, which may vary from locale to locale.
What Sets Paragon Starting Platforms Apart
Paragon Starting Platform Tops
Paragon Custom Logo Tops and Backplates
**Location of Water Depth Measurements from Pool Wall
FINA 3'-3-1⁄2" (1 meter) to 19’-8-1⁄4” (6 meters)
NCAA Minimum 4'-0" throughout pool recommended
USAS 3'-3-1⁄2" (1 meter) to 16'-5" (5 meters)
USMS 3’-3-1⁄2" (1 meter) to 16'-5" (5 meters)
NFHS From pool wall (0 meters) to 16'-5" (5 meters)
2. Determine the “B” Dimension:
The dimension is always taken from the vertical pool wall to the center of the anchor socket.
3. Calculating the “A” Dimension:
The “A” dimension is defined as the vertical dimension from the top of the anchor socket (flush with the pool deck slab) to the top, front edge of the starting platform. The “A” dimension plus the deck to water dimension (DW) cannot exceed the maximum height above water (H) as determined by your ruling body. If your pool deck is sloped (for drainage), please account for the rise/drop in elevation of the deck incalculating the “DW” dimension.
4. For each given pool type, Paragon has general platform recommendations. These are provided for your convenience in selecting a platform. Select a platform with the appropriate “A” and “B” dimensions as determined above.
The most important part of a starting platform for a competitive swimmer is the surface they are launching from. Paragon’s top is made from a solid sheet of highdensity UV inhibited polypropylene that features a cross-grooved, non-skid sand finish. The cross-grooved pattern enhances water drainage which is crucial to a solid start. The top is impervious to corrosion, warpage or cracking. We offer both a standard (24" x 20") and a Track Start (24" x 32") size. Top surfaces can be fabricated with custom colors matched to any Pantone color as well as custom logos. In addition to the starting platform top, we also offer the Track Start Plus+™ Adjustable Backplate Kit, which is made exactly like the platform tops. The backplate frame is made from powder-coated (black) stainless steel. Custom colors and logos are available options.
Paragon Pedestals
Paragon’s superior starting platform pedestals are fabricated as a single weldment of high grade certified T304L stainless steel, polished and buffed to a 320-grit finish. Welds are electro-chemically passivated for maximum corrosion resistance. Each pedestal is custom fabricated to accommodate each facility. Available as single leg (quickset) or dual leg (competitor) versions. All pedestals can be powder coated to match any RAL color.
Our custom logo sand top and back plate option has become a very popular upgrade. We have been customizing our tops and back plates for facilities all across the United States. This custom feature offers expanded design options such as school or team logos. Complete logo artwork digital files with PMS colors are required.
Paragon Anchors
In addition to the importance of the starting platform top, the ability of the anchor to achieve zero-movement is paramount to swimmers. Paragon’s patented Dual-Wedge™ toolless clamping anchors in conjunction with their taper-lock base has no equal. Once the starting platform is inserted into the anchor and is tightened by hand all movement is eliminated. Available in both Quickset® Dual-Wedge™ for single leg platforms and Competitor Dual-Wedge™ for dual leg platforms. Custom depth anchors are available to allow for the same platforms to be used in multiple locations with different deck-towater dimensions.
Paragon Starting Platforms
Colorado Block® (Side Mount)
With the Colorado Block you can rely on accuracy to 1/100th of a second! The RJP portion of the block can decipher between weight shifts and actual starts. The uniquely-engineered Colorado Block houses the connection plate, which protects the electronics from the harsh pool environment. Additionally, it enables the removal of the timing system without tools. Anchor sold Separately.
The rear mount version of the Colorado Block® is required for anchor setback or “B” dimension of 36"-40”. The rear mount models are available with powder-coated stainless steel sponsor’s panels. The horn and connector plate brackets are mounted to the bottom side of the platform top. Anchor sold Separately.
Sponsor’s panel of powder coated stainless steel fits on platform’s slide brackets to display sponsor info, school logo, etc. Also includes brackets (only) for the horn and deck plate, which are sold separately. Shipping Weight: 30 lbs.
Track-Start Competitor (Side Mount)
This extremely versatile starting platform features the 24" wide x 32" deep sandgrooved track-start top. This starting platform is shown in the image above with an “A” dimension greater than 24" and a “B” dimension of 18".
The starting platform above is shown with “B” dimension of 24". The starting platform design and appearance changes somewhat based on the swimming pool deck-to-water, the desired height of the platform top above water, the ruling body that swim meets will fall under and the required “B” or anchor set-back dimension. All of these dimensions determine the final design and appearance of the TrackStart Side Mount Starting Platform.
The starting platform above is shown with an “A” dimension of less than 24.5" and a “B” dimension of 18". Ships complete with 6" Competitor Dual-Wedge® anchor unless otherwise specified. All starting platforms require a completed order information sheet. Custom platforms require approved submittal drawings and could incur additional charges. Both color and logo upgrades to the platform tops are available. Anchor sold Separately.
Standard Top Color Upgrade ........ 46-458 Custom Top Logo Upgrade ........... 46-465
Track-Start Plus+™ Enhancements
These new options are available for all Track Start™ starting platform models and can also be easily added as a retro-fit to any existing Track Start™ platform.
Adjustable Backplate Kit ................ 46-418
Includes T-304 stainless steel, powder coated supporting frame, T-304 slide track with locking pins. The footrest is constructed of cross-grooved, sand-coated, polypropylene top material. Custom colors are optional (46-466) with block; (46-466.A) ordered separately.
Side Hand Grip Kit ........................... 46-419
Includes (2) black powder-coated 1” O.D. T-304 stainless steel handles with mounting plates and required hardware.
This starting platform offers the 24"W x 32"D track start top mounted to a single leg pedestal. This starting platform is designed to accommodate most pool configurations, however custom designs are available. This starting platform provides a seamless upgrade and replacement of your existing Paragon standard quickset starting platforms as they are designed to use your existing quickset anchors. Powder coating is now available for the stainless steel pedestals in a variety of colors. The anchor setback or “B” dimension ranges from 21” to 26” depending upon platform height. Anchor sold Separately.
The Competitor platform (dual leg models) is our premier starting platform. This versatile design accommodates our standard tops (24" x 20"). The competitor style platforms provide the ease of including your school graphics to your top.
All Competitor Dual Wedge® anchor systems (patented) offer the feature of installing the platform without tools and come in two types of anchor assemblies, 6" Competitor (for anchor setbacks of under 30") or 10" Competitor (for anchor setbacks of over 30"). All starting platforms are provided with anchors unless otherwise specified. Platform top consists of a 11⁄4" thick UV inhibited polypropylene top with patent-pending, cross-grooved, non-skid, white sand finish. Colors and graphics are an option. Anchor sold Separately.
Long Reach Competitor ............. 46-110.LA
Shipping Weight: 100 lbs.
6" Dual Wedge® Anchor 46-156
Shipping Weight: 6 lbs.
Standard Color Upgrade ............... 46-455
Long Reach Competitor (B = 30" - 40")
Designed to accommodate anchor setbacks of 30" to 40".
Anchor sold Separately.
Long Reach Competitor ............. 46-112.LA
Shipping Weight: 120 lbs.
10" Dual Wedge® Anchor 46-159
Shipping Weight: 8 lbs.
Standard Color Upgrade ............... 46-455
Classic Standard Competitor
This dual leg design utilizes the standard size top (24" x 20") and offers the opportunity to have a colored top and/or custom graphics. The anchor setback or “B” dimension is fixed at 18". Anchor sold Separately.
Classic Standard Competitor ... 46-104.LA
Shipping Weight: 55 lbs.
6" Dual Wedge® Anchor 46-156
Shipping Weight: 6 lbs.
Standard Color Upgrade ............... 46-455
Full Height Single Leg Platforms
These starting platforms are available in a variety of configurations to accommodate your requirerments. They are provided with your choice of two anchoring systems, Paraflyte or Quickset. Platform top consists of a 11⁄4" thick UV inhibited 24" x 20" polypropylene top with patent-pending, crossgrooved, non-skid, white sand finish.
Standard Paraflyte Platform
Designed to fit most pools. The anchor setback or “B” dimension ranges from 21" to 26" depending upon platform height. Requires tools for installation and removal. Anchor sold Separately.
Standard Paraflyte ..................... 46-100.LA
Starting Platforms and Anchors are sold separately. Add a (.LA) to the platform catalog number to order platform less anchor.
Track-Start Plus+™ STS Backplate Kits
These new backplate kits can be adapted to new or existing Paragon Quickset, Paraflyte and Competitor style starting platforms. Features side-to-side adjustment that allows for unimpeded rear access and gives the swimmer flexibility for better take-off. For use with Paragon 24" x 20" tops only.
Designed to fit most pools. The anchor setback or “B” dimension ranges from 21" to 26" depending on platform height. Re-quires no tools for installation and removal. Anchor sold Separately.
The long reach standard Quickset starting platform is designed for deck level pools with wide overflow gutter systems. The anchor setback or “B” dimension is fixed at 34-1⁄2". Requires no tools for installation and removal. Anchor sold Separately.
The varsity starting platform accommodates a less than maximum height above water.
Optional 46-177 Step
Long Reach Varsity Quickset
The long reach varsity quickset starting platform is designed for deck level pools with wide overflow gutter systems. The anchor setback or “B” dimension is fixed at 34-1⁄2". Anchor is sold separately.
The platform top consists of 1-1⁄4” thick UV inhibited 24" x 20" polypropylene top with patent-pending, cross-grooved, non-skid, white sand finish.
We recommend a mounting step (Catalog No. 46-169) be added when the “A” dimension is 15" or greater (at additional cost). Varsity models do not include a mounting step and must be specified at time of order. The anchor setback or “B” dimension is available in 14”, 18”, 21” or 26”. Ships complete with anchor. Anchor sold Separately.
Starting Platforms ship complete with anchors. Add a (.LA) to the platform catalog number to order platform less anchor.
Before
After
Renew your existing Paragon
Starting Platform Tops (and steps)
Send us your old style Paragon white polypropylene tops and steps and take advantage of our refinishing program. You’ll get the most recent groove patterns as well as the sand finish surface for a great value.
Grooved/Sand Refinish for:
Platform Accessories/Backstroke Device
Quickset Dual-Wedge® Anchor
This quick-set anchor requires no tools to operate. The design features both the patented taper lock base and the new dual acting wedge design, which completely eliminate any front-to-back movement. The dual wedge anchor has an integral adjusting knob, which is easily turned by hand to install and remove. The anchor is constructed of heavy-duty T-304 stainless steel, and brass components. Includes flush cover for when the starting platform is out of the anchor.
These two-leg model anchors have been designed for greater support and improved operation. They now have the same locking features as the Quickset Dual-Wedge® Anchor with the advantage of two legs. The heavy duty cast stainless body features the patented taper lock in combination with the wedge/knob assembly.
6" Dual-Wedge® Anchor .................. 46-156
For installations with anchor set back of 30" or less.
Shipping Weight: 11 lbs.
10" Dual-Wedge® Anchor ................ 46-159
For installations with anchor set back of 30" to 40".
Shipping Weight: 13 lbs.
Paraflyte Anchor Assembly
Ideal for situations where the platform does not need to be removed from the pool deck. Single-legged starting platform is bolted to the cast bronze anchor requiring tools for installation and removal of the platform.
Paraflyte Anchor Assembly ............. 46-101
Shipping Weight: 4 lbs.
Replacement Paragon Tops
Standard replacement tops and top/step kits for your Paragon starting platforms. Standard white and includes required hardware.
Sand Top and Step Kit (Standard) 47-168 (24" x 20" Top and Step – White)
Sand Top Kit (Standard) ................. .46-145 (24" x 20" Top Only – White)
Sand Top Kit (Competitor) .............. 46-146 (24" x 20" Top Only – White)
Sand Top and Step Kit (Track Start)46-468 (24" x 32" Top/Step for Side Step – White)
Sand Top Kit (Track Start) .............. 46-469 (24" x 32" Top Only for Rear Mount – White)
Sand Grooved Mounting Step
For Paragon starting platforms only. Includes required mounting hardware. Sand Grooved Mounting Step ........ 46-151
1" Hand Grip For Backstroke Bar
For Paragon starting platforms only. Hand Grip.......................................... 47-100
Paragon Platform Safety Cover
Keeps unwanted users off starting platforms. Tough, lightweight plastic. Safety orange color. Ships complete with bungee cord.
The versatile design allows this backstroke start device to attach to nearly any starting block with either straps or anchors. Once in place, pull down the backstroke wedge to the desired location on the pool wall and lock into place. Once the swimmer has left the wall, the backstroke start device will automatically retract up and out of the water until the next swimmer sets up for the next race without interfering with turns and finishes. The non-slip backstroke start device wedge measures 25.6" x 3.1" (65cm x 8cm) and features a 10° angle for foot placement at the race start. A measuring guide must be submitted with order.
Backstroke Start SB Device .......... 46-200
Includes Short 5.75" Bracket and Strap. Backstroke Start Device (LB) 46-202 Includes Long 9.25" Bracket and Strap. Weight: 15 lbs.
Griff’s Guard Stations
All Terrain Griff’s Guard Station®
The All Terrain Griff’s Guard Station® was designed to work on any terrain. What used to be only available for poolside is now ready for a lakeside setting. It is available in 4'-0", 5'-0" and 6'-0" models. The guard station can easily adapt indoors, outdoors, by the pool, at the waterpark or on a sandy beach.
Features large pneumatic wheels that are designed to travel on any terrain. Large cushioned seat swivels for easy entry and can be folded down when not in use. These wheels can be locked and are easily removable within seconds to help prevent vandalism. Front and rear access allow for uninterrupted coverage of water by the lifeguard when there is a shift change. Griff’s guard stations are designed to significantly increase lifeguard effectiveness.
4' All Terrain Griff’s Guard Station® ................................. 42-682
4'-2" seat above deck height
Shipping Weight: 155 lbs.
5' All Terrain Griff’s Guard Station® ................................. 42-683
5'-2" seat above deck height
Shipping Weight: 179 lbs.
6' All Terrain Griff’s Guard Station® ................................. 42-684
6'-2" seat above deck height
Shipping Weight: 191 lbs.
Griff’s Vision Guard Station™
The patented design of the Griff’s Vision Guard Station™ minimizes the required deck space while maximizing the frontal edge of the guard station. This guard station can be positioned close to the pool edge and accommodates most pool gutter profiles, including zero-depth entry pools, and can be used in both indoor and outdoor applications.
Available in 1-step, 2-step or 3-step models. Features side-to-side access that allows for uninterrupted coverage of the pool area during shift changes. The guard station frames are constructed of 1.90" x .065" T-304 stainless steel, polished to a 320grit finish. Cushioned seat swivels for easy entry and can be folded down when not in use, to prevent UV damage to the vinyl. Solid rubber wheels allow for easy mobility. Heavy-Duty yet light weight non-skid fiberglass reinforced decking assures long lasting, trouble free service. Ships complete with rescue tube/life ring holder and umbrella ring guide.
1-Step Griff’s Vision Guard Station™ .. 42-690
2'-8" Seat Above Deck Height
Shipping Weight: 165 lbs.
2-Step Griff’s Vision Guard Station™ . 42-692
3'-8" Seat Above Deck Height
Shipping Weight: 180 lbs.
3-Step Griff’s Vision Guard Station™ . 42-694
4'-8" Seat Above Deck Height
Shipping Weight: 200 lbs.
Griff’s Vision Sunshade ................. 42-695
Shipping Weight: 50 lbs.
Griff’s Guard Station® (Elevated Step Model)
Griff’s Guard Stations feature front entry, elevated viewing station, easy access, and non-skid surface. A wide front step provides additional station and brings the guard chair closer to the pool edge. Heavy duty wheels allow convenient, easy portability. Stainless steel and fiberglass construction assures long lasting and trouble-free service.
Provides three positions for better viewing. Platform size is 39" x 60" and is 24" above the deck. Front step is 14" x 43".
Elevated step is 14" x 40" and 36" above pool deck.
Griff’s Elevated Guard Station ...... 42-604
Shipping Weight: 265 lbs.
Sunshade Feature for Griff’s Guard Station®
Protects life guards from harmful UV rays while increasing visual effectiveness. Available for all three of Griff’s models.
Sunshade for Flat Station ...............42-670
Shipping Weight: 40 lbs.
Sunshade for Elev. Step Station ... 42-671
Shipping Weight: 40 lbs.
Sunshade for Full Station .............. 42-672
Shipping Weight: 40 lbs.
Available colors:
Portable Lifeguard Chairs
1-Step Lookout Guard Chair
The platform of this chair is only 12" above the deck which allows for a safe, quick rescue. The 360º swivel seat at 2'6" above deck still allows for a clear field of vision. The 38" x 40" platform with rear entrance provides ample room for the lifeguard. Features T-304, 1.90" x .065" stainless steel construction, and one 19" sloping step. Includes umbrella holder and life ring holder.
1-Step Lookout Guard Chair .......... 42-623
Seat Height: 30" above deck
Platform: 38" x 40"; 12" from deck
Shipping Weight: 115 lbs.
Optional Wheel Kit ..................... 42-623.W
2-Step Lookout Guard Chair
This portable guard stand is made of 1.90" x .065" T-304 stainless steel and offers an elevated 360º swivel seat and more than enough room to accommodate two lifeguards during shift change. Seat sets 42" above deck. Includes umbrella holder and wheels.
2-Step Lookout Guard Chair ......... 42-624
Seat Height: 42" above deck
Platform: 38" x 40"
Platform Height: 24" from deck
Shipping Weight: 130 lbs.
3-Step Lookout Guard Chair
The Three Step Lookout lifeguard chair, provides a 4'-0" square platform surface area that is located 3’0” above pool deck. The chair provides a seat at a height of 4'-6" above the pool deck. The seat, mounted on a stainless steel sloping support pedestal, is capable of a full 360° rotation. Steps are 19" wide ABS and have a non-skid surface. 4” O.D. front wheels are provided for easy movability. Includes umbrella and ring buoy holder.
3-Step Lookout Guard Chair with Wheels ..................................... 42-605
Shipping Weight: 175 lbs.
Lookout Dual Side Mount Chair
This newly designed guard chair offers access from two sides. The 360 degrees swivel seat is mounted on 4'x4' fiberglass platform. Seat height is 54” from deck. Platform height is 36” from deck. Made from T-304, .065" wall stainless steel. Includes umbrella and ring buoy holder.
Engineered especially for busy aquatic facilities and water parks. Access from both sides allow uninterrupted guard change. Sloping steps allow quicker dismount. Portable, solid stainless steel frame, 360° swivel seat mounted on an extra large 60" x 36" non-skid fiberglass platform. Utilizes 26" steps. Seat height is 54" from deck. Platform height is 36" from deck. Stand includes umbrella and rescue tube holders. Lookout Platform Chair.................. 42-625
Shipping Weight: 300 lbs.
Griff’s Guard Station® (Flat Model)
Griff’s Guard Stations feature front entry, elevated viewing station, easy access, and non-skid surface. A wide front step provides additional station and brings the guard chair closer to the pool edge. Heavy duty wheels allow convenient, easy portability. Stainless steel and fiberglass construction assures long lasting and trouble-free service.
This station has a wider access for easy entry. Platform size is 39" x 60". Step is 14" x 57". Platform is 24" above deck.
Griff’s Flat Guard Station ............... 42-602
Shipping Weight: 250 lbs.
NOTE: Sunshade feature for Griff’s Guard Station found on page 69.
Outlook 1 Lifeguard Chair
Lifeguard Chairs
Permanent and Portable Lifeguard Chairs
Outlook 1 Lifeguard Chair
The 6' tall Outlook 1 lifeguard chair allows lifeguards to easily scan large pool areas. Outlook lifeguard chairs have an extended observation platform for improved visibility and safety. The slender design of this permanent lifeguard chair requires minimal deck space. Anchor assembly sold separately.
This economically priced lifeguard chair is perfect for all swimming pool recreation facilities. All railings are made from polished 304 stainless steel. Seat assembly allows for 360° rotation. Platform height is 4'-6" and seat height is 6'-1" above deck. Order anchors (44-300) and escutcheons (44-309) separately.
Institutional Lifeguard Chair ........... 12-517
Weight: 150 lbs.
These movable lifeguard chairs are ideal when they need to be moved from location to location. These chairs are both rugged and stable, yet can be easily moved by one person. Available in 4'-0", 6-0" and 8'-0" seat height above deck.
Pictured at right. A lightweight, yet stable chair that is perfect for supervision, instruction or judging. Easily moved to wherever it’s needed. Available in three sizes.
This chair features a molded fiberglass seat for increased durability and comfort. The seat support and the umbrella holder are constructed of 1.90" x .065" T-304 stainless steel. The chair mounting plate is 1⁄4" x 8" x 8". All three pieces are welded together for sturdy support.
Portable Lifeguard Stand................. 12-501
Dimensions: Height - 54- 1⁄ 2" (deck to platform), 73" (deck to seat) Weight: 120 lbs.
The Low Profile Lifeguard Chair
Comes in 30”, 42” and 54” heights to allow for quick exits. Featuring two wheels for flexibility to move and a swiveling seat to allow for 360 degree viewing. Non-slip sand treaded platform and a T-304 stainless steel frame for durability and corrosion resistance.
Comes in either 6’ or 8’ heights (8’ Height Shown in image above) that allow lifeguards to easily scan large pool areas. Featuring two wheels for flexibility to move and a swiveling seat to allow for 360 degree viewing. Non-slip sand treaded platform and a T-304 stainless steel frame for durability and corrosion resistance.
Footboard (30’ x 42") ...................... 42-672
Ladder Tread (with Hardware) ...... 45-009 Left and Right Wheel 42-673 (Includes Bracket and both left & right wheel)
Sentry HDPE Lifeguard Chairs
These chairs are constructed of highdensity polyethylene (HDPE) plastic. Available in 30", 42", and 66" seat heights. Includes 316-SS hardware, slip-resistant step treads, umbrella and cup holder. The 30" guard chair comes with anchor brackets. The 42" and 66" versions come with drilled anchor holes. Anchors are not provided.
66" Sentry with Center Supports ..42-675
Shipping Weight: 180 lbs.
Portable Guard Station
Constructed of fluted PVC/aluminum reinforced frame that is extremely durable yet incredibly lightweight.
Recycled Plastic Lifeguard Chairs
These lifeguard chairs are made from HDPE lumber made out of recycled plastic with UV inhibitors to resist fading. They will never rot or splinter and will never need to be painted or stained. All that is required is a maintenance schedule that includes a cleaning using soap and water. Chairs are shipped knocked-down and require assembly. All chairs are warranted to be free from original defects in material and workmanship for a period of 5 years. Includes T-305 stainless steel hardware. Upgrade to 18-8 chrome-plated bolts, nuts and washers with T-316 screws at an additional cost is available. All lifeguard chairs are available in (.C) Cedar, (.G) Green, (.R) Red (Red is at an additional cost) , (.S) Sand and (.W) White.
Tailwind® LG500 Lifeguard Chair
Proudly made in the USA from recycled plastic lumber with T-305 stainless steel hardware. This lifeguard chair features a 30" seat height and includes both an umbrella and cup holder.
Tailwind® LG500 Chair .................... 42-615
Dimensions: 30" L x 29" W x 51" H
Weight: 68 lbs.
Platform Kit for LG500 ................... 42-609
Shipping Weight: 25 lbs.
Deck Anchor Kit 42-802
Shipping Weight: 17 lbs.
Recycled Plastic Lifeguard Chairs
Tailwind® LG505 Lifeguard Chair
Proudly made in the USA from recycled plastic lumber with T-305 stainless steel hardware. This lifeguard chair features a 30" seat height and includes both an umbrella and cup holder.
Proudly made in the USA from recycled plastic lumber with T-305 stainless steel hardware. This lifeguard chair features a 50" seat height and includes both an umbrella and cup holder.
Tailwind® LG515 Chair .................... 42-636
Chair Dimensions: 43" L x 30" W x 70" H
Shipping Weight: 185 lbs.
Tailwind® LG517 Lifeguard Chair
NOTE: All of these chairs are made from recycled plastic lumber and stainless steel hardware. All chairs ship knocked-down via motor freight and require assembly.
Proudly made in the USA from recycled plastic lumber with T-305 stainless steel hardware. This lifeguard chair features a 40” seat height and includes both an umbrella and cup holder.
Tailwind® LG510 42-633
Chair Dimensions: 41” L x 30” W x 61” H
Shipping Weight: 125 lbs.
Proudly made in the USA from recycled plastic lumber with T-305 stainless steel hardware. This lifeguard chair features a 60" seat height and includes both an umbrella and cup holder.
Tailwind® LG517 Chair 42-642
Chair Dimensions: 49" L x 66" W x 82" H
Shipping Weight: 255 lbs.
Recycled Plastic Lifeguard Chairs
Tailwind® MLG520 Lifeguard Chair
Proudly made in the USA from recycled plastic lumber with T-305 stainless steel hardware. This lifeguard chair features side steps, a 50" seat height and a 33" platform height. Includes both an umbrella and cup holder.
Tailwind® MLG520 Chair ............... 42-622
Chair Dimensions: 48" L x 59" W x 70" H
Shipping Weight: 220 lbs.
Tailwind® MLG525 Lifeguard Chair
Proudly made in the USA from recycled plastic lumber with T-305 stainless steel hardware. This lifeguard chair features a front ladder, 50" seat height and a 33" platform height. Includes both an umbrella and cup holder.
Tailwind® MLG525 Chair ................ 42-634
Chair Dimensions: 62" L x 59" W x 70" H
Shipping Weight: 220 lbs.
Tailwind® TLG530 Lifeguard Chair
Proudly made in the USA from recycled plastic lumber with T-305 stainless steel hardware. This lifeguard chair features side steps, a 64" seat height and a 47" platform height. Includes both an umbrella and cup holder.
Tailwind® TLG530 Chair ................. 42-626
Chair Dimensions: 52" L x 59" W x 85" H
Shipping Weight: 265 lbs.
Tailwind® TLG535 Lifeguard Chair
Proudly made in the USA from recycled plastic lumber with T-305 stainless steel hardware. This lifeguard chair features a front ladder, 64" seat height and a 47" platform height. Includes both an umbrella and cup holder.
Tailwind® TLG535 Chair .................. 42-616
Chair Dimensions: 72" L x 59" W x 85" H
Shipping Weight: 265 lbs.
Accessory Items
Hard Surface Wheel Kit ..................42-798
Fits all lifeguard chairs. For hard surfaces like concrete or tile. (Specify Color.)
Shipping Weight: 20 lbs.
Beach Wheel Kit
42-800 Fits all lifeguard chairs. For beach or lake front surfaces. (Specify Color.)
Shipping Weight: 29 lbs.
Umbrella Holder ............................. 42-804 For additional left side umbrella mount. (Specify Color.)
Shipping Weight: 2 lbs.
All Recycled Plastic Lifeguard Chairs are available in:
White (.W) Green (.G) Red (.R)
Note: There is an upcharge for Red. Cedar (.C) Sand (.S)
Permanent & Semi-Permanent Lifeguard Chairs
Replacement Parts
Ladder
Tread.......... 45-006
Umbrella Ring Guide ........... 47-110
Umbrella Ring Holder ........... 47-111
Replacement Footboard . 42-652
Paraflyte OSHA Chair
Designed for usage that requires chairs to comply with federal OSHA regulations. Guard rails are 42" above the platform and extend to the front of the platform. Platform height is 4'-6" and the seat height is 6'-0" above the deck. Furnished with all required anchors and escutcheon plates.
Paraflyte OSHA Chair .................... 42-640
Stainless steel rails are .065" wall and 1.90" diameter.
Shipping Weight: 192 lbs.
Replacement Parts Ladder
Replacement Parts
Ladder
Tread.......... 45-006
Umbrella Ring Guide ........... 47-110
Umbrella Ring Holder 47-111
Replacement Footboard . 42-649
Tread 45-005
Umbrella Ring Guide ........... 47-110
Umbrella Ring Holder ........... 47-111
Replacement Footboard . 42-649
Paraflyte Club Chair
Acclaimed Paraflyte styling and quality. A single anchor at stainless steel pedestal base supports the entire chair. The vertical access ladder requires less deck space and does not need separate anchors. Now with upgraded platform of laminated wood coated with fiberglass and polyester resin. Platform height is 4'-6" and the seat height is 6'-0" above the deck. Anchor furnished. Anchor sold separately.
Paraflyte Club Chair ........................ 42-613
Stainless steel rails are .065" wall and 1.90" diameter.
Shipping Weight: 175 lbs.
Paraflyte Chair, Ladder at Rear
(Pictured left)
Ladder at rear with flared guard rails provide easy access to the platform. Platform height is 4'-6" and the seat height is 6'-0" above the deck. Furnished with all required anchors and escutcheon plates.
Paraflyte (Ultraflyte) Chair.............. 42-610
Stainless steel rails are .145" wall and 1.90" diameter.
Shipping Weight: 187 lbs.
Paraflyte (Superflyte) Chair ............. 42-611
Stainless steel rails are .065” wall and 1.90” diameter.
Shipping Weight: 157 lbs.
Paraflyte Chair, Ladder at Sides (Pictured right)
Two access ladders, one at each side, allow the lifeguard to dismount quickly and safely – from either side. Platform height is 4’-6” and the seat height is 6’-0” above the deck. Furnished with all required anchors and escutcheon plates.
Paraflyte Chair, Ladders at Side ... 42-630
Stainless steel rails are .065” wall x 1.90” dia.
Shipping Weight: 183 lbs.
Rover Guard Chair
The Rover Guard Chair is designed for pools where the lifeguard chair must be anchored yet still be capable of being readily moved to opposite sides of the pool each day to keep the sun out of lifeguard’s eyes. The rear legs are set into sockets anchored in the deck while the front legs have wheels for easy relocation. Rover Guard Chair ........................... 12-503 Includes (2) anchors.
Seat Height: 6'
Shipping Weight: 185 lbs.
Ladder Tread .... 45-006
Replacement Footboard ................ 42-650
Replacement Seats, Swivels, Pedestals and Treads
These replacement lifeguard seats are suitable for replacing existing seats on most lifeguard chairs. Check the bottom bolt pattern of your existing chair with the bolt pattern illustrated here. If they match, a replacement seat can be ordered.
How to determine bolt hole pattern. Measure center to center from the bolt holes: across front, across back and from front to back.
Replacement for all Paragon guard chairs utilize the pedestal seat.
Shipping Weight: 9 lbs. 45-005 & 45-006
Standard Vertical Ladder With Polypropylene Treads
Commercial Pool Ladders
These newly designed and updated swimming pool ladders are available in standard and cross-braced styles. With 2,3,4 and 5 stainless steel/plastic insert or polyproylene treads. They are fabricated from T-304 stainless steel in either .065", .109" and .145" wall thickness. Powdercoating option is available on all ladders.
NOTE: These ladders have been re-designed based on current codes. Some of the dimensions have changed. Deck to water, distance from anchor to inside pool wall and distance between anchors must be verified. Call our sales consultants today for additional information. 800.428.3254
Safety-Grip Ladder Covers
Reduce liability and promote safety with Safety-Grip. Designed specifically for high traffic commercial use. Made from a commercial grade poly fabric blend with UV inhibitors. Just slide over rail and zip.
3' Safety-Grip - each (1.90") 44-190
4' Safety-Grip - each (1.90") ........... 44-191
5' Safety-Grip - each (1.90") .......... 44-192
6' Safety-Grip - each (1.90") 44-193
7' Safety-Grip - each (1.90") 44-194
8' Safety-Grip - each (1.90") .......... 44-195
Available in Royal Blue (.RB), and Teal (.T). Also available in sizes to fit 1.50" O.D. rails.
Commercial Swimming Pool Ladders
Cross-Braced Ladder With Stainless Steel Treads
Anchor
Commercial Swimming Pool Ladders
Raft Ladder
Designed for installation on floating rafts, this ladder bolts directly to a wooden deck. To mount, simply drill holes where needed in tubing and deck, and bolt ladder to decking.
These “Figure 4” grab rails are designed for use on wide, flat decks without unusual curbs. Standard width is 2'2" and height is 2'11".
.145" wall x 1.90" O.D ...................... 44-073
Weight: 50 Ibs.
.109" wall x 1.90" O.D ......................44-072
Weight: 38 Ibs.
.065" wall x 1.90" O.D ..................... 44-071
Weight: 24 Ibs.
Adjustable Grab Rails
Features closed design with adjustable front leg for additional strength and rigidity. Recommended for pools where unusual curbs or trenches prohibit the use of other types of grab rails. Standard height is 2'9".
.145" wall x 1.90" O.D ......................44-078
Weight: 55 Ibs.
.109" wall x 1.90" O.D ..................... 44-080
Weight: 42 Ibs.
.065" wall x 1.90" O.D
Pretzel Bend Grab Rails
When there is minimal deck space available, the pretzel bend grab rails require the least amount of deck width for anchorage. Recommended for pools where deck or walking space is limited. Standard width is 1'5" and height is 2'5".
.145" wall x 1.90" O.D ......................44-075
Weight: 40 Ibs.
.109" wall x 1.90" O.D ......................44-076
Weight: 31 Ibs.
.065" wall x 1.90" O.D 44-077
Weight: 22 Ibs.
Adjustable Long Reach Grab Rails
Available in size to fit extra wide gutter systems in the increasingly popular “Fast Pool” design concept. “B” dimension must be specified with order. Width can range from 3'0" to 4'6", height is 2'11".
.145" wall x 1.90" O.D. .................... 44-096
Weight: 80 lbs.
.109" wall x 1.90" O.D. .................... 44-094
Weight: 60 lbs.
.065" wall x 1.90" O.D. 44-092
Weight: 39 lbs.
California Style Grab Rails
For pools with extra-wide gutters, or when deck to water distances are exceptionally large. Made extra wide to clear unusual gutters with legs offset laterally to minimize deck width requirements. Standard height is 2'5".
.145" wall x 1.90" O.D. .....................44-097
Weight: 45 lbs.
.109" wall x 1.90" O.D. .................... 44-098
Weight: 25 lbs.
.065" wall x 1.90"
Long Reach Pretzel Bend Grab Rails
Similar to the standard pretzel bend, but recommended for swimming pools with extra-width gutters. These grab rails are 2'-6" wide from the center line of the rear post to the tip of the pool side bend. Features rear posts that are offset laterally to accommodate expansion joints or other deck obstructions.
.145" wall x 1.90" O.D. ..................... 44-124
Weight: 52 lbs.
.109" wall x 1.90" O.D. 44-125
Weight: 39 lbs.
.065" wall x 1.90" O.D. .................... 44-126
Weight: 25 lbs.
1.50" x .120" T-316 Stainless Steel is Available with Passivation and Powder Coating Options
Stair Rails, Grab Bars, Exercise Bars and Safety Grips
Stair Rails
These rails can be provided in 1.90" O.D. or 1.50" O.D. in wall thicknesses of .065", .109", .120" and .145" with a polished 320grit finish. We can also provide passivated and powder-coated finishes upon request. We can provide almost any type of custom stainless steel rail for any application. Just provide us with a detail of the desired rail and we will quickly provide you with a quote and submittals drawings upon order. All stair rails must ship via motor freight.
Standard 2-Bend Stair Rails
These standard 2-bend stair rails are fabricated from 1.90" O.D. x .065" wall, T-304 stainless steel that is polished to a 320-grit finish.
Deck mounted rails are intended for use with pools that are vinyl or fiberglass lined. Anchorage of the rails to the deck is 8" on center and provides stability needed without penetrating the molded steps or the pool floor. These rails are fabricated from 1.90" O.D. x .065" wall, T-304 stainless steel that is polished to a 320-grit finish.
Safety-Grip is a soft zippered cover that zips over the stainless steel handrails in pools and spas. This innovative patented product will reduce liability and promote safety when getting in and out of the pool or spa. Safety-Grip prevents burns from “Hot” handrails due to intense heat from harsh UV sunlight in warmer climates and prevents slipping due to “oily” hands from suntan oil & lotions. Safety-Grip assists with gripping for those with arthritis and is a deterrent to children that slide down rails, which could result in injury. Comes in six standard lengths and can be fabricated in custom lengths if required.
Artisan Series
The Artisan Series Stair and Hand Rails are a patented, designer inspired rail that provides an elegant custom look for any pool environment. All these Artisan rails come with 1.90” OD tubing with a .065” wall thickness and available in either 304 or 316L stainless steel. The Artisan Series Rails are also available with custom powder coated finishes.
Flanged Therapeutic Exercise Bars
These exercise rails are ideal for use in special use pools. Clearance from the rail to the wall is 6". Fabricated from T-316 Marine Grade (1.90" O.D. x .049" wall) stainless steel. Includes mounting flange and hardware.
Replacement cycolac tread for KDI Paragon lifeguard chair and dive stand ladders. For installation on vertically sloped post. Includes mounting hardware.
Replacement cycolac tread for KDI Paragon lifeguard chairs, raft and thera-peutic ladders. For installation on vertically sloped post. Includes mounting hardware.
Replacement cycolac tread for KDI Paragon lifeguard chairs and vertical ladders. For installation on vertically straight post. Includes mounting hardware.
Shipping Weight: 2 Ibs.
19" Stainless Steel, straight ............ 45-019
Replacement stainless steel tread for KDI Paragon vertical ladders. Includes mounting hardware
Shipping Weight: 2 Ibs.
20" Stainless Steel, straight .......... 45-002
Replacement stainless steel step with plastic insert for 20" S.R. Smith vertical ladder. For installation on vertically straight post. Includes mounting hardware.
Shipping Weight: 2 Ibs.
End Cap for Tread 45-015
Insert for Tread................................. 45-016
Ladder
Tread Bolt and Nut
Made from heavy-duty stainless steel. These bolts feature a special curved head so that it fits flush on the step.
Ladder Tread Bolt (Each) ................ 45-017
Dimensions: 2-3⁄4"Long x 1⁄4" Thread.
Stainless Steel Recessed Step
This heavy-duty stainless steel recessed step is made from 14 gauge, Type 304 low carbon stainless steel and fabricated with all-welded construction. The step features a wide 5"H x 5"D x 15"W opening to meet most code requirements. The tread (bottom inside surface) is specially prepared to provide a non-skid step area. A bonding screw is provided for grounding.
Stainless Steel Recessed Step ...... 44-052
Shipping Weight: 7 Ibs.
Built-ln Injection Molded Step
This frostproof recessed step is made from heavy-duty injection molded plastic. This step installs flush with the pool wall. Features eight plastic ribs for structural support and a slip resistant step surface for safety.
Built-ln Injection Molded Step ...... 44-054
Outer Dims: 17-1⁄2"W x 7"T x 5-1⁄2"D
Inner Dims: 15-1⁄2"W x 5"T x 5-5⁄16"D
Weight: 2 Ibs.
Pit Access Step
A. Measure the ladder rail diameter
B. Measure from center to center of the ladder rails
C. Confirm the
These surge tank steps are designed to be driven into a pre-formed hole. The legs are 13" on center and the overall width is 14-3⁄4". These copolymer polypropylene plastic coated steps are corrosion resistant. They are easily installed and completely eliminate the potential of an infiltration source by completely sealing the cured concrete insertion hole. These steps meet ASTM-C-478, ASTM D-4104, ASTM A-615, and AASHTO M-199-811.
Standard anchors are securely fastened to a steel framework (jig). Assures perfect alignment for 20" center-to-center mounting.
Dimensions: 3-1⁄4" Tall, 22-1⁄8" Long, 1.90" I.D.
Weight: 8 Ibs.
Anchors, Escutcheons, & Ladder Bumpers
Replacement Wedge Dogs
A wedge dog slips inside the anchor socket keyway. Simply tighten the bolt and the wedge dog firmly wedges the ladder post. Identify your wedge dog from the ones shown. If you don’t see yours, email us an image and we will find a replacement for you.
Large Wedge Dog ............................ 45-021
Small Wedge Dog ........................... 45-022
Brass Wedge Dog 45-020 KDI Wedge Dog............................... 45-025
Deck Mounted Anchor Flange ...... 44-308
Made from aluminum.
Dimensions: 2-1⁄2" Tall, 1.90" I.D.
Weight: 1 lb.
Heavy-Duty Clamp Flange 44-352
The flange is chrome-plated bronze with a stainless steel through bolt.
Weight: 2 Ibs.
Tall Aluminum Escutcheon ............ 44-322
Dimensions: 4" Dia. x 2" Tall
Weight: 1.5 Ibs.
Handrail Stabilizing Plug
Anchor type handrails are often crushed at the end by the underground anchor causing the handrail to loosen and become unstable. When hammered into the crushed end of the handrail, the Handrail Stabilizing Plug rounds it out and provides a permanent strong supporting surface for the anchor to tighten against. For 1.90" x .049 or .065 rails.
Handrail Stabilizing Plug ................ 44-190
Shipping Weight: 1 Ib.
Keyhole Escutcheon (1.90") .......... 44-309
Made from stamped stainless steel.
KDI Keyhole Escutcheon (1.90") .... 44-315
Made from stamped stainless steel.
KDI Keyhole Escutcheon (1.90") .... 44-317
Made from chrome-plated bronze. Includes threaded set screw.
KDI Keyhole Escutcheon (1.90") 44-333
Made from cast stainless steel. Includes threaded set screw.
Round Escutcheon (1.90") .............. 44-313
Made from stamped stainless steel. Round Escutcheon (1.90") .............. 44-312
Made from chrome cycolac plastic. Round Escutcheon (1.90") ............... 44-311 Made from white cycolac plastic.
Escutcheon (1.50") ..............
Made from stamped stainless steel. Keyhole Escutcheon (1.50") ...........44-334
Made from cast stainless steel. Includes threaded set screw.
Ladder Bumpers
ThermGard ® Covers and Reel Systems
Why a Blanket?
Indoor and Outdoor pools are big energy consumers. Pool owners/operators spend billions of dollars annually to heat the nation’s pools. Much of this energy is often wasted and can be saved with proper management. Wasting energy also contributes to our growing air quality problem.
How Pools Lose Heat
Pools lose energy in a variety of ways, but evaporation is by far the largest source of energy loss for swimming pools. When compared to evaporation, all other losses are small. The reason evaportion has such an impact is that evaporating water requires tremendous amounts of energy. It only takes 1 BTU to raise 1 pound of water 1 degree, but each pound of 80º water that evaporates takes a whopping 1048 BTU’s of heat out of the pool.
Minimize Evaporation
Since evaporation is the major source of heat loss for swimming pools, to minimize evaporation, one must cover the pool. Covering your pool when it’s not in use is the single most effective way to reduce pool heating cost. Savings of 60-80% are possible.
- U.S. Department of Energy
Quality Fabric
The heart of a pool cover system is the fabric. Thermgard® uses a seven-layer, custom laminated polyethylene to provide the optimum in insulation and durability.
Customization
Covers are custom made to insure fit. Cutouts for ladders, handrails, slides and other water features are included.
Power Drive for Reel Systems
SAVE 60-80%ON ENERGYCOST!
Recreonics Insulating Pool Blanket
Recreonics is now offering the best insulating pool blanket in the industry at reduced prices! Available in two grades of material, with and without a weighted edge for outdoor applications. Each cover features a full 1⁄8" of polyethylene foam insulation which is carefully laminated to a tough woven, high density, ultra-violet stabilized polyethylene substrate coated, polyethylene film. All material is sewn together using a two-needle, lock-stitch which virtually eliminates unraveling of material.
Standard Insulating Pool Blanket
(40 strands per square inch)
3-year warranty
(90-Day Warranty on All Spa Covers)
Deluxe Insulating Pool Blanket
(44 strands per square inch)
5-year warranty
(90-Day Warranty on All Spa Covers)
Note: Grommets must be purchased separately for covers under 300 square feet.
Recreonics Stainless Steel Storage Reel Systems
These storage reels have been specifically designed and engineered for easy cover handling. These welded reels are constructed entirely of 304 stainless steel to offer the ultimate in corrosion resistance. Available in widths from 10 to 20 feet. 10-Year Warranty.
Standard Reel Covers
Maximum Capacity of each tube is 125-150 L.F. Now features modular design to reduce freight cost and potential shipping damage.
NOTE: When selecting reel, add one foot to the blanket width to determine required reel width.
The uniquely designed system places an electric gear motor on each Winding Tube shaft. There are no flexible shafts to connect and no gear or belt drives to maintain. The motor is permanently lubricated and maintenance free. The motor requires standard 115V electricity from a dedicated GFI outlet. The direction and speed can be controlled right at the storage reel. You can start the feed slow until the panel is straight and then crank up the speed and finish the job in seconds. Flip a switch and the direction is reversed to unwind the covers again at the speed you choose. The components are “wash down” grade. Hose everything off with water to keep it free of debris and looking good. Add the Power Drive to your pool cover system today. Call our sales consultants for pricing!
Professional Support
Recreonics offers a variety of commercial safety covers to accommodate a wide variety of pool sizes and shapes. All safety covers offered meet or exceed safety cover performance standards as set forth in ASTM F 1346-91.
AVAILABLE MATERIALS:
Secur-A-Pool Mesh (12-Year Limited Warranty): Recommended for large commercial pools and available in blue, gray, green, and tan.
ProMesh (15-Year Limited Warranty):
Recommended for covers up to 5,000 sq. ft. available in blue, gray, green, and tan.
HyPerLite™ Solid (15-Year Limited Warranty):
Recommended for covers up to 2,100 sq. ft. and available in blue, gray, green, and tan.
• Application Innovation • Off-Season Peace of Mind
FEATURES & BENEFITS:
• For larger commercial covers, access the GLI commercial care team which includes in-field technical consultant, design engineer, and operations to turnkey the project with you from measuring to installation where GLI will guarantee the fit, form and function of the cover.
• Upgraded installation tools, and HD-commercial springs on covers over 2500 sq. ft., at NO CHARGE!
• Best in class lead time for covers up to 5,000 square feet.
• New! CoverLink™ - A modular design application, that is composed of 2 to 3 sections of the safety cover joined together using the patent pending CoverLink™ system to ensure a ASTM strong application. Improves installations, openings, & closings.
How to Get a Quote:
Ask your Recreonics sales specialists about off-season pricing opportunities. All covers are made specifically to fit your swimming pool. Just send us detailed, dimensional information regarding your pool and we will provide you with a quote within 24-48 hours.
When necessary, GLI will provide a proposal drawing for architects or engineering firms.
Safety Cover Accessory and Replacement Items
Competitor ® Racing Lanes
Competitor® Racing Lanes feature a flow through system to provide consistent wave quelling from one lane to another, a unique feature not found in other products on the market. Competitor swim lanes also feature Lifespan+™ a new protective formula with cutting-edge polymer- and color-stabilization components that substantially increase product life in harsh pool environments.
Each Competitor® Racing Lane consists of a series of 4" Standard or 6" Gold Medal plastic discs and donuts strung on a vinylcoated 3⁄16-inch stainless steel cable. Opposing stainless steel spring and takeup reel keep the lanes tight. The take-up reel is tightened with a removable wrench. With quantity orders you will receive free wrenches: 1 wrench for 3-6 lanes, 2 wrenches for 7-12 lanes, and 3 wrenches for 13 or more lanes.
Competitor® Racing Lane Lines may be custom designed and assembled to your specifications, offering the opportunity to design any length or color pattern. All lanes come with 15-meter opposing-color surface markers, unless specified otherwise. Racing lanes are shipped within 3 business days and are fully assembled to meet all FINA, USA, NCAA and NFHS standards.
Available Disc and Donut Colors: yellow, orange, red, maroon, purple, blue, navy, burgundy, green, white, black, Vegas gold, sky blue and gray.
NOTE: All orders for racing lanes require a completed color/configuration confirmation form. All Donuts will be made to match disc colors unless specified
Competitor® Swim Racing Lanes
6" Diameter Gold Medal
4" Standard
6" Gold Medal
OFFICIAL LANE LINE OF
White Black (Black C) Red (186C) Maroon (7622C) Orange (021) Yellow (108C) Vegas Gold (871C)
The EZ-Tensioner is a cutting-edge response to the challenges associated with conventional tensioners designed with ease-of-use in mind. The EZ-Tensioner is user-friendly, uncomplicated, durable. Quick and easy operation and does not require any additional tools. Simply 3-clicks to tighten your lane line and only one motion to release the tension. The EZ-Tensioner is available as an upgrade to a new or reto-fitted to an existing lane line. You will need to order one tensioner upgrade per lane line. You will need to order two tensioner upgrades for 50-meter lane lines that have two disconnects for smaller lines.
EZ-Tensioner Upgrade .................... 15-080
(One requried for each lane or disconnect)
Cover ONLY for EZ-Tensioner ........ 15-082
EZ-Tensioner ONLY .......................... 15-084
We offer several different pre-designed courses for different water polo fields of play. The courses consist of 4" diameter Competitor® lanes with all required FINA markings. We can also offer custom fields of plays if provided with specifications.
Competitor Water Polo Lanes
Classic Stor-Lane Reel™
This storage reel uses heavy duty molded end discs to keep the lanes on the core. Features streamlined hardware and an easy access handle on the end frame for safe mobility.
This royal blue cover is made from tear resistant vinyl.
The Classic Plus Stor-Lane Reel™ Competitor’s UPGRADED Stor Lane Reel. It is ideal for easy, mobile storage and installation of lane lines. Solid end wheels keep the lanes safely on the core to avoid tangles and lane line damage. A powder coated aluminum frame and end wheels offer durability for both indoor and outdoor use. A unique, end mounted handle and 5” stainless steel casters with individual brakes provide easy and safe maneuverability.
Classic Plus Stor-Lane Reel™ .......... 14-359
Dimensions: 70"L x 46"W x 62"H
Shipping Weight: 150 lbs.
Stor-Lane Reel™ Parts
No. Part Description 15-032 Reel Core (Each)
15-067 Retention Rod (Set of 3)
Elite Stor-Lane Reel™
This high capacity storage reel is ideal for proper storage and installation of racing lanes. It offers higher capacity with solid ends to keep lines safely on the core. The reel features powder coated aluminum frame and end wheels. Tow handle and 6" stainless steel casters with individual brakes provide easy and safe maneuverability.
Customize Your Elite Stor-Lane Reel! You can now upgrade your Competitor Elite Stor-Lane Reel™ by adding your organization’s colors and logos. Choose from standard colors or provide RAL colors, and logos art work files.
Standard Customization 14-361.SC
Includes custom wheel/frame color and two large logos.
kits will convert existing Competitor® sidelines to the 2024 FINA rule guidelines.
Includes custom wheel/frame color two large logos, small handle logo and frame text.
Anti-Wave Racing Lanes & Lane Caddy
ForeRunner Racing Lanes
These racing lanes are constructed of 4.75" diameter polyethylene discs with UV additives that are threaded onto a 2,000 lb. test strength, 20-strand, 1⁄8" diameter, un-coated stainless steel cable. Interspersed between the discs, seated into the recesses provided, are ovoid blow-molded floats.
One end of the racing lanes is secured by means of a copper sleeve that forms a loop holding a stainless steel eyelet and S-hook. The opposing end of the lane is fitted with the unique Supertensioner™ tensioning device. The lanes are shipped completely assembled; however some slight field adjustments may be required.
Antiwave Lane Caddy
Provides for a safe and quick way to remove and install racing lanes into your swimming pool. The lane caddy is designed to be quickly installed onto the pool deck. Fabricated from top quality hand laid fiberglass the lane caddy comes standard with a 3-year limited warranty. Lane Caddy....................................... 14-805
Shipping Weight: 15 lbs.
Maximum Racing Lanes
These 6" diameter lanes are suitable for top competitions and events where the highest performance is required. AntiWave’s racing lanes use hydromatic propulsion to disperse the waves along the lane line then re-directs energy downward
to stop all momentum, creating perfectly tranquil water. Made in the USA from UV stable resin plastic which reduces the risk fading and deterioration caused by long term exposure to sun light. Includes the unique Supertensioner™ turnbuckle tensioning device.
Lane Line Storage Reels & Lane Line Guard
The Ultimate Storeel
This storage reel is fabricated from durable white powder-coated aluminum. All four wheels independently lock and rotate for each of movement and stability. 6” diameter center spindle reduces potential damage to your lane lines. Comes with limited 3-year warranty.
This heavy-duty storage reel is made from T-304 stainless steel. It features zinc plated locking casters that swivel 360º. Also available with all stainless steel casters. Add (.SS) to end of number.
Standard Storage Reel .................... 14-367
Dimensions: 72"L x 44-1⁄4"W x 58-3⁄4"H
Weight: 125 lbs.
Paragon Cover For Reel .................. 14-366
Made from HD polyester reinforced vinyl. Color is Blue.
Recreonics Cover For Reel .......... 14-367.C
Made from 12 oz. polyester/vinyl laminate. Color is Blue.
StorLine Reel Stores
XL Capacity Lane Line Storage Reel
This heavy-duty lane line storage reel is constructed from powder-coated T-304 stainless steel, which reduces corrosion. Standard color is silver gray. Special colors available are radiant white and and royal blue. Now with new HDPE hubs for easier operation.
The Lane Line Guard™ prolongs the life of swimming pool lane lines by circumventing rough pool deck surfaces and corners by allowing lane lines to glide smoothly through the deep fiberglass channel. The lane line guard will help make the removal and installation of lane lines easier, and will protect your investment
Lane Line Guard ............................... 14-808
Shipping Weight: 14 lbs.
Large Capacity Lane Line Storage Reel
This larger capacity storage reel is made from T-304 stainless steel. It features zinc plated locking casters that swivel 360º. Also available with all stainless steel casters. Add (.SS) to end of number.
Large Capacity Storage Reel 14-377
Dimensions: 72"L x 53"W x 64"H
Weight: 140 lbs.
Paragon Cover For Reel 14-372
Made from HD polyester reinforced vinyl. Color is Blue.
Recreonics Cover For Reel 14-377.C Made from 12 oz. polyester/vinyl laminate. Color is Blue.
Colorado Time Systems
Aquagrip Replacement Touchpad
CTS Aquagrip touchpads feature a rugged tough plast construction and textured nonskid surface, offering enhanced grip for swimmers during starts and turnes. These touchpads come complete with 10-foot cable and test meter, ensuring conveniencce and functionality.
Note: Touchpad orders will require gutter profile.
Touchpad Caddy
The caddy is for gutter hung touchpads only and can accommodate up to ten touchpads, five on each side. Frame is made of aluminum with four casters. Comes partially assembled and includes assembly instructions.
This rugged and flexible start system designed for elite competition and training. The system allows you to drive up to 12 Relay Judging Platforms with Speedlights, up to 13 External Visual Indicators, and 20 auxiliary block speakers or 2 underwater speakers. Features bright external 306-degree strobe, external visual indicators, and visual start signaling.
Champion Elite Start System ....... 93-625
Dimensions: 6.5” x 6.5” x 14.0”
Weight: 19.6 lbs.
Additional Speaker……………………..93-628 Comes with 125’ cable.
Battery (Requires 2)………………...…93-627
Infinity Start System
The portable battery-operated starting system features a wired microphone with start button for the event official. A harmonic horn sound provides for consistent sound distribution across the pool and a fair start for all swimmers. A built-in strobe light flashes simultaneously with the horn to aid hearing impaired swimmers.
Infinity Start System with wired microphone .................. 93-520
Dimensions: 15" W x 8.9"H x 6.9"D
Weight: 12 lbs.
Microphone with 15' Cable ............ 93-683
Power Cord ...................................... 93-688
This heavy-duty tripod works with either the Infinity or the Champion Elite start systems. The tripod is portable and height adjustable. Shipping Weight: 10 lbs.
Additional Infinity Speaker ............ 93-524
This 40-watt speaker comes with 125' of cable.
Starting Platform Speaker ............. 93-600
This 6-watt speaker comes with cord and plug.
Colorado Time Systems
Dolphin Timing System
The Dolphin is a breakthrough wireless timing system with a fully integrated HyTek Meet Management interface. Dolphin provides wireless, synchronized, stopwatch-style timing for swimming competitions. By synchronizing all the stopwatches to the same start signal, the system has improved accuracy compared to manual stopwatches.
The Dolphin system includes handheld wireless stopwatches, starter units, base unit and Hy-Tek Interface. Features three modes of operation including electronic start system, Synchronized manual start and wireless back-up timing. USA Swimming compliant for semi-auto timing.
Features integrated 2.4GHz wireless technology. A great solution for tight spaces or as an auxiliary scoreboard within your facility.
Offers wired or wireless communication with your CTS timing console, and wireless communication with your Dolphin Wireless Timing System.
Weatherproof digits and electronics are housed in a powder-coated aluminum frame (available in black, bright red, cardinal red, maroon, navy blue, royal blue, purple, forrest green and white). Each scoreboard is shipped as one piece for ease of handling and installation. (115-230 Volt, 200-Watt.) Includes 14' power cord with NEMA 5-15R plug.
This two-line mini LED scoreboard will display EVENT/HEAT and LANE/PLACE/ TIME. Can be stacked to create multi-line auxiliary scoreboard, or entry-level scoreboard solution. Viewing distance is at least 50-meters. Includes 3" legs and a handle for ease of portability. Compatible with CTS System 6, 5, 4 or Pace Clock Controller (UPC-C) compatible with Dolphin system through the Dolphin scoreboard adapter. (120-Volt).
Portable Mini LED Scoreboard 93-675
Dimensions: 13.75" H x 48" W x 4" D
Weight: 45 lbs.
PC Portable Pace/Shot Clock
All of these units can be run as standalone pace clocks, or set to run in a series of pace clocks with or without a timer or controller. Every pace clock in a series displays the same information
PC Standard (PC-Standard) ............93-597
Does not include horn or battery. 110-volt only. Choose red or amber digits.
PC Portable (PC-PORT) .................. 93-595
Includes horn and battery. Both 110-volt and battery powered. Choose red or amber digits. Note: Sync cables are available for Pace Clocks upon request.
Pro Pace Clock Training System
The Pro Pace Clock/Shot Clock was designed with 15 training modes to fine-tune skills and create customized workouts. It can also show a variety of display options. The Pro Pace Clock can be used either with or without a timer or controller.
PC Pro (PC-PRO) ............................. 93-596
PC Pro Wireless (PCW-PRO) ......... 93-599
Note: Sync cables are available for Pace Clocks upon request.
Wireless Deck Clocks
These deck clocks feature durable polyethylene enclosures that are water and sun resistant and completely corrosion free. Can be used as a game/shot clock or a pace clock. Receives game/shot data from a handheld controller (sold separately). Features an integrated weatherproof horn that produces both game and shot tones. Sold in pairs only.
The 31" octagonal pace clocks are available with two face color options, including the new, highly visible yellow on black. Sweep-minute and second hands resist warping and damage. Clear Plexiglas® lens protects the face and hands from splashing. A roll-away stand (sold separately) is available. Ships complete with (1) “C” battery. Weight: One box at 22 lbs.
White face w/red & blue lettering ....92-511
Black face w/yellow & white lettering . 92-512
Competitor® 15" Battery-Operated Pace Clocks
Large numerals make the smaller, portable 15" pace clock ideal for swim pacing, aerobics and personal training. Plastic body, Plexiglas® lens and portability make it a durable and versatile timing tool. Ships complete with one “AA” battery. Weight: One box at 10 lbs. White Body, white face with red & blue lettering......................................................... 92-516 White Body, black face with yellow & white lettering ................................................. 92-517 Red Body, white face with red & blue lettering
Red Body, black face with yellow & white
Competitor® 37" Pace Clocks
These 37" Pace Clocks feature large, highly visible 3-1⁄2" quarter numbers, designed primarily for competitive swim training. The 37" clock is equipped with a retractable stabilizing plate to protect against wind or accidental contact – no additional clock stand necessary! In addition to having wheels that allow for easy movability, the 37" clock has a storage compartment built into the back of the clock. The models can be hung on a wall (mounting hardware not included). The 37" inch clock housings are offered only in white. Includes (1) C Batttery.
37" Battery with Black Face 92-530 37" Battery with White Face ......... 92-532 Shipping Weight: 36 lbs. (Motor Freight Only)
Ultrak 700 Clipboard ......................92-957
Cumulative split watch that has solar power with battery backup. Stopwatch & calculator can be run simultaneously. Calculator has memory feature.
Turnmaster Pro, Stopwatches, Lap Counter, Scoring Cards
Turnmaster Pro
The Turnmaster Pro is a portable lane bulkhead designed to maximize lane usage. Easily installed in minutes, the Turnmaster Pro is suspended between two lane lines, dividing one lane into two. Built of durable vinyl ester chlorine resistant fiberglass. It is available in two different widths.
6'-9"
8'-2"
Ultrak 330 Economy Stopwatch ... 92-940
Jumbo display single event timer with cumulative split capability, measures to 24 hours with 1/100 second resolution to 30 minutes, time of day, date and alarm. Available in Black (.BK ), Red (.R), Yellow (.Y)
Start/stop and reset, no additional features making it ideal for students and volunteers. Watch measures to 10 hours with 1/100 second resolution.
Ultrak 495 Stopwatch .................... 92-942
Choose between event time or running lap time on the bottom row. 100 dual split recallable memory with continuous display of event time, three-line display in a classic case design, measures to 10 hours with 1/100 second resolution. Features stroke frequency along with time and calendar. Available in Black (.BK) and Yellow (.Y)
Ultrak 320 Stopwatch .................... 92-948
Cumulative split and time out capabilities. Measure 24 hours to 1/100 second accurancy. Features time, day, date, daily alarm and hourly chime. Available in Black (.BLK), Blue (.B) and Red (.R)
Ultrak 460 Stopwatch .....................92-947
The Ultrak 460 is a versatile stopwatch with features ideal for most coaches yet is ideal for students and volunteers because of its ease of use. With 16-memory, users can choose to view either the lap split or cumulative split after each reading. Each reading will be held on the display for 10 seconds when the automatic split release returns the display to the running event time. Users can recall up to 16 splits both during and after event. Available in Blue (.B), Red (.R) and Yellow (.Y)
Diving Judges Flip Style Scoring Cards
The flip-over style score card system scores 0-10 with half point increments. Made from heavy-duty laminated plastic and bound together with coated wire. Comes complete with printed instructions for the dive judges to reference.
Diving Judges Scoring Cards ........ 92-058
Dimensions: 4" wide x 9" Long
Stanchion Posts, Anchors, Recall/False Start Rope
Stanchion Posts
For supporting backstroke lines and recall ropes. Constructed of T-304 stainless steel in varying lengths an wall thicknesses. Sliding collar sold separately.
Post
4'-6" .065" 46-021 6
4'-6" .109" 46-023 10
4'-6" .145" 46-022 13
8'-0" .065" 46-020 10
8'-0" .109" 46-024 16
8'-0" .145" 46-025 21
Note: All 8' stanchions must ship motor freight.
4'-0" Barrier Stanchion ...................46-027
This stanchion post is specifically designed to be used with rope to create required barriers. Made out of 1.90" x .065" T-304 stainless steel. Includes (2) U-hooks.
Square Stanchion Post
Manufactured from 2-1⁄2" square x .125" wall square T-304 stainless steel. The bottom 6" of the stanchion post that recesses in the anchor is round and can be used with all standard stanchion anchors.
Sliding collar sold separately. 4'-6" Square Stanchion Post ..................................... 46-066
Shipping Weight: 21 Ibs. 8'-0" Square Stanchion Post
46-065
Shipping Weight: 35 Ibs.
Sliding Collar with Eyebolt ............ 46-030
Stanchion Sockets
For stanchion post and water polo goals. Three styles are available. Cast stainless steel with slip cap, cast bronze with slip cap, and cast bronze with tamper proof cap. All sockets include grounding screw. Stanchion Anchor (stainless) ........ 46-038
Dimensions: 6" x 1.90" I.D. Weight: 2 lbs.
Stanchion Anchor (threaded) ......... 46-041
Dimensions: 6" x 1.90" I.D. Weight: 4 lbs.
Tamper-Proof Stanchion Anchor ...46-047
Dimensions: 6" x 1.90" I.D. Weight: 4 lbs.
Stanchion Socket Slip Cap ......... 46-038.C
Replacement Cap for 46-038
Stanchion Socket Slip Closure Cap46-042
Replacement cap for stanchion anchor 46047.
Threaded Closure Cap 46-046
Replacement cap for stanchion anchor 46-041. Bronze Spanner Key ....................... 46-043
This spanner key is used to tighten and loosen the cap for the 46-041 stanchion anchor. Slip Cap Key ................................... 46-044
This key is used to hook the cap on the 46038 stanchion anchor in order to remove.
Recall and False Start Rope
A recall rope is a rope that spans the width of the swimming pool for the purpose of alerting and stopping swimmers who were not aware of a false start.
Our false start ropes are constructed from lightweight 1⁄2" yellow polypropylene rope. The recall assembly includes (2) floats and (2) quick-snap connectors with weights. We have various sizes to accommodate most swimming pools.
For 6 lane pool 92-965
Maximum length 55'. Weight: 11 lbs. For 8 lane pool .................................92-967
Maximum length 67'. Weight 14 lbs. For 10 lane pool .............................. 92-968
Maximum length 79'. Weight 16 lbs.
For 12 lane pool .........................92-968.90
These backstroke flags are made of a nylon material and are available in two sizes to meet all FINA, NCAA, USA, and NFHS regulations. Mounting is easy using our braided nylon cord and zinc plated swivel hook. To keep the flags more taut, use a take up reel with our vinyl coated cable. Numbers, letters and customized logos may also be imprinted on the flags.
Nylon Flag (small) ........................... 92-306
11" W x 14.5" L
Nylon Flag (large) ............................ 92-316 12" W x 18" L
Graphic Set Up Charge .................. 92-328 ((1) Charge Per Color. (2) Color Max.)
Available in black (.BK), blue (.B), burgundy (.BG) (.BUR), green (.G), grey (.GR), maroon (.M),navy (.N), orange (.O), purple (.P), red (.R), Vegas gold (.VG), white (.W) and yellow (.Y).
Heavy-Duty Vinyl Pennant Lines
Heat sealed triangular pennants of alternating colors spaced according to regulations. Specify pool width when ordering – 5'0" extra cord will be provided at each end to reach to stanchions. Specify colors desired.
Backstroke Flag .............................. 92-304
(Sold unassembled per foot – specify colors)
Backstroke Flag ........................... 92-304.A (Sold assembled per foot – specify colors)
Screen Print Logo ........................... 92-323 (One side, single color)
Logo Set-up Charge ....................... 92-324 (Per Order. Prices vary depending on complexity of logo.)
Extra Cord (Per Foot)....................... 92-314
Available Colors: black, green, medium blue, navy, orange, purple, red, yellow and white
Pre-Strung Backstroke Pennants
The pennant lines are fabricated out of 12" wide x 18" long 12 oz. vinyl polyester fabric pennants. Each pennant is die-cut for accuracy and consistency of shape. Pennants are connected to a woven polyester fabric header that features a folded double stitched hem for strength and durability. Includes 5' of tie on each end. Sold in odd increments ONLY.
Custom Color Pennant Line ............ 92-311
Standard Color Pennant Line (Per Foot) ......................................... 92-303
Available Colors: white, blue, green, yellow, orange, red, purple, light grey, black and navy blue.
7" Vinyl Letter or Number .............. 92-340
1' Pennant Tie Line (Per foot) ......... 92-341 Pennant Only................................... 92-302 (Specify color) Logos are available for these flags.
Economical Vinyl Pennants
These vinyl pre-strung pennants are spaced and sized to meet AAU and NCAA requirements.
50' Multi-Colored Pennant.…….92-301
Also available in blue/white (.BW), green/ white (.GW), red/white (.RW), red/white and blue (.RWB).
100' Multi-Colored Pennant.…….92-300
Also available in blue (.B), blue/green (.BG) (.RBK), black/blue (.BKB), black/orange (.BKO), black/red (.BKR), black/white (.BKW), black/yellow (.BKY), black (.BLK), blue/ orange (.BO), blue/white (.BW), blue/yellow (.BY), green/white (.GW), green/yellow (.GY), orange/green (.OG), orange/white (.OW), red/white (.RW), red/white/blue (.RWB), red/ yellow (.RY), white (.W), yellow/white (.YW)
Stanchion and Backstroke flag sold seperately
Movable Stanchion Anchor
Made from durable, bright yellow molded polypropylene pylon is 27" tall and 18" x 18" wide at the base. The pylon is able to accept a standard 1.9 O.D. stanchion (sold separately). The threaded plug allows the pylon to be filled with water or sand to provide as much as 275 lbs. of anchor weight.
Moveable Stanchion Anchor ......... 34-560
Dimensions: 27" high with 18" x 18" square base.
Weight: 15 Ibs.
Required Information for Backstroke Flags
1. Number of lines
2. Width of pool that the lines are spanning
3. Preferred flag material (Nylon, Vinyl or Vinyl/Polyester)
4. Alternating colors
5. Numbers and or Letters
6. Logos
Water Polo Goals
Deck-Mounted Water Polo Goals
These deck-mounted water polo goals are designed to meet the official rulings of FINA, NCAA, NFHS and USA Water Polo. The goal framework is fabricated from electro-chemically passivated T-304 stainless steel. These goals allow the cages to be adjusted vertically to have the top of the cage at the regulation height. Support legs have a standard setback of 30" and shall swivel to permit flat storage of the cage. The fascia of the goal is fabricated from fiberglass and shall be white in color. The water polo goals are furnished as a pair. Anchors, black-tarred nylon net and solid blue coated nylon backing are all sold separately.
Water Polo Goals (Pair) ................... 92-831
Shipping Weight: 225 lbs.
Black-Tarred Nylon Nets (Pair) ...... 92-834
321 Nylon with 1-3⁄4" Mesh, bound edges and lacing cords.
Shipping Weight: 4 lbs.
Coated Nylon Backing (Pair) ......... 92-835
Navy Blue #80 Herculite vinyl with brass grommets on edge of backing on 10” centers. Furnished with lacing cords.
Shipping Weight: 25 lbs.
Bronze Stanchion Socket with Threaded Cap (Each) .............. 46-041 Each pair of goals requires (4) anchor sockets.
Shipping Weight: 4 lbs.
Anti-Wave Splashball Junior Floating Water Polo Goal (Folding)
The splashball junior floating goal is a twothirds size version of the original club goal which is now discontinued. The splashball junior floating goal features the added benefit that it folds flat for storage purposes and only weighs 75 lb. The splashball is the ideal recreational goal for kids’ games, practice, residential and club pools, or any location where a full-size competition goal is not needed. The framework is constructed out of durable white powder-coated aluminum.
Hardware is stainless steel. The flotation panels are fabricated out of hand-laid fiberglass, and the red net made out of tough polypropylene cord, knotted at every intersection. Average assembly time for two people is approximately one hour.
Splashball Floating Goal (Each) ..... 92-873
Shipping Weight: 75 lbs.
Universal Wall Goal (Short)
The universal wall goal (short) is designed to fit to a raised end wall or on a movealbe bulkhead. Configured to make the most out of restricted space and is excellent for training, social matches and competition. Fabricated from powder-coated aluminum extrusions and hand-laid fiberglass. Includes tough black polypropylene net and blue canvas backing.
Universal Wall Goal (Short) ........... 92-836
Dimensions: 124"L x 26.62" W x 40.35"T
Weight: 110 lbs.
Anchor Each (Requires 2) .............. 92-838
Weight: 6 lbs.
Antiwave Global Polo Goals
These foldable global goals represent the culmination of 50 years of experience in goal innovation, design and production. Fabricated from custom marine grade powder coated aluminum extrusions with heavy-duty marine nylon and 316 stainless steel fittings. Global Goal (1.2m Depth) 92-975 Suitable for general training and competition. Global Goal (1.4m Depth)................92-976
Designed for top level FINA events.
Junior Global Goal ........................... 92-977
Compliant with all FINA JNR competition regulations.
Water Polo Goals, Balls and Caps
Competition Floating/Folding
Senior Water Polo Goal 750
This full-size competition floating polo goal is designed to allow you to fold down the goal for storage purposes when not in use. Folding the goal is easy; just disconnect the two nylon rear struts from their sockets, and the goal folds back on itself.
92-863 92-861
Water Polo Balls
Recreonics offers the water polo ball preferred by professionals and amateurs alike – Mikasa.
Men’s Official Ball ........................... 92-860
Shipping Weight: 2 Ibs.
Women’s Official Ball ..................... 92-863
Shipping Weight: 2 Ibs.
Junior Water Polo Ball..................... 92-861
Shipping Weight: 2 Ibs.
Easy to carry, easy to store, also great value for the money. Includes black net.
The “Odyssey Goal” is a floating water polo goal that conforms to all National standards. The goal’s one-piece welded upright/ crossbar assembly, single back brace and two rear struts are all made from white powder-coated aluminum extrusion. Three heavy-duty hand-laid fiberglass floatation panels (two sides and one rear) provide the necessary buoyancy. Includes (2) tethering
Water Polo Ball Release
The ball release is used for the start of play of water polo matches. Retained on the half distance line, the ball is put into play when the ball release is submerged by pulling the rope from the side of the pool, allowing for fair and accurate starts every time. Manufactured from high density plastic and stainless steel, it is designed to hold both men’s and women’s water polo balls. In order to use this release system, two eyebolts will need to be installed in the bottom of the pool. Eyebolts and ball are sold separately (see page 28).
Water Polo Ball Release ................. 92-890
Shipping Weight: 2 lbs.
eyelets on both ends of the goal and black netting secured by clips and d-shackles.
Replacement Net (Black) ............... 92-826 (Old style prior to 2020 with poly rope.)
Replacement Net (Black) ................92-827 (New style with clips and d-shackles.)
Folds Flat!
FINIS Swim Training Aids
Z2 Gold Zoomers®
These short blade swim fins feature a closed heel design that creates a soft and secure fit. The Z2 Zoomer® efficiently propels you forward while creating a balanced stroke. Strengthens hamstrings and glutes by catching water on the up kick.
Foil Monofin
This technique monofin promotes development of the undulating foil body motion and propulsive dolphin kick. Features technique channels that control the flex of the fin and encourages correct foil movement. The large surface area of the Foil monofin works the core and leg muscles more than a standard fin.
Foil Monofin
Zoomers® Gold
These short blade swim fins promote shorter and faster kicks specific to swimming. Train your legs for speed and endurance. Newly formulated with soft, natural rubber for increased comfort.
92-920 C 3.5 to 5 4 to 5/6 92-921 D 5 to 7 6 to 8
92-922 E 7 to 8.5 8 to 9.5 92-923
92-909
Available in X-Small (.XS), Small (.S), Medium (.M), Large (.L) and X-Large (.XL)
92-917
Agility Paddles
These strapless swim paddles will remain in place if the swimmer maintains early vertical forearm position. Features an ergono-mic shape that is designed to fit the natural contour of the hand. The convex design encourages paddle to have increased traction with the water and promotes early catch.
Available in Small (.S), Medium (.M), and Large (.L)
92-916
Freestyle Snorkel
This snorkel is designed for freestyle swimming. Features a unique curved shape that promotes optimal head position during freestyle. The center-mount design allows you to relax in the water in order to focus on specific strokes and will improve your technique. The hydrodynamic snorkel tube increases aerobic lung capacity.
This snorkel is designed for pre-teen (ages 8-12 years old) training. Helps beginners concentrate on basics without worrying about rotating their head to breathe. The snorkel tube is 2" shorter in length which makes it easier on children’s lungs. Nose clip is included.
Swimmers Snorkel Jr. ...................... 92-913
This is a technique and training snorkel. The snorkel allows you to breathe easy and focus on technique while you swim. The center-mount design allows you to relax in the water to focus on specific strokes and improve technique. Features a one-way purge valve that allows for clear and easy breathing.
Freestyle Snorkel (Yellow) 92-916
Freestyle Snorkel (Pink) ............... 92-916.P
A portion of every pink snorkel purchased is donated to the Pooh Foundation to help fight cancer.
StrechCordz® wet and dry swim training products are the original resistance training tools for in-water applications. Swimmers use StrechCordz® resistance exercise products to improve stroke, strength and endurance. StrechCordz® products in lighter resistance levels are now available for use in water aerobics and other public pool exercise programs.
StrechCordz® Resistance Levels
Resistance levels are determined by the pounds of pull used to stretch tubing from one to three times its length, also known as its working range.
StrechCordz® with Handles
The original dry-land training device. Use for curls, tricep extensions, flies and lat pulls to enhance speed, endurance and swim stroke. Includes (2) handles connected to (2) 4' tubes and a combination mounting loop.
StrechCordz® with Paddles
The number one dry-land resistance product designed to emulate a swimming pull. StrechCordz® with paddles adds resistance to the pull in dry-land practice swim strokes. It trains swimmers to keep hands flat while opposing every movement to increase strength and ultimately speed.
Used by The United States Olympic Team! Yellow ................................................ 95-126
Strengthens muscles and increases power through outward and inward sweep exercises. Attaches to a diving board, fence, rail or any stationary object. Sold as a complete kit only. Includes (2) paddles with (2) tubes and (2) combo mounting loops.
For adding resistance to swimming, the long belt slider is the leading in-water training tool. It provides swim-out and pull-back resistance to improve strength and stamina. A proprietary, embedded safety cord runs the full length of the tub ing and acts as a limiter to help prevent over-stretching. Ideal for use in 25-yard or 25-meter pools.
Green .................................................. 95-118
Red ..................................................... 95-138
Safety Cord Short Belt
Excellent for push-off drills and in-place resisted swimming. Features (1) waist belt with buckle that fits up to a 44", (1) 4' tube with safety cord. A loop on the end of the tubing is included for pool mounting. Green .................................................
Drag Belt/Tow Tether
Make long swim resistance training more effective with the drag belt and tow tether. The different chute sizes provide and endless combination of resistance levels and are compatible with flip turns. Features a belt that will adjust up to a 44" waist, (1) tow tether and one chute to provide in-water resistance.
An exercise machine in a bag, the modular set is a complete wet or dry-land swim training tool that can be used for pulls, rows, raises, curls, flies – nearly any resistance exercise you can imagine. Features carry bag with one pair each of interchangeable handles, paddles, adjustable leg straps, mounting straps and (2) 4' tubes.
Large Kickboards ............................. 92-218
Made in the USA from high-density XLPE foam. Nearly unbreakable, can't be torn and will not absorb water. These boards are designed with just the right buoyancy and rigidity for swim training. Available in Blue (.B), Red (.R) and Yellow (.Y).
Dimensions: 12" W x 19" L x 1.5" T
Small
Kickboards
............................. 92-219
A slightly smaller version of the standard kickboard. Ideal for younger swimmers, but often used by competitive teams as the smaller size requires more effort. Available in Blue (.B)., Red (.R) and Yellow (.Y).
Dimensions" 11" W x 16.5" L x 1.5" T
Diving Brick
Special rubber covered weights for training or recreation. This special diving brick will not harm pool bottom or sides.
A unique teaching tool for any swim program, these handpaddles provide arm stress for developing strength and are an essential stroke correction aid.
Shipping Weight: 1 lb.
Small Handpaddle (blue) ............ 92-130.S
Dimensions: 7" x 4-1⁄2"
Medium Handpaddle (red) ......... 92-130.M
Dimensions: 7-3⁄4" x 4-7⁄8"
Large Handpaddle (yellow) ........
Dimensions: 8-3⁄4" x 5-3⁄8"
Swim Trainer
This indestructible PVC with polyethylene trainer provides unique total flotation for swimming instructions. Makes the lesson fun for the young ones and provides an interesting break in training routines for competitive swimmers.
Dimensions: Floats – 7" x 7" x 30" long Weight: 1 Ib. 6 oz.
Pull Boards
A unique training concept introduced in the 1970s. Does the job of the kickboard and the swim buoy. Interchangeable drag feature allows for flexibility by differing resistances. Does not distort body position.
Speedo® Solid Latex Cap
The #1 swimming cap in the world! Lightweight latex provides dynamic performance. Anti-roll edge provides secure watertight fit.
Available in Blue (.B), White (.W), Navy (.N), Black (.BL), Pink (.PK).
Speedo Solid Latex Cap.................. 96-100
Speedo® Silicone Cap
These swim caps provide lightweight durable performance. The contoured shape reduces drag. Cap goes on and off easy and won’t snag hair. Super soft, latex-free silicone provides optimum fit.
Available in Blue (.B), Purple (.P), White (.W), Silver (.S), Black (.BL), Red (.R), Deep Gold (.DG), Pink (.PK), Teal (.T), Sapphire (.SP) Speedo Silicon Cap ......................... 96-120
Swim Caps, Goggles and Accessories
Unique one-piece flexible PVC frame design with patented seal for water tight comfort.
Blue Ocean (.BO), Bright Pink (.BP), Citrus Green (.CG), Red/White/Blue (.RWB).
Low profile and competitive racing design fits smaller faces. Double head strap, polycarbonate lens, UV protection, anti-fog, mirrored coating.
Jr. Vanquisher 2.0 Mirrored ............ 96-173 Blue (.B), Pink (.P), Smoke (.S).
Excellent competitive and training goggle. Hypoallergenic soft silicone seals, polycarb onate lens, UV protection, anti-fog, mirrored coating.
Vanquisher Mirrored 2.0 Goggle ... 96-172 Blue (.B), Key Lime (.KL), Speedo Red (.R)
Nose Clips, Regular (each) ............ 96-090
Silicone-coated pads. Lightweight transparent plastic clip. Sold each. Available in Blue only.
Flow Control, Sight Glasses and Modulating Valves
Griswold Hi-Flow Cartridge
Automatic
Flow Control
These unique wafer style hi-flow stainless steel cartridge flow controller will control incoming flows up to 8,250 gallons per minute. The unique valves were designed specifically for commercial pool applications. Installed on the discharge side of the recirculation pump, these valves can automatically regulate water flow. The standard valve body is constructed of ductile iron. Add a (.E) after the item number to specify an epoxy-coated corrosion resistant finish to the valve body. Specify system flow rate at time of order.
These valves feature a vertical pivot so that the floats can be adjusted for field setting of operating level. The valve body and disc are constructed of non-corrosive fiberglass. All metallic parts are made from stainless steel. Fiberglass flanges are standard class 150#. Extra weighted balls are recommended when the modulating valve is plumbed in-line on the main drain line in the surge tank.
32-039
Modulating Float Valve
Horizontal Application)
These modulating type float valves are intended for use in aquatic systems where self-regulating flow is required. They work to make gradual adjustments to main drain flows based on surge tank water levels. These horizontal float valves come standard with two 8" diameter solid-core butyrate float balls and feature poly-propylene valve construction with stainless brackets and hardware. Valve operating range is 30" and can be adjusted via float location on the valve rod using the stainless steel collars which are provided.
Flange, studs/bolts and gasket not included.
Modulating Float Valve (Horizontal Application)
These dual float modulating float valves are designed to modulate the flow of water from the main drain to the surge pit or tank. The valve body and disc are constructed of non-corrosive fiberglass. All metallic parts are made from stainless steel. Fiberglass flanges are standard class 150#. Available with standard float balls and extra-weighted balls.
Note: Vertical Travel Maximum is 30"
NOTE:
Modulating valves are designed to regulate the flow between the main drain in the bottom of the swimming pool and the surge tank located under the deck or in the mechanical room. As water flows through the valve the wafer opens and closes which regulates the flow. The valve being opened between 60-70% is desired for optimum operation. The valve will close to a position to allow 20%+/- of the maximum water volume to flow. The key is to locate the modulating valve at the same elevation as the center line of the main drain.
System Gauges
These gauges are designed for long and reliable service under rugged conditions. We offer you a wide variety to fit any application. These include pressure, vacuum and compound gauges, dry or liquid filled with different reading options. All gauges offered are provided with 1⁄4" NPT bottom connection.
NPT Brass Gauge Cock............ 32-482 Allows excess air to be bled. 1⁄4" NPT Brass Needle Valve .......... 32-484
Throttling device for precise adjustments. 1⁄4" NPT Brass Snubber .................. 32-480 Prevents wear on the gauge movement.
Weksler Industrial Thermometers
These top-quality industrial thermometers are approved for use by architects, engineers and consultants everywhere for use in swimming pool applications.
9" Adjustable Angle Thermometer
This thermometer may be adjusted for any desired angle while installation is being made. Thermometer case is made of molded Valox® with a clear acrylic window.
6" Brass Thermowell for Adjustable Angle Thermometer 32-732
Standard
Pressure Gauge
Pressure Gauge
Vacuum Gauge
Safety Vacuum Release Systems
Emotron PSP20 Pool Pump
Automatic Shut Off System
Using the existing pump motor as a sensor, Emotron’s patented Shaft Power monitoring technology will reliably detect a swimmer blocking the suction drain and quickly shut off the pump.
These unique systems accurately monitor motor power for either single phase or three-phase pumps. These systems are fully assembled control panels, designed to be installed between an existing pump control panel and the pump motor. Installation typically takes less than one hour with just one trade skill, an electrician.
Once installed, programming the PSP20 is very simple and only takes a couple of minutes. Setting the motor’s HP, full load amps and the number of phases are the only parameters needing to be set. Once the pump is operating in normal conditions, calibration takes just 3 seconds! Providing the pool’s filtration equipment and pump are correctly maintained, we guarantee no false alarms. These systems are impervious to the effects of filter backwashing and pool vacuuming. There is no need to disable system protection during these activities, thereby eliminating another layer of system complexity.
The PSP20 has been certified by Intertek to comply with ASME A112.19.17-2002 and is UL listed to UL 508A.
Highlights of the Emotron PSP20 Pool Pump Automatic Shut Off Switch
• Technology based on 350,000+ pump monitors installed worldwide
• Simple installation, setup, and calibration
• No plumbing required = no future leak issues
• No false tripping – guaranteed!
• Models for all voltage supplies
• No additional control wiring for large 208/230V or 3-phase pumps
• No bypass required for filter backwash or vacuuming
• UL approved – required in many jurisdictions
• Alarm output
• No winterizing required
• Unaffected by hydrostatic relief valves
Vac-Alert™ Safety Vacuum Release System
The Vac-Alert Safety Vacuum Release System is a device capable of providing vacuum release at a suction outlet caused by a high vacuum occurrence due to suction outlet flow blockage. SVRS devices must allow for vacuum release with or without suction outlet covers in place, and shall operate in such a way as to not defeat or disengage other layers of protection installed to protect against entrapment. The Vac-Alert vacuum release system’s spring loaded piston reacts in less than a second, opening to atmosphere and releasing the life-threatening suction of the drain. The Vac-Alert is a totally mechanical, non-electric safety system that is easy to install. Once installed, it requires little or no maintenance.
The Vac-Alert suction lift model is a safety vacuum release system designed for suction lift applications where the circulation pump suction is no more than 24" below or no more than 42" above the level of the pool water surface.
The Vac-Alert submerged model is designed for applications where the circulation pump suction is more than 24" below the level of the pool water surface.
11⁄2” Socket Connection
Water Level Control Systems
Levolor Electronic Water Leveler (Model K-1100)
This electronic fill device detects low water conditions and automatically replaces water to a pre-set level. Can be used in any situation where a consistent water level is required. System includes the wall mount controller that is factory wired for 220-volt but can be field adjusted for 110volt service, sensor assembly with sensor wire. Available with or without the 1" plastic 24-VAC solenoid valve that will regulate flow up to 30 GPM.
Without Solenoid Valve
Levolor with 50' of sensor wire ..... 32-561
Levolor with 100' of sensor wire ... 32-569
With Solenoid Valve
Levolor with 50' of sensor wire .... 32-562
Levolor with 100' of sensor wire ... 32-568
Levolor Electronic Water Leveler (Model K-2000)
This electronic fill device detects low and high water conditions and will automatically adjust to maintain the desired water level. System includes the wall mount controller that is factory wired for 220volt but can be field adjusted for 110-volt service, sensor assembly with sensor wire. Available with or without the 1" plastic 24VAC solenoid valve that will regulate flow up to 30 GPM.
Without Solenoid Valve
Levolor with 200' of sensor wire ... 32-571
With Solenoid Valve
Levolor with 50' of sensor wire .... 32-565
Levolor with 100' of sensor wire .... 32-572 1" Solenoid Valve (24-V)................. 32-564
ELC-800r and ELC-810
Water Level Controllers
The ELC-800r features both normal-level sensing and low-level sensing options. This is a great option if emergency shut off and pump protection is a priority. The ELC-810 features normal-level sensing, high-level sensing, and a tri-level sensing option for splash pads. The highlight of the ELC-810 is the high-level overflow protection option. This removes the possibility of flooding and protects against human error.
ELC Water Level Controllers Catalog No. Type Application Explanation
ELC 800r Models
32-622 Standard Well Designed for mounting at static water levels. Usually in a pump pit in the equipment room.
32-623 Wet Well The wet well design allows pool water level sensing in a 2" static well located in the equipment room.
32-624 Sight Glass Utilized with pools that have balance tanks.
32-625 Surge Tank Utilized with pools that have a perimeter overflow gutter system in conjuction with the surge tank.
ELC 810
32-632 Surge Tank Utilized with pools that have a perimeter overflow gutter system in conjuction with the surge tank.
32-633 Deck Well Typically used with skimmer pools and installed on the deck near the pool side.
32-634 Wet Well The wet well design allows pool water level sensing in a 2" static well located in the equipment room.
Model Option Accessories
CLA-VAL™ Float Valve
The Cla-Val Model 124-01 float valve is a non-modulating valve that accurately controls the level of your swimming pool. This valve is designed to be installed in a swimming pool surge tank. The valve will open fully when the water level in the surge tank reaches a preset low point and close drip-tight when the level reaches a preset high point. This is a hydraulically operated, diaphragm valve. The float positions the pilot control to close the valve when the float contacts the upper stop. The high and low water levels are adjusted by positioning the stop collars on the float rod. The difference between the high and low levels can be adjusted up to 18". The valve includes the Hytrol (main valve) and the float control. The 1", 11⁄2" and 2" valves are epoxy coated cast iron with threaded connections. The standard valve ships complete with (2) 12" sections of PVC float rod and (1) stainless steel float. Stainless steel rod and floats also available.
8 lbs.
Add an (.E) after the catalog number for the 3" valve to specify epoxy coating.
Add a (.P) after part number if ordering as a replacement part.
two-way general service valves operate with 120 or 24 (AC or DC) volt service. (Please specify.)
Signet Flow Meters and Accessories
Signet 8150 Digital Flow Totalizer
We sell the Signet 8150 with the compatible Signet 515 flow sensor as a complete package. The large digital display indicates flow rate and totalized flow volume simultaneously. One of the three totalizers is resettable from the front panel or a remote location. The intuitive software design and four-button keypad provide for simple operation while setting screen displays and programming the system. Calibration can be easily performed by entering the AutoCal feature and entering a value to match an external reference.
Signet 9900 SmartPro™ Transmitter
The Signet 9900 field mount transmitter features an extra-large (3.90" x 3.90") auto-sensing backlit display. Provides “at-aglance” visibility that can be viewed at 4-5 times the distance over traditional transmitters. The highly illuminated display and large characters reduce the risk of misreading or misinterpreting the displayed values. The display shows separate lines for units, main and secondary. Runs on 12 to 32 VDC power (24 VDC nominal).
The Signet 2551 Magmeter is an insertion style magnetic flow sensor that features no moving parts. The sensor is made out of polypropylene and T-316L stainless steel. These sensors provide a frequency or digital (S3L) output. 4-20Ma available upon request. (Please confirm required output signal.)
Signet 2551 Magnetic Flow Sensor for 1⁄2" to 4" PVC Pipe 32-206
Signet 2551 Magnetic Flow Sensor for 5" to 8" PVC Pipe ........................... 32-202
Saddle Fittings
2" Saddle Fitting (PVC)
3"
4" Saddle Fitting (PVC)
................ 32-136
(Includes 25' of sensor cable.)
Rotor-X Flow Sensor (1⁄2"-4") .......... 32-142
Rotor-X Flow Sensor (5"-8") ........... 32-143
Rotor-X Flow Sensor (10"-up) ......... 32-144
H.D. Wall Mounting Bracket ........... 32-147
Signet 8050 Universal Mount Kit
The Signet 8050 Universal Mount Kit mounts the 2551 Magnetic Flow Sensor onto a wall or pipe. Includes the transmitter base, universal mounting plate and bracket.
Signet 8050 Universal Mount Kit .. 62-165
Signet 7300-7524 Power Supply and NEMA 4X Enclosure
The Signet Power Supply and NEMA 4X Enclosure are sold separately.
Signet 7300-7524 Power Supply .. 32-162
The innovative terminals on these power supplies use a special spring loaded screw. This makes installation as easy as pushing down and turning with a screwdriver.
NEMA 4X Enclosure 32-170 10" T x 8" W
Digital Flow Totalizer
Rotor-X Flow Sensor
Flow Meters — F300 Series
These economical NSF listed acrylic clamp-on insertion mount flowmeters feature dual flow range scale for both sch.40 and 80 PVC pipe installations. Includes neoprene gaskets and stainless steel pipe clamps. Accuracy is +/-5%
Battery Powered Saddle Mount Digital Flow Meters
These carefully engineered and innovative saddle-mount digital flow meters provide the performance and features of electronic meters without the need for an electrical hookup. No programming is required, that’s done for you at the factory.
The battery-powered flow meter features a 6-digit easy to read LCD display, and a weather resistant ABS enclosure. Available for both schedule 40 and schedule 80 PVC pipe.
Ships complete with (2) standard AAA alkaline batteries and required mounting clamps. 2" Digital Flowmeter ...................... 32-080
Vertical Mount Flow Meters
These economical flow meters are designed for applications in which the pipe runs vertically. For 2" Pipe (40-140 GPM) .............. 32-380 For 4" Pipe (125-525 GPM) ............32-383 For 6" Pipe (300-950 GPM) ...........32-384 For 8" Pipe (600-1,900 GPM) ........ 32-385
Note: Add .S (Horizontal side mount option) or .T (Horizontal top mount option) to catalog number. These flow meters are not NSF listed.
Saddle mount, Sch. 40 (30-300 GPM)
3" Digital Flowmeter ....................... 32-081
Saddle mount, Sch. 40 (60-600 GPM)
4" Digital Flowmeter ...................... 32-082
Saddle mount, Sch. 40 (100-1000 GPM)
6" Digital Flowmeter ...................... 32-083
Saddle mount, Sch. 40 (200-2500 GPM)
8" Digital Flowmeter ...................... 32-084
Saddle mount, Sch. 40 (400-4000 GPM)
2" Digital Flowmeter ...................... 32-063
Saddle mount, Sch. 80 (30-300 GPM)
3" Digital Flowmeter ...................... 32-064
Saddle mount, Sch. 80 (60-600 GPM)
4" Digital Flowmeter ...................... 32-065
Saddle mount, Sch. 80 (100-1000 GPM)
6" Digital Flowmeter 32-066
Saddle mount, Sch. 80 (200-2500 GPM)
8" Digital Flowmeter .......................32-067
Saddle mount, Sch. 80 (400-4000 GPM)
FlowVis® Flow Meters
These flowmeters are accurate (98%+), reliable, easy to install and are NSF 50 certified. Features a velocity scale provides a readout of velocity in feet per second for both the suction and discharge side of the pump. Available for 1.5" to 2.5" (SCH 40 PVC), 3" to 8" (SCH 80 PVC). 1.5" to 2.5" does not require straight runs of pipe before or after. 3" (5 X before), 4" (5 X before), 6" (6 X before), 8" (8 X before) is required. Flow-Vis® (1.5" Sch. 40 PVC)
Flow Range: 600-1,800 GPM (Includes Digital Upgrade).
Add this upgrade kit (1.5" thru 6") to FlowVis® flow meters to provide for a digital reading as well as a 4-20 mA signal for communication with variable frequency drives. This wall-mounted FlowVis® Digital can be retrofitted to all new or existing FlowVis® flowmeters to provide easy access to an accurate flow reading.
Flow-Vis® Digital Ext. Cable (25')....32-371 Flow-Vis Digital Signal Converter ..32-372
X2
X5
Now with Schedule 40 and 80 PVC scale.
Valves, Air Blowers, Hydrotherapy Fittings
Asahi “Pool Pro” PVC Butterfly Valve
This PVC butterfly valve was specifically designed for commercial swimming pool applications. Features PVC body, PVC disc with EPDM seals and 316 SS non-wetted stem. The exclusive blue handle designates the proper valve is in place for chlorinated water applications.
These PVC true union ball valves feature two-way blocking capability, PTFE seats and EPDM O-Rings. 1-1⁄2"
Omni Ball Valves
These economical PVC ball valves feature two way blocking capability, PTFE seat backed by EPDM for low stem torque.
Spa-Duty Air Blowers
Over the past several years, new blowers specifically for the spa industry have been developed. They feature all the performance and quality of the standard air blower with added features for the aggressive spa environment.
1.0 HP Spa Blower (3-6 Jets) ......... 70-500 (115/208/230 Volt, single phase, 60 Hertz, Open Drip-proof)
Weight: 64 lbs.
1.5 HP Spa Blower (5-10 Jets) ........ 70-501 (115/208/230 Volt, single phase, 60 Hertz, Open Drip-proof)
Weight: 76 lbs.
2.0 HP Spa Blower (8-12 Jets) 70-502 (115/208/230 Volt, single phase, 60 Hertz, Open Drip-proof)
Weight: 83 lbs.
3.0 HP Spa Blower (12-17 Jets) ..... 70-504 (208/230 Volt, single phase, 60 Hertz, TEFC)
Weight: 98 lbs.
1.0 HP Spa Blower (3-6 Jets) ......... 70-505 (208/230/460 Volt, 3-phase, 60 Hertz, TEFC)
Weight: 60 lbs.
1.5 HP Spa Blower (5-10 Jets) ....... 70-506 (208/230/460 Volt, 3-phase, 60 Hertz, TEFC)
Weight: 71 lbs.
2.0 HP Spa Blower (8-12 Jets) ....... 70-507 (208/230/460 Volt, 3-phase, 60 Hertz, TEFC)
Weight: 76 lbs.
1.5 HP (High Pressure) Blower (5-10 Jets) ........................................ 70-508 (208/230/460 Volt, 3-phase, 60 Hertz, TEFC)
Weight: 86 lbs.
3.0 HP Spa Blower (12-17 Jets) ..... 70-509 (208/230/460 Volt, 3-phase, 60 Hertz, TEFC)
Weight: 90 lbs.
Blower Accessories
In-Line Inlet/(Dual Conn.) for Spa Blower (1 HP-2.0 HP) ....................................70-584
In-Line Inlet/(Dual Conn.) for 3.0 HP Blower ........................... 70-585 2" Relief Valve ................................. 70-589 (.5-2.25 PSIG)
An easy and cost effective solution to eliminating leaking and weeping in plumbing applications where PVC pipe is used through a concrete wall or floor.
Cast Bronze No-Leak Flanges
Cast bronze with integral waterstop. Use in concrete pools to provide a water stop against infiltration of pool or ground water in combination with wall fittings and wall fitting bodies. Threaded connections.
34-309
Anodes
These sacrifical anodes provide for cathodic protection for existing Chester
Skimmers, Fill Spouts, and other Fittings
NSF Listed Skimmers
These skimmers are for concrete or gunite installations. Optional stackable notched extension collars allow for vertical adjustments. Includes NSF Listed Lid.
Hayward (SP-1082) Skimmer ......... 34-212
Features 2" FIP connection, float valve assembly, debris basket and square lid.
Fully adjustable, cycolac. With diffuser plate and body to provide uniform distribution 1-1⁄2" FIP or SKT with 2" MIP.
Gutter/Deck Drain Fittings
Cycolac
Gutter Drain 34-150
This cycolac gutter drain fitting comes complete with grate. Open area: 4.81 sq. in., flow rate: 22.5 gpm at 1-1⁄2" per second. 2" socket connection.
Dimensions: 2-1⁄2" W x 6" L
Weight: 1 lb.
Cycolac Gutter/Deck Drain 34-552
This 2" gutter/drain comes complete with grate. 2" socket or threaded connection.
Dimensions: 2-3⁄4" W x 4-7⁄16" L
Weight: 1 lb.
Hydrostatic Relief Valves
These valves in conjunction with a collector tube allow for ground water equalization when the pool is empty. Check local codes regarding use of these valves.
Cycolac Hydrostatic Relief Valve 34-601 (1-1⁄2" and 2" Threaded Connection)
2" Threaded Brass Hydrostatic
Threaded Brass Hydrostatic
Installation/Removal Tool For Brass Valves 34-611 (For Brass Valves Only)
Cycolac Collector Tube, 1-1⁄2"/2" ... 34-602 1-1⁄2" or 2" MPT Cycolac Collector Tube mates up with item 34-601 Relief Valve.
Commercial Collector Tube ........... 34-606 2" FPT Bronze Collector Tube mates up with item 34-605 Relief Valve.
2" FPT
Commercial
Collector Tubes
Constructed of either schedule 40 or schedule 80 PVC pipe. 2" female connection. Sch. 40 Collector Tube................... 34-603
Shipping Weight: 5 lbs.
Sch. 80 Collector Tube .................. 34-604
Shipping Weight: 6 lbs.
Dalmax Fiberglass Main Drains
MAIN DRAIN SUMPS (SOFA'S)
Daldorado's DalMAX™ series of Sump and Grates for new construction are unblockable large area main drains (SOFA’s) safety tested and certified to ANSI/APSP/ ICC 16-2017 (PA 2012)and NSF/ANSI/CAN 50 2020.
Daldorado provides a 25-year service life on all Main Drain Grates.
DalMAX™ main drain sumps for commercial pools are constructed of reinforced fiberglass with reinforced long sides and marine grade gel coat. The grates are made from the highest quality PVC materials tested to NSF/ANSI/CAN 50 2020. They all include a 3" FRP water stop, Schedule 40 PVC fitting. Outlet sizes and locations must be specified with order. All are tested and certified as a SOFA to ANSI/APSP/ICC 16-2017 (PA 2012). They have a large open area of 62%, DalMAX™ is the clear choice for every new commercial pool construction. Each configuration has a separate certified flow rate per pipe size for additional safety and peace on mind. Daldorado main drain sumps are provided a warranty for the life of the aquatic facility.
DalMax™ 24" x 24" Main Drain ...... 34-565 Outlet Size: 4"
1,734 at 1.5 FPS (Floor)
DalMax™ 24" x 24" Main Drain ...... 34-566 Outlet Size: 6"
1,734 at 1.5 FPS (Floor)
DalMax™ 24" x 24" Main Drain ....... 34-567
Outlet Size: 8"
1,734 at 1.5 FPS (Floor)
DalMax™ 24" x 24" Main Drain ...... 34-568
Outlet Size: 10"
1,734 at 1.5 FPS (Floor)
DalMax™ Fiberglass Main Drains
The Daldorado DalMax™ series of unblockable large area main drains are specifically designed for new construction or renovation projects. The DalMax™ series is certified to APSP-16 2017 standards by IAPMO, and NSF50 certified for material composition.
DalMax™ main drain sumps are constructed of fiberglass with grating featuring a large open area of 62%. The main drains ship complete with sump that includes a builtin frame, grate, approved fasteners and a removable internal strength support, which remains throughout construction. Standard units feature Schedule 40 PVC slip connections and include a 3" FRP water stop, 5" from top of sump. Outlet sizes and locations must be specified with order. General Certificate of Conformity (Service Life: Life of Aquatic Facility for Sump, 25 Years for Grates and Fasteners. 10-Year Limited Warranty).
Daldorado DalMax™ Large Area Main Drains
Main Drain Sumps
The Beast Main Drain
One BEAST main drain unit replaces (2) domed 18x18 - multiple 12x12 domed 24x24 and 18x36 (all depths) single port units. 10” port can be bushed down to 8” or 6”. Includes built-in pressure test plate rated to 150psi. Flat Grate eliminates toe-stubbing and injuries while avoiding obstructions to the pool vacuum clearing systems. 10 year warranty. Certified service life 25 years for the Grate and “Life of the Facility” for the Sump. Comes with all appropriate certifications ANSI/APSP/ICC-16-2017 (PA 2021, NSF/ANSI/CAN-50 2020.
The Beast Main Drain .................... 34-645
Dimensions: 24” L x 24” W x 21” D, 10” Port Weight: 59 lbs. (Must Ship Motor Freight) Floor: 1,734 GPM / Wall: 1,552 GPM
SuperSump™
ASME-2007 and NSF listed, the SuperSump™ now adds peace of mind and efficiency to its long list of benefits and advantages. Design features include an open grate area of 54%, Internal plumbing fittings, and a unique built-in water stop with two vertical extensions that prevents water passing over the flange. Sold in packs of (2) only.
9" L x 9" W x 11.93" D ...................... 34-615
4" Side Outlet Open Area: 42.12 Square Inches
Flow Rate (GPM): Floor: 261/Wall: 248
Shipping Weight: 9 lbs.
12" L x 12" W x 14.06" D .................. 34-616
6" Side Outlet Open Area: 81.30 Square Inches
Flow Rate (GPM): Floor: 365/Wall: 340
Shipping Weight: 13 lbs.
18" L x 18" W x 18" D ....................... 34-617
8" Side Outlet Open Area: 183.06 Square Inches. Not to be used on wading pools or spas (Multiple Drain Use Only).
Flow Rate (GPM): Floor: 816
Shipping Weight: 38 lbs.
VGB Compliant Main Drains and Drain Covers
MAHC-I 18" x 36" Stainless Steel Sump with Anti-Entrapment Cover
These stainless steel sumps are configurable to simplify compliance with the Model Aquatic Health Code, the International Swimming Pool and Spa Code, and the latest revisions to ANSI/APSP/ICC-16 2017. The sump is fabricated out of 316 stainless steel and features (2) hydrostatic ports, angled waterstop, bonding lug and (4) 9" x 18" anti-entrapment suction outlet covers with mud frame. These sumps are built to order based on required configurations and must be accompanied with a completed order form. Reusable test plugs can also be ordered as an option.
CALL FOR SPECIFICATIONS AND PRICING.
Large Area Frame and Grates
The Daldorado DalMax™ series of unblockable frame and grates are available in both 18"x36" and 18"x54" and feature a 62% open area. The DalMax™ series is certified to APSP-16-2017 standards by IAPMO, and NSF50 certified for material composition (high-grade UV-stable PVC -Georgia Gulf 7140). Suitable for floor or wall installation.
VGB Service Life of 25 years.
18" L x 36" W
Open Area: 401.76 Square Inches
Flow Rate (GPM): 1,880 Floor at 1.5 FPS.
Shipping Weight: 18 lbs.
18" L x 54" W ............. ……….………….34-816
Open Area: 602.64 Square Inches
Flow Rate (GPM): 2,820 Floor at 1.5 FPS.
Shipping Weight: 27 lbs.
The 18" W x 36" L VGBA “unblockable” drain covers streamlined for installation and plan approvals. The compact modular frame and grate designs are expandable in 9" increments to create longer “field fabricated outlets” such as 18" x 54" and 18" x 72" drains. MAHC-I unblock-
able drain covers comply with all current commercial standards. They are offered in both new construction or for replacement purposes. Frame and grates are made from high-grade UV stabilized PVC. They have a 10-year lifespan.
24" x 24" Frame and Grate
These Daldorado DalMax frame and grates are tested to APSP-16-2017 standards tested by IAPMO, and constructed of high-grade UV-stable PVC (Georgia Gulf 7140) -certified for NSF50, and an open area of 62%. Suitable for floor or wall installation. 10-Year Limited Warranty. 24" L x 24 Frame and Grate ......... ..34-810
Open Area: 357 Square Inches
Flow Rate (GPM): 1,671 Floor at 1.5 FPS.
Shipping Weight: 17 lbs.
Large Area SuperFlow™ Main Drain Grates
These large area flat grates begin at 18" x 36" and increase in width in 18" increments. Can be installed end-to-end to accommodate higher flow rate requirements. VGB Service Life of 25 years.
18"W x 36"L 34-331
Open Area: 343.44 Square Inches
Flow Rate (GPM): Floor: 2,080/Wall: 1,496 18"W x 54"L 34-332
Open Area: 514.66 Square Inches
Flow Rate (GPM): Floor: 4,269 18"W x 72"L 34-333
Open Area: 686.88 Square Inches
Flow Rate (GPM): Floor: 4,518
Waterway 18" x 18" Frame & Grate.... 34-545
Consists of frame, (4) 9" x 9" grates and mounting hardware.
Open Area: 174.4 square inches
Flow Rating: 812 GPM (Floor) at 1.5 FPS
Waterway 12" x 12" Frame & Grate.... 34-544
Consists of frame, grate and mounting hardware.
Open Area: 62.4 square inches
Flow Rating: 292 GPM (Floor) at 1.5 FPS
Waterway 9" x 9" Frame & Grate ... 34-543
Consists of frame, grate and mounting hardware.
Open Area: 43.6 square inches
Flow Rating: 203 GPM (Floor) at 1.5 FPS
VGB Compliant Main Drains & Drain Covers
AquaStar 24" x 24" Frame & Grate.. 34-629
Consists of frame, (4) 12" x 12" covers and mounting hardware.
Open Area: 340 square inches
AquaStar 18" x 18" Frame & Grate . 34-637
Consists of frame, vented riser, (4) 9" x 9" covers and mounting hardware.
Open Area: 160.8 square inches
AquaStar 16" x 16" Frame & Grate ... 34-635
Comes with 3/4" and 1" deep mud frames, cover and mounting hardware.
Open Area: 101 square inches
AquaStar 14" x 14" Frame & Grate 34-636
Consists of mud frame, adapter frame, cover and mounting hardware.
Open Area: 84 square inches
AquaStar 9" x 9" MoFlow™ Grate ... 34-650
Includes both grate and mud frame. Fits Standard 3⁄4" deep frame.
Open Area: 36.8 square inches
AquaStar 9" x 9" MoFlow™ Grate ..... 34-652 Grate ONLY. Fits Hayward 1" deep frame. Open Area: 35.8 square inches
AquaStar 12" x 12" MoFlow™ Grate 34-654
Includes both grate and mud frame. Fits Standard 3⁄4" deep frame.
Open Area: 71.2 square inches
AquaStar 12" x 12" MoFlow™ Grate ..... 34-656
Grate ONLY. Fits Hayward 1" deep frame. Open Area: 69.1 square inches (4) 9" x 9" MoFlow™ Grates ........... 34-658
Grates ONLY. Fits Pentair 3⁄4" deep frame. (4) 9" x 9" MoFlow™ Grates ........... 34-660 Grates ONLY. Fits Hayward 1" deep frame. Open Area: 147.1 square inches
VGB Compliant Drain Covers and Equalizer Fittings
SuperFlow™ Frame and Grates
These domed main drain grates are NSF and ASME listed. Can be used for both retrofitting old sumps and as a grate for new installations. Sold in 2-Pack ONLY.
9" x 9" Frame & Grate .....................34-328
Consists of frame, grate and screws.
Open Area: 42.12 Square Inches
Flow Rate (GPM): Floor: 261/Wall: 248
12" x 12" Frame & Grate ..................34-329
Consists of frame, grate and screws.
Open Area: 81.3 Square Inches
Flow Rate (GPM): Floor: 365/Wall: 340
18" x 18" Frame & Grate 34-330
Consists of frame, grate and screws.
Open Area: 183.06 Square Inches
Flow Rate (GPM): Floor: 816/Wall: 712
For multiple drain use only. Not to be used in wading pools or spas.
32"
Channel Drain with Flat Grate... 34-375
This VGBA certified anti-entrapment suction outlet includes both the outlet cover and (3) port sump. The outlet ports are 2-1⁄2" OD and 2" ID slip.
Open Area: 25.9 square inches
AEGIS Anti-Entrapment Shield
Easily installed without draining pool. Fabricated from fiberglass so no grounding is required. Approved for use over any size field built main drain sump up to 24" x 24". Includes stainless steel mounting hardware.
30" x 30" AEGIS Shield .................. 34-695
Open Area: 128.21 Square Inches
Flow Rate (GPM): 600 GPM at 1.5 FPS
Hayward 18" x 18" Frame & Grate .34-326
Consists of outer frame, inner frame, (4) 9" x 9" grates and mounting hardware.
Open Area: 183.28 square inches
Flow Rating: 520 GPM (Floor) at 1.5 FPS
Hayward 18" x 18" Grate ONLY ......34-323
Consists of inner frame ONLY, grate and mounting hardware.
Hayward 12" x 12" Frame & Grate .34-325
Consists of outer frame, inner frame, grate and mounting hardware.
Open Area: 83.40 square inches
Flow Rating: 390 GPM (Floor) at 1.5 FPS
Hayward 12" x 12" Grate ONLY ......34-322
Consists of inner frame ONLY, grate and mounting hardware.
Hayward 9" x 9" Frame & Grate ....34-324
Consists of outer frame, inner frame, grate and mounting hardware.
Open Area: 45.80 square inches
Flow Rating: 190 GPM (Floor) at 1.5 FPS
Hayward 9" x 9" Grate ONLY ......... 34-321
Consists of inner frame ONLY, grate and mounting hardware.
NOTE: All Hayward Frames and Grates are sold in 2-Packs ONLY.
This 6" round VGBA certified equalizer fitting is made from superior UV-resistant engineered polymers. Includes 316 stainless steel screws.
6" Bulkhead Adapter Fitting ......... 34-666
2" Threaded and 1-1⁄2" Socket Connection. (Must be ordered with 34-665)
SDX Retro High Flow Safety Drain
This retro-fit fitting is VGB certified. The unit comes complete with cover, SDX cover support, stainless steel screws, plastic anchors, trim pack, security wrench and spacer ring.
This equalizer suction fitting is VGBA certified and are UL certified to this standard. Includes suction cover, wall fitting assembly, gasket and stainless steel screws. Recommended for retro-fits. 1-1⁄2" MPT Connection.
Max-Flo Equalizer Fitting ............... 34-226
Open Area: 9.02 Square Inches
Flow Rate: Floor: 106 GPM
Gutter and Deck Grating Systems
Daldorado Perpendicular Grating
This perpendicular grating is designed to comply with the International Child Finger/ Toe Entrapment IBC Guidelines featuring a gap opening of only 8mm.
Made of high-grade UV-stable PVC. Available in 12", 14" and 16" widths. Available in white, bone and gray. Sold per lineal foot.
This grating system features a 40% open area which provides for whisper-quiet noise reduction. Made of high-grade UV-stable PVC. Available in 10”, 12", 14" and 16" widths for both radius and straight configurations. Complies with IBC child finger and toe entrapment openings of .315 (8mm). Available in white, bone and gray. Sold per lineal foot.
Certified NSF/ANSI/CAN 50 - 2019.
10-Year Limited Warranty.
Daldorado Standard Parallel
CapSHURE™ Deck Drain (Straight or Radius)
The CapSHURE™ drain is available in 8' lengths with 4" a grating width. It includes a heavy-duty base with a throw-away cap which helps the base keep its form when pouring and setting concrete. EPDM rubber joiners (sold separately) are used as flexible expansion joints. All grating constructed of high-grade UV-stable PVC. Complies with IBC child finger and toe entrapment openings of .315 (8mm) and is ADA compliant. The base is gray only and the grating is available in white, bone, and gray.
Certified NSF/ANSI/CAN 50 - 2019.
10-Year Limited Warranty.
Fastening Set for Grating: (Bag of 25). Order (1) bag for every 100 lineal foot.
Grating Accessory Items
36-721 Fastening Sets (25 Count)
36-730 Perpendicular 12" Outside Corner
36-731 Perpendicular 12" Sloping Corner
36-732 Perpendicular 14" Outside Corner
36-733 Perpendicular 14" Sloping Corner
36-734 Perpendicular 16" Outside Corner
36-735 Perpendicular 16" Sloping Corner
Curb Angle No Tail
Curb angles provide the edge needed for setting tile or deck finishing. Made of high-grade UV-stable PVC and pre-drilled on 18" centers. Available in white, bone and gray. Sold per lineal foot with a 8' minimum.
Hand holds add safety for swimmers by giving them the extra grip they need. Made of high-grade UV-stable PVC. Features pre-drilled holes on 12" centers. Hand holds are available in white and bone. Sold per lineal foot with a 8' minimum.
10-Year Limited Warranty.
Hand Hold ......................................... 36-737
Fastening Sets (25 Pack) ................ 36-738
Order (1) bag for every 25'
Straight Deck Drain (Per FT.)..........36-740 Includes Base, Grate and Cap. Sold in 8’ Lengths ONLY. Radius Deck Drain PKG .................. 36-741 Includes Base, Grate and Cap. Price per foot and sold in 8' Sections ONLY. CapSHURE™ Accessory Items:
Gutter and Deck Grating Systems
DalFLEX Lane Line Anchor
Introducing the revolutionary DalFLEX® Lane Line Anchor. What sets this anchor apart is the unique design, unmatched in the market. Experience seamless installation in almost all rim-flow gutter systems, providing you with unmatched flexibility and eliminating any trip hazards. Say goodbye to costly bonding or pool shell penetrations (compliant with NEC 680.26(c)), as the DalFLEX® now takes care of it all. Certified NSF/ANSI/CAN 502020. NO BONDING REQUIRED. Black silicone-wrapped flat 316SS ribbon extension (w/ ‘S’ hook) is securely fixed to DalFLEX® unit and folds back into base to be stowed away for later use. Installation hardware included. Manufactured in 4 sizes (10", 12", 14" and 16").
10” DalFLEX Lane Line Anchor ....... 14-510
12” DalFLEX Lane Line Anchor ........ 14-511
14” DalFLEX Lane Line Anchor 14-512
16” DalFLEX Lane Line Anchor ....... 14-513
8” Lane Line Connector ................... 14-514
13” Lane Line Connector ................. 14-515
12” Drill guide with Locating Pin .... 14-516 (Purchase (1) for every (20) Anchors installed)
16” Drill guide with Locating Pin .... 14-517 (Purchase (1) for every (20) Anchors installed)
DalFLEX LLA Fastener Set .............. 14-519 (2 Per packet)
Perpendicular PVC Grating
The only grating system offered that utilizes a unified product to consistently match straight and most radius sections with ease. Widths from 4" to 20". Made from High grade UV-stabilized, outdoor quality premium-grade PVC. Complies with ASTM load and deflection requirements. Completely modular with interlocking stainless steel hardware. Available in three colors (white, bone, and gray). Ten-year limited warranty. 10' Minimum Order. Fastening Set For Grating .............. 36-551 (Box of 50). Order (1) box for every 100 lineal feet. Curb Angle – NO Tail ..................... 36-545 Curb Angle – With Tail ................... 36-548
Quiet-Flow® Parallel Grates
Designed specifically to capture water quickly and reduce the noise of commercial gutters. Available in both straight and radius profiles. Pre-fabricated corner sections for parallel grating are also available. Ten-year limited warranty. Available in three standard colors (white, bone and gray). 10' Minimum Order.
Hand Hold Grate Bracket
The PVC Hand Hold provides added safety and a comfortable way for swimmers to hold on to the edge of the pool. PVC Hand Hold brackets are designed for mechanical fastening to the pool beam. Designed for compatibility with all Lawson Aquatics grating products. Ships in 10' sections. 10' Minimum Order.
Drain-the-Deck™ System
A system of PVC components designed to offer a generous 25% open space for water flow. All grates are completely modular and interlocking.
ASTM tested for loads and friction. Prefabricated corner sections with perpendicular grating are also available. The grating is available in three standard colors (white, bone and gray). 10' Minimum Order.
Fastening Set For Straight
Grating ............................................. 36-552 (Box of 50). Order (1) box for every 100 lineal feet.
Fastening Set For Radius Grating..36-555 (Box of 50). Order (1) box for every 25 lineal feet.
(Box of 50). Order (1)
GPM Grating
GPM grating is custom fabricated from a marine-grade polymer and is environmentally stabilized to withstand the harshest aquatic conditions. It will not rot, discolor or delaminate. Even repeated blows from a heavy hammer will not break GPM grating. GPM grating has a slip-resistant matte finish on both sides to hide scuffs and scratches. Chemicals and UV have no effects.
Whether for new construction, renovation or replacement, GPM grating is available in a wide range of thicknesses, shapes, lengths and widths. Custom-tailored to exact project requirements, whether curved, radius, round, or rectangular, all at prices competitive with stock grating! Call our sales consultants for additional information and a quotation tailored to your exact needs.
Available Options:
Engraving and Personalization
Have text, icons or even your company logo engraved directly into the grating panel.
Comfort Flow & Competition Flow
Available in Comfort Flow and Competition Flow configurations, grating sections are available with openings parallel or perpendicular to pool edge or grating length. Standard grating sections are white, gray or black.
Two thicknesses are available 1" (25mm) and 3⁄4" (19mm) in 4 standard configurations.
Standard widths are 8" (203mm), 10" (254mm), 12" (305mm) and 14” (356mm). Custom sizes are available upon request.
Comfort Flow
Large walking surface
GPM Gutter Grating
VGB Compliant GPM Grating
Certified VGB drain covers and sump grates are available in standard sizes. Custom sizes can be supplied to accommodate virtually any existing drain sump, outlet size or flows.
One-Piece Radius Grating
GPM grating is the only solid one-piece grating system available as a radius with the capability of the open areas (slots) either perpendicular or parallel to the wall. GPM grating is custom fabricated to the specified curve radius. Our open areas are consistent and do not have the typical (and dangerous) open wedged slots.
Exclusive 10-Year Warranty Against Cracking or Breaking
Colors
GPM Grating is available in a variety of colors. Colorfast and easy to clean. White, gray and black are standard.
Competition Flow
Wide open area for high volume flow to gutters
Depth Markers and Warnings
GPM depth markers and warnings are offered in a variety of colors and sizes to suit your specific needs. Custom depth markers are available upon request.
Strainers and Reducers
Fluidtrol Fiberglass Strainers
These strainers are fabricated out of a dual laminated PVC with fiberglass overlap process that is rated and tested at 50 PSI. They feature ANSI 150 lb. Van Stone type flange connections, 1" thick clear acrylic lid with 1⁄2" vent cap and stainless steel tee handles. Ships complete with a T-316 stainless steel basket with 1⁄8" perforations.
Fluidtrol Reducing Strainers
These eccentrically reduced fiberglass/ PVC laminate strainers feature 150 lb. PVC flanges, 1" thick acrylic cover with a 1⁄2" vent, 1⁄4" neoprene O-ring seated in a slotted groove and T-316 stainless steel basket with 1⁄8" perforations.
Marlow Fiberglass Replacement Strainer
These strainers were manufactured to have the identical centerline and face-toface dimensions as the Marlow cast-iron strainers. Constructed of PVC and fiberglass reinforced plastic. Includes a clear acrylic lid, stainless steel tee handles, Van Stone flanges and a heavy-duty 1⁄8" perforated T-316 stainless steel basket.
Mer-Made® Fiberglass Strainers
These strainers are fabricated out of fiberglass reinforced plastic construction and are pressure tested to 50 PSI. They feature a quick-opening acrylic see-thru lid, flanged connections drilled to 150 lb. ANSI Standard, and a T-316 stainless steel angled top basket. Available in both standard and eccentrically reduced models to fit all applications.
Fluidtrol Stainless Strainers
These strainers are fabricated out of Sch. 10 T-304 stainless steel construction rated at 50 psi and are hydrostatically tested to 11⁄2 times the design pressure. They feature 150 lb. Van Stone T-304 Stub end with back-up Rings, 1" thick clear acrylic lid with 1⁄2" vent cap and stainless steel tee handles. Ships complete with T-316 stainless steel basket.
Fluidtrol Concentric Reducers
These concentric reducers are available in both fiberglass reinforced plastic/PVC laminate and T-304 stainless steel.
Fiberglass/PVC
Stainless Steel
End Suction Horizontal and Vertical Pumps
Aurora® 3800 Series
Single Stage End Suction Pumps SETTING NEW STANDARDS OF EFFICIENCY
Today’s installations demand quiet, smooth running pumps with long life. Aurora’s 100 years of experience with design, sales and manufacturing of centrifugal pumps has led to the 3800 Series. These modern pumps with a clean, straightforward design were developed with maximum interchangeability in mind. Aurora’s highly reliable 3800 pumps offer the best solution for commercial swimming pool applications.
The Aurora® 3801 horizontal close-coupled centrifugal pump features casted casing feet for easy back pullout, mechanical seal with stainless steel trim, Buna-N elastomers, ceramic seat and carbon washer. Equipped with a stainless steel shaft sleeve that extends the length of the seal plate. The pump shaft extension is gasket sealed from the pumped liquid. Impellers are constructed of 316 stainless steel and are dynamically balanced and key locked to the shaft. Standard features include
316 SST impeller, 316 SST shaft sleeve, double volume on 4" discharge and larger to reduce bearing loads. Gauge taps on suction and discharge. Available in four power frame sizes. Designed to exceed requirements of NEMA MG 1-2009, the coupled TEFC super premium efficiency motors can reduce energy losses by 10-50%. Reduce carbon footprints, as well as energy costs, lower noise and vibration, and easier maintenance.
All pumps are epoxy coated and NSF listed.
Speck Normblock End-Suction Pumps
Redefining the limits of plastic pumps. The Normblock Multi takes the non-corrosive and lightweight benefits of plastic higher than any other American manufacturer. Ranging from 5.5 HP up to 30 HP using a quiet 1750 RPM, heavy-duty TEFC motor. Available with an optional 6” or 8” strainer. Each pump is tested to factory and customer specifications, with comprehensive individualized test results.
Normblock 10 HP ............................ 30-200
(208-230/460-Volt, 3-Phase, TEFC)
Shipping Weight: 207 Lbs.
Normblock 15 HP ............................ 30-205
(208-230/460-Volt, 3-Phase, TEFC)
Shipping Weight: 284 Lbs.
Normblock 20 HP ........................... 30-208
(208-230/460-Volt, 3-Phase, TEFC)
Shipping Weight: 322 Lbs.
Normblock 25 HP 30-215
(208-230/460-Volt, 3-Phase, TEFC)
Shipping Weight: 507 Lbs.
Paco Horizontal Type LC End-Suction Pumps
The PACO line of end suction, single stage, close-coupled pumps provides high performance, quality, quiet operation and durability.
These pumps offer low life-cycle costs, high efficiency for reduced operation costs, compensated double-volute design for reduced radial loads, minimized shaft deflection, prolonged seal and bearing life. Constructed of cast iron volute, bronze wear ring/shaft sleeve, and stainless steel impeller. Designed so that the motor/rotating element can be pulled out from the back for ease of maintenance and servicing. Includes cast-iron base with drip lip, grouting holes and tapped drain. Available with optional epoxy coating and NSF-50 certification.
Hayward HCP 4000 Series Pumps
These commercial self-priming pumps made with Noryl® thermoplastic housings are durable yet lightweight for easy installation. Features a transparent lid, which allows visual inspection as well as a non-corrosive oversized strainer basket which extends the time between clean-outs.
Includes a 3-phase, (TEFC) totally enclosed fan-cooled motor that will provide years of reliable service. 4" suction and discharge union connections.
Pentair C-Series Bronze Pump
The Purex C-Series heavy-duty bronze commercial pump is specifically designed for commercial, public or other large swimming pools, fountains and water features where high flow rates and continuous operation is desired. Features 6" suction and 4" discharge and ODP motor. Recommended for applications with required suction lift of less than 2'-0". Certified with NSF as a non-self-priming pump.
This new commercial pump is the first five-horsepower variable-speed pool pump that runs on single-phase or threephase power. This pump allows for custom programming of optimum pump speeds for specific tasks. It has four programmable settings that can be set to any speed ranging from 300 to 3,450 RPMs, and provides sophisticated, energy-saving pump technology without the high costs typically associated with independent pump/external drive setups. Integrating the pump with a 4-20mA flowmeter, this pump is capable of maintaining a constant flow based on flow requirements of the pool.
5 HP WhisperfloXF VS ................... 30-935 (208-230/277-460V single-phase) (208-460V three-phase)
Suction and Discharge is 2.5", but can be adapted to 3".
3" (4-20mA) Flowmeter .................
5.5 HP (230/460V, 3 PH, TEFC)…….30-921
Shipping Weight: 110 lbs.
7.5 HP (230/460V, 3 PH, TEFC)…….30-922
Shipping Weight: 125 lbs.
10 HP (230/460V, 3 PH, TEFC)……..30-923
Shipping Weight: 142 lbs.
12.5 HP (230/460V, 3 PH, TEFC)…..30-924
Shipping Weight: 155 lbs.
32-900 Includes Saddle External Control Wiring Kit
32-906
Required to connect the flowmeter to the pump.
The surprising secret to minimizing pump energy cost is
accomplish a job. It takes
Self-Priming Pumps and Variable Frequency Drives
EQ Series™ Commercial Pumps
EQ Series™ pumps are designed for maximum efficiency and quiet operation. They are the only non-corrosive, all plastic pumps designed for commercial swimming pools. These self-priming pumps are NSF listed and are available with ODP motors in single or three phase and TEFC motors in three phase only. Features 6" suction and 4" discharge flanges and includes an integral strainer and strainer basket. EQ pumps with 3-phase motors work great with the Acu Drive™ XS variable frequency drives found on this page.
Acu Drive™ XS VFD
The Acu Drive™ XS provides variable frequency power to your pump’s 3 phase motor, operating the pump at lower speeds (when site conditions allow) to save up to 60% or more on the pump’s electricity usage. Each Acu Drive™ XS includes battery backup, fused disconnect and a real-time clock. Electronics are sealed from ambient air to greatly extend the service life in demanding pool environments. Electronics are kept cool via an aluminum heat-sink and external fan. Motor, pump, and connecting equipment are protected from water hammer and vibration by the 2-step ramp (soft start) feature.
Unique, intelligent features enhance efficiency by delivering the optimal voltage to the motor. Superior programming flexibility allows for time-based programming (lower off-hour speed settings) and/or closed loop programming (e.g. operating the pump at constant flow set point when used in conjunction with the optional flow sensor kit), by adjusting speed as the filter load changes throughout the backwash cycle.
Flow sensor kit is highly recommended, especially in filtration/recirculation applications. Optional 6-year enhanced “on-site” service warranty is available.
Start-up services are to be ordered separately (see chart below).
In addition to what is shown, we offer more variable frequency drives and options. Contact our sales consultants for additional information. (800) 428-3254.
Light Commercial Self-Priming Pumps
Whisperflo™ Pump
These single speed thermoplastic pumps are provided with a TEFC motor, stainless steel motor shaft and sealed bearing. Features the Cam and Ramp™ lid that is easy to remove and quickly locks in place with a quarter turn. 2" suction and discharge connection.
1 HP (208-230/460V, 3PH, TEFC)...30-936
Shipping Weight: 46 lbs.
1.5 HP (208-230/460V, 3PH, TEFC).30-941
Shipping Weight: 48 lbs.
2 HP (208-230/460V, 3PH, TEFC)...30-951
Shipping Weight: 51 lbs.
3 HP (208-230/460V, 3PH, TEFC)....30-955
Shipping Weight: 58 lbs.
Replacement Strainer Basket..........30-995
JCP Commercial Polymer Pump
This self-priming polymer commercial pump with integral strainer includes a NEMA premium-efficent motor. Features all stainless steel hardware, radial-seal stariner lid, 6” ANSI flange suction and 4” ANSI flange discharge. Faster priming times that other pumps in its class. NSF Listed.
IntelliFlo3™ VSF Variable Speed and Flow Pump
This pump offers proprietary flow technology which maintains the pools optimal flow. The on board password protected touchscreen allows you to control by either RPM speed of the motor or target gallons per minute. Features a 2" FPT suction inlet and discharge outlet threaded connection and clear “see thru” strainer lid. Will provide up to 100 GPM at 70' TDH at 3,450 RPM. 3 HP (208-230 V, 1 PH, TEFC)....... 30-944
IntelliFlo® VS+SVRS Pump
The Intelliflow VS+SVRS Pump provides a virtually fail-safe, tamper-proof entrapment protection solution. This unit meets the ASME A112,19.17 standard, thus complying with the Virginia Graeme Baker Pool and Spa Safety Act SVRS requirements. These SVRS protection functions can't be disabled.
Features a 2" FPT suction inlet and discharge outlet threaded connection and a clear “see thru” strainer lid. Will provide up to 110 GPM and 70' TDH at 3,450 RPM. Includes a 230-volt, single-phase motor that pulls a maximum of 16 AMPS. Requires a 20-AMP, 2-pole, 230-volt circuit breaker for operation. NSF certified and UL, ETL listed.
Intelliflo FS+SVRS Pump................ 30-932
WhisperfloXF® High-Performance Pump
These single speed pumps are provided with a TEFC motor, stainless steel motor shaft and sealed bearing. Features extra large strainer basket and union connectors for connecting directly to 2.5" or 3" plumbing. Compatible with the Acu Drive XS VFDs.
2 HP (208-230/460, 3PH, TEFC) ... 30-913
Shipping Weight: 55 lbs.
3 HP (208-230/460, 3PH, TEFC) ... 30-914
Shipping Weight: 60 lbs.
5 HP (208-230, 1PH, TEFC) 30-917
Shipping Weight: 63 lbs.
5 HP (208-230/460, 3PH, TEFC) ... 30-918
Shipping Weight: 72 lbs.
Replacement Strainer Basket 30-979
Stark Horizontal Fiberglass Sand Filter Systems
STARK FILTRATION SYSTEMS
Each Stark filter tank is manufactured under the strictest quality-control procedures. The patented, integral composite fiberglass construction eliminates welds or seams that can leak, blow out, or rupture from vacuum damage.
As much as 80 continuous miles of resin-impregnated fiberglass filament is wound under tension, both orbitally and circumferentially for consistent quality. The resulting tank is both lightweight and strong.
NSF-listed Stark filters are designed for 100 PSI working pressure. Tanks are available in 36", 42", 48" or 60" diameters. Each tank is pressure-tested prior to shipment. And the tank is completely impervious to corrosion. Stark fiberglass systems can significantly reduce capital construction costs with their self-stacking, modular design for fast, easy installation. The corrosion and weather-resistant attributes of the units also helps to reduce annual maintenance costs. Stark’s 100 percent corrosion-resistant fiberglass filters provide the perfect solution: dependable performance with ease of operation.
Corrosion-Proof
Stark fiberglass filters are designed to have a life span three to five-times longer than metal filters. Resin-rich fiberglass shells do not crack, chip, flake, or invite rust the way the enamel coatings of metal tanks do. Even the valves and piping are corrosion resistant.
Backwash Control Options
All filter systems can be provided from fully-automatic microprocessor control, semi-automatic hydraulic control or manual valves with linkage backwash controls.
Custom Configuration: Modular By Design
Standard and custom styles are available allowing for influent and effluent placement to meet any and all design requirements. There are single or multiple units, side-by-side, end-to-end, or stacked. Manway locations are provided for every need. A choice of automatic or manual controls assures efficient operation.
Architects and engineers favor the Stark system because it is designed to use as little as one-fourth the floor space of other filters. The self-supporting stackable structure eliminates the need for independent framework.
Engineered for a Lifetime of Performance
Every Stark Fiberglass Filter tank is built to resist structural failures caused by fatigue, corrosion, and scaling. Optional ultraviolet protection is available.
STARK® Para-Pump Booster System™
This optional booster system provides consistent valve-actuation in cases where city water pressure is unreliable. Includes a 1⁄2 HP (115/230/1PH) pump wired for 115 VAC with a pressure switch factory calibrated for 35 PSI shut-off, a 2.1 gallon hydro-pneumatic tank, check valve assembly, tee assembly, 100' of 3⁄8" tubing, all required tube connection fittings and anchoring hardware.
Para-Pump Booster System™......... 23-255
This semi-automatic programmable controller can backwash up to six filter cells in sequence via the integral multiport pressure distribution valve. This controller can initiate in three ways; true semi-automatic at a touch of a button, via an external signal from a master filter room controller, or by a signal from an optional differential pressure switch. Features include user-configured settings, alarms, automatic calculated backwash cycle time and valve control to ensure pump and heater protection prior to the start of the backwash cycle. The CS400™ requires 24VAC power (transformer NOT included). CS400™ Backwash Controller ....... 23-250
Manway Cover with Viewport is standard on all wound filters.
STARK® CS400™ Backwash Controller
Stark Horizontal Fiberglass Sand Filter Systems
Stark™ RS (36" Dia.) and SS (42" Dia.) Series™ Filter Systems
These corrosion proof filament-wound composite filter system vessels are arranged side-by-side with top connections and manway access on one end. Features proprietary PARACOTE® all-weather exterior coating with UV inhibitors, injection-molded laterals with reverse "V" slots and schedule 80 PVC internal manifolds. Filters are NSF 50 listed and have a 100 PSI vessel pressure rating. Each system includes fully-assembled schedule 80 PVC manifolds manway viewport, backwash valve(s), sight glass, gauges, multiport control valve, manual air relief ball valve(s) and media dump port. Available with fully-automatic, semi-automatic or manual/ linkage backwash systems. The 23-247 Automatic air relief valve can be ordered as an option. 15-year limited warranty.
Stark™ S (42" Dia.) Series™ Filter Systems
These filter system vessels can be arranged side-by-side or stacked on top of the other. Designed for Seismic Zone 4 loading without the need for additional supports or braces. Features proprietary all-weather exterior coating with UV inhibitors. Manway access can be located on either side of each vessel. Includes all required schedule 80 PVC manifold piping for field assembly. Filters are NSF 50 listed and have a 100 PSI vessel pressure rating. Each system includes manway viewport, backwash valve(s), sight glass, gauges, multiport control valve, manual air relief ball valve(s). Available with fully-automatic, semi-automatic or manual/linkage backwash systems in multiple configurations. Automatic air relief valves (23-247 and/or 23-245) can be ordered as an option. 15-year limited warranty.
Stark™ 5S (60" Dia.) Series™ Filter Systems
These 60" diameter corrosion proof filament-wound composite filter system vessels can be arranged side-by side with top connections and manway access on one end. Features proprietary PARACOTE® all-weather exterior coating with UV inhibitors. Filters are NSF 50 listed and have a 75 PSI vessel pressure rating. Each system includes fully-assembled schedule 80 PVC manifolds, manway viewport, backwash valve(s), sight glass, gauges, multiport control valve, manual air relief ball valve(s) and media dump port. Filter vessels over 40 square feet utilize an 8” air-actuated backwash valve. Available with fully-automatic, semi-automatic or manual/linkage backwash systems. The 23-247 Automatic air relief valve can be ordered as an option. 15-year limited warranty.
STARK FILTRATION SYSTEMS ®
Multi-Port Valve Assembly ............ 23-242 (A = 1, B = 2, C=3, D = 4, E = 6 Tanks)
Stark Filter Replacement Parts
CM200 Manual Controller............. 23-235
Replacement Controller. Simply turn the knob to backwash each filter cell.
(A=1, B=2, C=3, D=4, E=5, F=6)
Stark Filter Replacement Gauges
These liquid-filled heavy-duty gauges have 1⁄4" NPT back-mounts and include all required mounting hardware.
Influent Pressure Gauge 23-218
Effluent Pressure Gauge................ 23-220
Multi-Port Pressure Gauge ............ 23-222
Stark Hydraulic Connection Fittings
These quick-connect fittings are used in the Stark automatic and semi-automatic backwash controls, gauges and automatic air relief systems.
Quick-Connect Brass Fitting 23-225
1⁄4" MNPT x 3/8" O.D. Commonly used on Stark multiport valves.
Quick-Connect Elbow Fitting 23-227 1⁄4" MNPT x 3-3/8" O.D. Commonly used on Stark valves.
Quick-Connect Fitting .................... 23-228 1⁄4" FNPT x 3/8" O.D. Commonly used on gauges and inlet side of Stark check valves.
Quick Union Elbow Fitting ............ 23-229 3/8" O.D. Commonly used on Stark 6" slide valves.
Quick-Connect Tee Fitting ............. 23-230 3/8" O.D. Commonly used on tubing where a branch is required such as water supply to multiport valve and gauge.
6"
4" Grooved Coupling 6" Grooved Coupling
Vertical Commercial Sand Filters
Vertical Fiberglass Sand Filters
These vertical high rate sand filtration tanks are manufactured using CNC controlled filament winding equipment. The tanks are constructed with a dual laminate process consisting of a non-continuous strand and roving inner structure combined with a filament wound outer structure. The tanks’ superior construction is resistant to fatigue associated with operational cycling, corrosion and scaling and will provide decades of reliable service. These vertical filters are designed for 50 psi operating pressures and offer a 10year warranty. The filter(s) come standard with an overhead distribution assembly, lower collection assembly, 16" manway, flanged influent/effluent ports, manual air vent, influent/effluent pressure gauge, and a media/water drain combination port. The filters are NSF listed with single tank flows up to 700 GPM at 15 GPM/ SF. The tanks ship fully assembled with an imbedded U.V. protection for outdoor installations.
Options including standard and custom manifold systems, supports, linkages, automatic backwash control systems and filter media can be purchased separately.
Astral Standard Bed Vertical Commercial Sand Filtration Systems
Commercial Filter Manifolds and Support Kits (Single Tank)
Dual Tank Manifolds/Linkages
Shown with 4-Valve Manifold and Support Kit.
Single Tank Manifold Kit 22-379
Dual Tank Manifold Kit ................... 22-380
Single Tank Manifold for 34X61 ... 22-392
Dual Tank Manifold for 34X61 ...... 22-393 (All kits above utilize Butterfly Valves.)
The THS filter is a NSF-approved 50-psi rated tank with flow rates up to 535 gallons per minute. The filter shell is manufactured from a unique and lasting composite laminate design that makes winding unnecessary. What really makes this THS filter stand out is its appearance.
Recreonics
Jandy SFHT Horizontal Sand Filters
These filters are fabricated with a HD 5-layer laminated Isophthalic laminate applied radially and axially for maximum strength. Robotic hole placement ensures an exact fit of plumbing flanges. Features large 16” round access hatch with clear viewport. Proprietary laterals load and unload media more effectively, aiding in fast, efficient backwash cycles. Generous drain outlet speeds media replacement.
Jandy Commercial Vertical High Rate Sand Filters
Pre-Plumbed Manifold Kits
Save time and effort with these pre-plumbed manifolds. Specifically designed to maximize flow. Field-configurable for left or right plumbing 4,5, and 7-valve models to cover single or multiple tanks. Includes heavy-duty Cepex butterfly valves ANSI-150 flanged connections and linkage kits.
Jandy Manifold Systems with Linkage
Hi-Rate Sand Filters
Triton C Series Hi-Rate Sand Filter
The Triton C Series fiberglass filters are designed for a maximum operation pressure of 50 PSI. A unique internal design levels the sand bed and produces an even water flow. The filters feature 2" threaded bulkhead fittings and includes a manual air relief valve, pressure gauge and 2" drain for winterization. Multiport valves or valve adapters are sold separately.
This hi-flow multiport valve kit is constructed of solid, injection-molded PVC and features a full six-position, positive lock operation. Includes a one-piece handle and a special position for valve winterization. The 2" bulkhead fittings connect directly to the bulkhead fittings on the Triton C filters.
2" Hi-Flow Multiport Valve Kit........22-575
Weight: 8 lbs.
Triton C-3 Hi-Rate Sand Filter
The Triton C-3 Series fiberglass filters are designed for a maximum operation pressure of 50 PSI. A unique internal design levels the sand bed and produces an even water flow. The filters feature 3" flanged connections and includes a manual air relief valve, pressure gauge and 2" drain for winterization. Flanges, gaskets, hardware and valves are sold separately.
This side-mounted multiport valve is designed for maximum performance and working pressures. Features a heavy-duty PVC body, six-position, and positive-lock operation with special winterizing position. Includes 2" bulkhead threaded connections and see-through sight glass.
2" Multiport Valve Kit 22-032
FullFloXF™ High Performance Valve
This PVC valve has near zero pressure loss across the valve which significantly reduces the amount of energy required by a filtration system. The FullFloXF™ backwash valve easily retrofits to all Pentair Triton sand filters. Feature 2.5" ID and 3" O.D. connections and large comfort grip handle.
FullFloXF™ Backwash Valve 22-577
Replacement Pressure Gauge
This unique replacement pressure gauge for all Triton filters features a unique backwash indicator that helps you track when backwashing is required.
Replacement Pressure Gauge ...... 32-403
Valve Adapter Kits
The adapter kits are used for installations where a multiport valve is not utilized. They convert the threaded bulkhead fittings on the filter tanks to standard slip or threaded connections for manifolds with manual valves.
Slip Connection Adapter Kit...........22-578 (For 1-1⁄2" or 2" Slip Connections)
The bobbin wound models filters deliver top-tier performance and durability for commercial pools. NSF 50 Listed, (5-20 GPM/SF), these filters feature UV-protected gel coats and corrosion-resistant fiberglass construction. Multi-diffuser heads and oversized laterals ensure optimal filtration. Features flanged connections a 5-year warranty.
For 22-052 and 22-053. Includes required piping and bulkhead fittings.
4” Multi-Port Valve Kit……………………22-048 For 22-054 and 22-055. Includes required piping and bulkhead fittings.
Hi-Rate Sand, D.E. Filters, Alternate Media
AlphaCel® Swimming Pool Filteraid
AlphaCel® is a “green” swimming pool filtering media that can replace diatomaceous earth. Cellulose fibers are extracted from wood pulp to create a filter media with no safety warnings for handling or disposal. AlphaCel is easy to apply on filters and does not wear parts. It can improve water clarity and extend filter cycle time.
AlphaCel® (25lb. Bag)………………...51-806
AlphaCel® (40- 25lb. Skid)…………..51-808 All AlphaCel® – except for (1) 25 lb. bag must ship via motor freight.
Quad D.E.® Filter
Quad D.E.® fiberglass filters provide the highest water clarity that is delivered by a diatomaceous earth filter with ease of cleaning typically experienced with cartridge filters. Four easily accessible and removable D.E. cartridges greatly increases the filter’s cleaning capacity. Cleaning couldn’t be easier. In fact, you have three options: backwash and recharge like a traditional D.E. filter, remove and rinse off the cartridges, or simply remove the lid, leave the cartridges in place, open the drain plug, and rinse. The filter has both manual air relief valve and a continuous internal air relief system to maintain efficient filtration. Features 2" diameter plumbing connections and a 1-1⁄2" bottom drain.
Zeolite isa naturally occurring mineral formed millions of years ago. Viewed under an electron microscope, the granules reveal void spaces as small as3 microns Small particles are trapped in the void spaces Molecular sieving occurs when water contaminants such as ammonia and chloramines are adsorbed and chemically locked onto the zeolite granules.
The combination of physical entrapment of ne particles and molecular sieving of contaminants makes zeolite a superb water ltration media and produces superior water clarity compared to regular sand media
NOTE: Replacement elements available for all pressure D.E. filters, including PAC FAB, Purex, Sta-Rite, SwimQuip, Hayward, & American Products.
Best of all, Zeobrite lasts just as long as sand And when it’s nally time for replacement, all natural Zeobrite can be mixed into your garden soil, planter boxes or spread over your lawn asa natural soil enhancer
Sand just can’t
Filter Elements, Grids and Replacement Covers
Bottom Outlet Vacuum Filter Grids
These grids are precision vacuum-formed from quality polystryrene plastic. Covers are made from durable custom woven monofilament polypropylene featuring a velcro closure. Grids can be purchased as a complete assembly with cover and gasket or grid only.
24" x 45" Complete Assembly ....... 29-100
30" x 36" Complete Assembly ....... 29-102
38" x 48" Complete Assembly ....... 29-104
30" x 60" Complete Assembly....... 29-106
24" x 45" Grid Only 29-240
30" x 36" Grid Only ........................ 29-242
38" x 48" Grid Only ........................ 29-244
30" x 60" Grid Only ........................ 29-246
Side Outlet Vacuum Filter Grids
Outlets are located on short side of grid. Specify center height, corner height and offset distance when ordering.
24" x 45" Complete Assembly ...... 29-050
30" x 36" Complete Assembly ...... 29-052
38" x 48" Complete Assembly ...... 29-054
30" x 60" Complete Assembly 29-056
Double Suction Side Vacuum Filter Grids
Outlet for these grids are located at the top of the short sides.
30" x 36" Complete Assembly ...... 29-060
30" x 60" Complete Assembly....... 29-061
30" x 36" Grid Only ........................ 29-262
30" x 60" Grid Only ........................ 29-266
Center Drain Elements
Often referred to as “filter discs,” these center drain leaves are fabricated for absolute rigidity. Features corrugated channel patterns and internal reinforcement. Thermoplastic washers are permanently bonded to the element.
30" x 4-1⁄2" hub ................................. 29-108 26" x 4-1⁄2" hub .................................. 29-110
14-1⁄2" x 11⁄2" hub ................................ 29-112 14-1⁄2" x 2" hub 29-114
24" x 3" hub ....................................... 29-115
SwimQuip Grids
18" x 16-1⁄2"
Element Replacement Covers
Made of heavy-duty woven monofilament linear polypropylene. Edges are sealed to prevent raveling. Furnished with velcro closures of easy-on, easy-off field replacement. Bottom Outlet Covers
Replacement Circular Covers, Discs & Spacers
Made of heavy-duty linear monofilament polypropylene. All edges are sealed to prevent raveling. Specify Velcro® or zipper closures.
Harmsco Betterfilter Cartridge Filters
Recreonics and Harmsco have teamed up to provide the superior Betterfilter cartridge filter. Constructed of low carbon 304 stainless steel with a brilliant corrosion-resistant finish, these filters will give long runs with little maintenance. Each tank is even warranted for ten years! The actual filtering is done by Harmsco
How To Select A Harmsco Filter
Super-Tuf Six cartridges. They give you superior water clarity through controlled porosity and are ready for action the minute they’re installed…requiring little maintenance thereafter. A filter flow rate of .2 gallons per minute per square foot provides the most efficient dirt-holding capacity and the longest filter runs. At this rate, each cartridge has the capacity of 1.2 gallons per minute. Each Betterfilter is tested and approved by the National Sanitation Foundation.
The Betterfilter requires no complicated piping and no backwash disposal. To clean, simply remove the cartridges and hose down. Betterfilters are perfect for replacing older sand filters or diatomaceous earth filters. Refer to accompanying chart for selection and ordering information. Harmsco filters are ideal for filter renovations. A common problem of filter renovations is demolishing and removing the existing filters from the filter room, and installing the new filters without removing doors or tearing out walls. Harmsco cartridge filters are so compact, in many cases they can be brought in through an existing doorway and installed right next to the old filter without having to remove it.
Modular Media Filter
This Ultra Capacity Filtration System™ has a dirt-holding capacity that can be up to 3 times greater than other filters in equivalent-sized tanks. As a result, you enjoy virtually maintenance-free operation. The unique “filter within a filter“ design uses all areas of the filtration media equally. By maximizing the filtering capacity, this design lets you enjoy extended time between cleanings.
*These units feature flanged connections.
Harmsco Replacement Parts
Harmsco #202 1⁄2" Wing Nut ......... 25-250
For all Betterfilter Cartridge Filters
Harmsco #622 Cartridge Lifter ..... 25-251
For Harmsco Betterfilter BF252
Harmsco #623 Cartridge Lifter .... 25-252
For Harmsco Betterfilter BF336
Harmsco #625 Centering Rod ...... 25-253
For all Betterfilter Cartridge Filters
Harmsco #639 Bottom Seal .......... 25-254
For all Betterfilter Cartridge Filters
Harmsco #653 Top Seal ................ 25-255
For Harmsco Betterfilter BF900 and BF1200
Harmsco #671 Top Seal ................. 25-256
For Harmsco Betterfilter BF450 and BF600
Jack’s Formula Multilube
A unique lubricant and protecting agent where water is present. Designed to eliminate rust and corrosion. For use on all metal parts or gaskets exposed to water, salt, pool chemicals or constant water pressure. Reduces wear by 80%.
Jack’s Formula Multilube................ 10-564 (1 oz. Tube)
Replacement Modules for Modular Media Filter
Replacement Cartridges, Filter Flosser
Clean and Restore Your Filtration Equipment
Mineral scale, minerals, rust and oils quickly build up inside virtually any type of filter. Standard backwashing cleaning does not properly remove these deposits thus filter
Replacement Cartridges
Recreonics stocks a wide range of specialty cartridges for virtually any swimming pool application. A few of the standard sizes and shapes are pictured and the most commonly used are listed below. Since removal of backwash water has become a problem in many communities, cartridge filtration has been used for most spa installations. Below we list a few of the replacement cartridges for filters you may find in your facility. If you don’t see a replacement listed here please call and we will find a replacement for your particular need.
runs become shorter and shorter or the quality of filtration deteriorates. Chemical action is necessary to breakdown and remove these deposits and restore filtration
equipment to original condition. We have developed cleaning systems which will easily and quickly remove deposits from the filter without damage to the equipment.
24-081
Filter Flosser Cartridge Cleaner
The Filter Flosser is a well made, cost effective, ergonomically designed and eco-friendly cartridge filter cleaning tool. The reason the Filter Flosser works so well is that the nozzles maximize water volume and provides focused, evenly distributed water spray that gets between the pleats of the cartridge. Fabricated out of polished aluminium and will connect to any standard garden hose. Reduces both cleaning time and water usage by at least 50%.
Filter Flosser
Shipping Weight: 2 lbs.
10-575
6 Replacement Cartridges The new polyester replacement cartridge is built to out-perform any cartridge made. Long lasting and chemical resistant, they offer six square feet of filter area per cart ridge. They are 20 micron rated, and measure 93⁄4" x 23⁄4" O.D. to fit Harmsco, Swim Quip and most other cartridge filters.
Super-Tuf 6
Replacement Cartridge Filter ........ 25-003
Weight: 8 oz.
NOTE: Many pool operators find it most convenient to keep two complete sets of Super-Tuf cartridges on hand. When one set gets dirty, simply pop the second set into the filter and clean the dirty set when time is available. This eliminates filter down-time and saves on maintenance expense.
These chlorinating concentrates have a high available chlorine content and contains a built-in stabilizer to reduce the decrease of sanitation power that sunlight can cause. The quick-dissolving formula provides effective chlorination and unlike calcium hypochlorite, it won’t add scaleforming and water-clouding minerals to your pool. Available in 25 and 50 Ib. pails.
These brominating products offer you an exciting alternative to chlorinating products. They come in easy-to-use tablets and are one of the most reliable forms of pool water sanitation available. But even more than convenience, the brominating tablets’ unique formula gives you a clean and clear pool without the eye and skin irritation or that unpleasant chlorine odor. Plus, while other sanitizers’ effectiveness is lessened by pH and temperature swings, bromine continues to kill bacteria.
Ideal for most chlorine feeders and floaters, easy-to-use, 3" giant size tablets have the sanitizing power and built-in chlorine stabilizers to reduce loss due to sunlight.
This dry granular chlorine contains 68% available chlorine. Dissolves fast for effective sanitation. It is convenient, easy to handle, doesn’t require expensive or large storage tanks and does not lose strength during storage.
Soda ash or sodium carbonate shouldbe used to adjust the level of the pH. pH levels should be maintained between (7.2 to 7.6).
Sodium Ash (50 lb. Bag) 50-125
Sodium Bicarbonate
Sodium bicarbonate should be used to raise the level of alkalinity. Use sodium bicarbonate to raise the total alkalinity level to the desired range and then use Soda Ash to further correct the pH level. Alkalinity should be maintained between (80-120 ppm). 1.4 lbs. of sodium bicarbonate raises total alkalinity 10 ppm in 10,000 gallons of water.
Sodium Bicarbonate (50 lb. Bag) .. 50-130
NOTE: All chemicals over 25 lbs. will ship via motor freight.
Conditioner prepares your pool to effectively use and preserve its chlorine residual and stabilizes your pool against UV degradations. Check with your local board of health for allowable levels.
(D.E.) is made up of tiny fossilized skeletons of small sea plankton that trap undissolved material.
Diatomaceous Earth (50 lb. Bag)… 51-750
Specialty and Enzyme Chemicals
Pro Series ProZymes - Pool
Reduces the build-up of non-living organic contamination. Increases filter run cycles by breaking down non-living filter clogging grime and grunge caused by sunscreens, lotions, body oils. Reduces scrubbing and brushing of tile/gutter line.
Pro Series ProZymes - Pool (5-gallon) ............................................ 51-514
Dosage Rate: 1 oz. per 2,000 gallons
Pool First Aid
This is a pool problem solver. It gets rid of waterline ring, cloudy water, clogging filters and unpleasant odors with no scrubbing. It also includes a clarifier for quicker results.
Pool First Aid (2L/67.7 oz) ................ 51-510
Dosage Rate: 2 oz. per 1,000 gallons
PHOSfree® Extra Strength
Quickly reduces high phosphate levels. PHOSfree® X-Strength
Specifically formulated for high bather loads in hot water environments. This unique concentrated formula powerfully biodegrades contaminants such as: body oils, cosmetics, lotions and other non-living organics. Regular use will reduce or eliminate the most common maintenance challenges that operators face including waterline rings, foaming, cloudiness, odors, loading/short cycling of the filter, and premature water change outs.
Pro Series ProZymes - Spa (5-gallon) ........................................... 51-520 Dosage Rate: 1 oz. per 100 gallons
PRO SERIES® Stain & Scale Control™
Protects pools from the damaging effects of scale buildup and staining due to excessive calcium, iron, copper and other minerals. Prevents scale from forming on chlorine generator cells and UV crystal lens in order to help maintain optimum performance. PRO SERIES Stain & Scale Control can be used with most sanitizing systems (do not use with biguanides) and is compatible with all pool surfaces. Stain & Scale Control (5-Gallon) 51-518
Pro Series Pro Blend
Regular pool maintenance is easy with PRO SERIES Pro Blend. The outstanding benefits of the SMARTZyme™ technology are combined with our industry leading phosphate removal technology. Continually removes phosphates from pool water and reduces overall maintenance.
Pro Series Pro Blend (5-gallon) ...... 51-519
Dosage Rate: 5 oz. per 10,000 gallons
Clean & Perfect
This naturally based enzyme cleaner is perfect for skimmers, furniture covers, and more.
Clean & Perfect ............................... 51-529 (24 oz. Trigger Spray)
Specialty Chemicals
Basic Water Chemistry
Correct water chemistry depends on balancing seven principal factors:
1. Total Alkalinity – Without a proper balance of total alkalinity, wild fluctuations of PH may occur. Total alkalinity is raised by adding sodium bicarbonate, or lowered by adding sodium bisulfate or muriatic acid.
Proper Range (80-120 ppm)
2. pH – When pH is not balanced, bathers experience discomfort, equipment deteriorates and chlorine is rendered useless. pH is raised by adding soda ash or caustic soda and is lowered by adding sodium bisulfate or muriatic acid.
Proper Range (7.2 – 7.6)
3. Calcium Hardness – Without a proper balance of calcium hardness, calcium is leached from pool surfaces, or deposited on equipment. Calcium hardness is raised by adding calcium chloride.
Proper Range (200-400 ppm)
4. Free Available Chlorine – When any chlorine compound is added to water, the percentage of strength is dependent on pH. At a pH of 7.0, a full 75% of the chlorine is in the active form of hypochlorous acid; at a pH of 7.5, only 48% is hypochlorous acid; and at 8.0, only 22%.
Proper Range (1.0-3.0 ppm)
5. Combined Available Chlorine – When free active chlorine reacts with ammonia, organic nitrogen compounds and other contaminates in the pool water, chloramines are formed. Chloramines are not an effective disinfectant and are actually the cause of most eye irritation and odor problems. The prescence of combined chlorine can be removed by the addition of 10 ppm free available chlorine per ppm of combined chlorine or the use of other shocking agents.
6. Total Dissolved Solids – The total amount of all material dissolved in the pool water. As water is reused and material is added, a load develops that can become excessive to efficient operation and balance. The only proper cure is dilution with fresh make-up water. Proper Range (Should not exceed 1500 ppm)
7. Temperature – For swimming pools maintained within a range of 75º to 90º degrees F, The temperature factor is not important in proper water balance.
Oxy-Brite
This non-chlorine shock creates sparkling water and shock treats all in one step. Effective in chlorine and bromine pools. Allows for swimming immediately after application.
Just a small amount of this super-concentrated formula adds sparkle while removing particles that dull pool water. A oneounce dose treats up to 5,000 gallons.
This specially developed, acid-based liquid cartridge cleaner removes debris with its overnight soak and rinse formula.
1 Quart Bottle 51-280
Natural Clear
Environmentally friendly Natural Clear is a natural, biodegradable water cleaner. It's new, more concentrated enzyme formula rids pools of organics that cause odor and scum lines.
1 Gallon Bottle 51-501
Chemical Storage Tanks, Labels, Mixer and Vapor Shield
Vertical Bulk Storage Tanks
These translucent, flat-bottom polyethylene tanks are appropriate for indoor or outdoor use. We offer both single wall and double wall options. Double wall tanks are designed for the most stringent environments and complies with Federal Regulation 40 CFR-264.193 requirements. Below are the most popular sizes. Other sizes are available.
Bracket Mount 1/3 HP Mixer
The pulsafeeder bracket mount mixer provides a means of mounting a mixer to a tank cover or other flat surface. Four 18/8 stainless steel bolts and two rugged 3⁄8 inch thick steel brackets hold the mixer securely. Features a 36" 316 SS shaft with a 2-3⁄8" diameter impeller. Includes 8', 3-wire, 18 gauge SJ cord and plug set.
1/3 HP Mixer .................. 52-115 (115-VAC/ 60HZ/1,725 RPM/ TEFC)
ACID
Solution Tanks
Constructed of high quality, industrial grade polyethylene, these solution tanks come complete with rigid high-strength lids and features a convenient feed hole for easy solution replenishment. Accurately calibrated in 5 gallon increments on the outside of these tanks (except 75 gallon).
35 Gallon Tank with Lid ..................52-702
Shipping Weight: 30 lbs.
50 Gallon Tank with Lid ..................52-703
Shipping Weight: 30 lbs.
75 Gallon Tank with Dust Cover 52-704 (Tank is black and not marked)
Shipping Weight: 30 lbs. (Motor Freight)
CHLORINE
ALKALINE
Chemical Labels (8 -1⁄2" T x 11" W)
Identify the contents of solution crocks easily with our brightly colored labels.
The Drum Safe allows chemical feed pumps to draw down drums and carboys of muriatic acid without a vacuum lock, while at the same time preventing all organic acid fumes and vapors from escaping and damaging equipment in the mechanical room. Simple to install, the Drum Safe is constructed of schedule 80 PVC with viton seals and diaphragm. Fits both plug and cap style drum caps with 3⁄4" knock-out fitting on 5- to 52-gallon acid shipping containers. Includes a weighted foot valve with debris screen and 15' of tubing. Available in three sizes for 1⁄4", 3⁄8" and 1⁄2" O.D. tubing.
Chemical Respirators, Protection and Transfer Pumps
Comfo II Respirator
ALLITEMS INSTOCK
Comfo ll Respirators feature twin filter cartridges with large area and capacity for low breathing resistance and long service life. A soft rubber “half-mask” facepiece features a rolled cushion edge that provides a secure fit on most faces.
The Comfo ll Respirator is suggested by Mine Safety Appliances for extremely low levels of chlorine atmosphere, dusty atmosphere (such as diatomaceous earth) or for working in areas where danger to exposure may exist, but is not present.
For use in low levels of chlorine vapor, particulate dusts or mists. Box of 10 cartridges.
Weight: 2.2 Ibs.
Advantage™ 200 Respirator
For those operations that require a maintenance-free respirator, the Advantage 200 respirator is a half-mask air-purifying respirator that provides maintenance-free protection against a variety of respiratory hazards. Created with economy and ease-of-use in mind, the Advantage 200 respirator requires only routine filter replacement. When the face piece wears out, replace the complete unit. The Advantage 200 respirator is approved by both the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH) and the Mine Safety and Health Administration (MSHA). (Cartridges sold separately)
Evacuator (CPRE) is a one size fits all solution to poorly ventilated chemical and pump rooms. The compact design allows for simple installation, requiring only a 120v GFCI-protected outlet and exhaust vent opening.
Chemical and pump rooms are typically hot, humid, and corrosive environments as a result of poor airflow and the presence of chemicals, motors, and pool equipment. Paddocks CPRE is your plug-and-play solution by creating a cross-ventilation airflow while source-capturing and exhausting corrosive chemical fumes.
Visitor Specs & Dispenser
Wraparound frame with contoured nose piece for secure, comfortable fit. May be worn over most prescription eyewear. Polycarbonate lenses offer 99.9% UV protection. Brow bar fits snugly to forehead for extra protection. Dispenser includes 12 pair of polybagged glasses.
Visitor Specs & Dispenser ............. 12-641 Dim. 22-1⁄2" H x 7" W x 2-1⁄2" D Visitor Specs (Each) ................... 12-643
Features durable and corrosion proof HDPE construction, and custom backward inclined exhaust fan. Epoxy coated for superior corrosion resistance with sealed ceramic bearings. 1,000 cfm exhaust volume. Multiple exhaust options are available.
Chloramine Removal System ........ 52-065
Requires 120v GFCI-protected outlet.
Standard Fabric Duct (Blue)………..52-066
45" Long Vinyl Apron (White) ........ 12-675
Chemical Metering Pumps
FLEXFLO® A100N Metering Pump
These peristaltic pumps have standard solid state output adjustments in 60 second cycles. All Blue-White pumps feature the tube failure detection system (TFD) that senses a tube rupture and automatically shuts the pump down. 3/8" Tube Connection. 1-year limited warranty.
FLEXFLO® A1A Metering Pump
LMI Metering Pumps
Metering pumps feature corrosion-proof housings, solid state encapsulated electronics, and sophisticated valve action contributing to their dependability. The units feature a wide range of stroke and speed variables to meet any need. LMI pumps are available with or without the four function valve for priming ease.
Specially designed for commercial aquatics, the A1A enables users who have a wide range of chemical feed requirements for sanitizing (sodium hypochlorite) and pH adjustment (acid). Output range of .01 to 100 GPD at pressure up to 40 PSI. Features a variable speed DC motor, NEMA 4X (IP66) washdown duty enclosure, patented tube failure detection system and 2-year limited warranty.
Blue-White Flex-Flo® A1A Metering Pumps
FLEXFLO® A2A Metering Pump
Specially designed for commercial aquatics, the A2A enables users who require higher chemical feed requirements for sanitizing (sodium hypochlorite) and pH adjustment (acid). Output ranges of 1.32 to 132 GPD up to 40 PSI and 3.82 to 381.6 GPD up to 40 PSI and 100:1 turndown ratio, Features a variable speed DC motor, NEMA 4X (IP66) washdown duty enclosure, patented tube failure detecion system and 2-year limited warranty.
The Pulsatron Series E Plus pump features an automatic control available with 4-20 mA DC direct or external pacing, with stop function. It also offers manual control by on-line adjustable stroke rate and stroke length.
Series E Plus contains a highly reliable timing circuit as well as circuit protection against voltage and current upsets. This pump features solenoid protection by thermal overload with auto-reset. Six distinct models are available, having pressure flow capacities of up to 500 GPD and pressure capabilities up to 100 PSIG. Metering performance is reproducible to within +/- 2% of maximum capacity.
Pulsatron guided check valves, with their state-of-the-art seat and ball designs, provide precise seating and excellent priming and suction lift characteristics. The timing circuit is highly reliable and, by design, virtually unaffected by temperature, EMI and other electrical disturbances.
Pulsatron E Plus Pumps
PULSAtron C Plus Pumps
The C Plus series of metering pumps provide an economical selection and reliable performance. Features safe, easy priming and on line adjustable stroke rate and length setting. Approved for both outdoor and indoor applications. Four models are available.
Pulsatron C Plus Pumps
Stenner Metering Pumps
These metering pumps are completely self-priming and operate dry. They offer precision pumping of fluids up to 170 GPD. The pumps are tested by ETL to conform to ANSI/NSF STD 50.
Stenner Peristaltic Metering Pumps
KopKit for PULSAtron E Plus Pumps
Each KopKit contains the recommended spare parts that are usually required for preventative maintenance. KopKit
CHEM-TECH Metering Pumps
Mechanical diaphragm design for long running life with built-in bleed valve for safe & easy “hands free” priming allows you to feed hypochlorite, acids and caustics at a very competitive price.
Chem-Tech Metering Pumps
Stenner Replacement Parts
53-081 UCCP201 #1 Pump Tube (Pkg. of 2)
53-082 UCCP202 #2 Pump Tube (Pkg. of 2)
53-083 UCCP205 #5 Pump Tube (Pkg. of 2)
53-084 UCCP204 #4 Pump Tube (Pkg. of 2)
53-085 UCDBINJ 1⁄4" Injection Check Valve
53-086 UCMAC38 Ceramic Weight (3 8" Clip)
53-088 MCCP202 #2 Pump Tube (Pkg. of 5)
53-089 UCMACW0 Ceramic Weight with 1⁄4" Clip
53-090 UCCP203 #3 Pump Tube (Pkg. of 2)
53-092 MCAK200 1 4" Ferrule (Pkg. of 24)
53-100 UCAK100 1 4" Conn. Nut (Pkg. of 10)
53-107 MCCVDBO Duckbill Check Valve (Pkg. of 5)
53-109 UCADPTR 3/8" Conn. Nut (Pkg. of 2)
53-110 UCAK200 1⁄4" Ferrule (Pkg. of 10)
53-112 MP90000 Rainroof for Metering Pump
53-114 CVIJ3/8 3⁄8" Injection Fitting
53-116 MCDBINJ 1 4" Inj. Check Valve (Pkg. of 5)
53-117 ST114 1 4" Suction Strainer
53-118 ST138 3 8" Suction Strainer
53-122 MCCP201 #1
53-124 MCCP203 #3 Pump
53-126 MCCP204 #4 Pump
53-128 MCCP205 #5 Pump
(Pkg. of 5)
Chemtrol ® Automatic Chemical Control Systems
PC6000 Programmable Controller
The Chemtrol™ PC6000 is a powerful and reliable controller that incorporates automated control of water chemistry and filtration in a single unit with choice of backwash programs for single or multiple filters. All menus are displayed in English, French or Spanish with choice of US or metric units. Each unit is supplied with a comprehensive operation manual, on-site startup and training by a qualified dealer and a FIVE-YEAR electronics warranty.
PC6000 Controller ......................... 56-540 (110-Volt) Includes sensor cell assembly with flow switch, control and monitoring of ORP, pH, heater, main pump, water level. Monitors PPM, filter pressures and features Langelier saturation index, automatic back wash, data logging, remote computer operation and voice telephone communication.
PC5000 Programmable Controller
The Chemtrol™ PC5000 is a user-friendly and reliable controller that is easy to install and operate. All menus are displayed in English, French or Spanish with choice of US or metric units. Each unit is supplied with a comprehensive operation manual, on-site startup and training by a qualified dealer and a FIVE-YEAR electronics warranty.
PC5000 Controller .......................... 56-518 (110-Volt) Includes flow cell assembly with flow switch, control and monitoring of ORP, pH, PPM, and heater. Features Langelier saturation index, automatic data logging, and full screen menus.
PC3000 Programmable Controller
The Chemtrol™ PC3000 is a user-friendly and reliable controller that is easy to install and operate. All menus are displayed in English, French or Spanish with choice of US or metric units. Each unit is supplied with a comprehensive operation manual, on-site startup and training by a qualified dealer and a FIVE-YEAR electronics warranty.
PC3000 Controller .......................... 56-515 (110-Volt) Includes flow cell assembly with flow switch, control and monitoring of ORP, pH, and heater. Features Langelier saturation index, automatic data logging, and full screen menus.
PC2100 Programmable Controller
The Chemtrol® PC2100 is the newest member of the Chemtrol® line of automated water chemistry controllers. The PC2100 is a user-friendly and reliable controller that is easy to install and operate. All menus are displayed in English, French or Spanish with choice of US or metric units. Every unit is supplied with a comprehensive operation manual plus on-site startup and training by a qualified dealer and a FIVE-YEAR electronics warranty. PC2100 Controller 56-555 (110-Volt) Controls and monitors ORP and pH. Features Langelier saturation index, automatic data logging, and full screen menus. New 8-line display and safety flowswitch included. Flow Cell Assembly is included.
PC 1500 ORP/pH Digital Controller
The Chemtrol® PC1500 is a user-friendly and reliable controller that is easy to install and operate. All menus are displayed in clear language in English, French or Spanish with a choice of US or metric units. Each unit is supplied with a comprehensive operation manual, on-site start-up and training by a qualified dealer and a FIVEYEAR electronics warranty.
PC 1500 ORP/pH Digital Controller .. 56-554 (110-Volt) Includes, flow cell assembly with flow switch, control and monitoring of ORP and pH. Features Langelier saturation index, automatic data logging and full screen menus.
PC 1555 PPM/pH Digital Controller
The Chemtrol® PC1555 is a user-friendly and reliable controller that is easy to install and operate. All menus are displayed in clear language in English, French or Spanish with a choice of US or metric units. Each unit is supplied with a comprehensive operation manual, on-site start-up and training by a qualified dealer and a FIVE-YEAR electronics warranty.
PC 1555 PPM/pH Digital Controller ... 56-559 (110-Volt) Includes, flow cell assembly with flow switch, control and monitoring of PPM and pH. Features Langelier saturation index, automatic data logging and full screen menus.
This communication options provides the controller with and Ethernet / Internet modem for remote operation using Ethernet / Internet network communication. The program allows you to access the controller from your smart phone, tablet, computer or any device with internet access. The free app is compatible with Apple and Android. This is a web-based program with true duplex operation capability representing the actual controller screen display with automatic downloading and visual graphics representation of test data.
This communication option provides the controller with software-based conversion of sensor signals, set-point, high & low alarms, cumulative run time and total feed time for ORP, pH, PPM, Temperature, (Conductivity, Pressure influent and effluent, and Flow available with optional sensors) into MODBUS protocol for monitoring on Building Management Systems.
Chemtrol®
Monitoring and Control Options
PPM Monitoring and Control Option
Provides direct, reliable readings of free chlorine (HOCL) concentration in water.
PPM Monitoring and Control Option ................................ 56-545
Total Dissolved Solids Option 56-530
This option allows you to monitor total dissolved solids and temperature. Includes dual purpose TDS/temperature probe, required fittings and software.
Flow Monitoring Option ................. 56-583
This option allows you to monitor the system flow rate. Includes flow sensor, saddle fitting (up to 8") and required software.
Water Level Control Option............ 56-531
This option allows you to monitor and control the water level of the swimming pool/spa. Includes level sensor (choice of optical or float – please specify), mounting assembly and required software.
Chemtrol® Digital Controllers
The Chemtrol ® Digital Controllers introduce a new standard of sophistication in automation based on advanced microprocessor technology. These simple and user-friendly controllers offer the choice of control in PPM of free chlorine or with ORP for chlorine, bromine or ozone.
ALLITEMS INSTOCK
Chemtrol® 250 ORP/pH
Digital Controller
The Controller automatically maintains both sanitizer ORP (oxidation-reduction potential or Redox) and water pH in pools and spas. All operating functions are clearly labeled and accessible from the front panel, with safety and easy-reset features not found on other controllers. Not to be used with salt pools.
Chemtrol® 250 Controller .............. 56-560 (110-Volt) Includes OPR, pH probes and paddlewheel flowswitch.
Chemtrol® 255 Digital Controller
The Controller introduces a long awaited technological breakthrough in automated water treatment with a proprietary new sensor for free chlorine. The new PPM Sensor is a solid state sensor with a selective membrane that provides direct readings of free chlorine in water concentrations ranging from 0.1 to 10 ppm (parts per million) or mg/l (milligrams per liter).
Chemtrol® 255 Controller .............. 56-562 (110-Volt) Includes PPM, pH probes, flow cell and paddlewheel flowswitch. Must specify if to be used on a salt or bromine pool. Not to be used in the State of Ohio.
CO2 Gas pH Control System
Carbon dioxide is a natural, non-corrosive gas that can be used as a substitute for liquid acid. CO2 is available in standard pressurized gas cylinders. CO2 does increase the alkalinity of water and is therefore not recommended in applications where high alkalinity is problematic.
CO2 pH Control System ............... 56-505 Includes, cabinet, solenoid valve, PVC check valve/injector, flowmeter (0-40cfh), 15' feed tube and Victor SR311 pressure regulator.
CO2 PH System w/Auto-Switch.... 56-507 Same as the 56-505, but designed for 2 or more CO2 cylinders on the same feed line. Will switch automatically over to the second cylinder when pressure gets low.
CO2 Feeder
This CO2 feeder incorporates a time proven design and a state-of-the-art valve to provide reliable and quality CO2 feeder at a competitive price. Available in both 0-30 and 20-200 SCFH models. These feeders are perfect for any aquatic application using CO2 for pH control. The feeder can be coupled with the 56-533 - pH control crossover switch for the ability to easily and quickly switch between CO2 and acid feed systems.
CO2 Feeder (0-30 SCFH) .............. 56-528
pH Control Crossover Switch
This pH Control Crossover Switch was specifically designed to be used in application where both CO2 and acid are used to control pH. The CSS allows for a simple flip of switch to change from using acid to CO2. There is no need to unplug one feeder and plug in a different feeder.
pH Control Crossover Switch........ 56-533
CO2 Feeder
Crossover Switch
Chemtrol ® Accessory and Replacement Products
Sensor Cell Cabinet Assembly
For even greater ease of installation and maintenance, the components of the flow cell assembly can be supplied in a preplumbed sensor cell cabinet.
Sensor Cell Cabinet Assembly ..... 56-534
Includes sensor cell, compression fittings, paddlewheel flowswitch, and sampling tap and lockable cabinet.
Flow Sensor Monitoring Option
This option allows for monitoring and display of system flow on the Chemtrol® menu screen. Includes (1) (2536) Rotor-X sensor and PVC saddle fitting. Field calibration instructions are included. Return line size must be specified.
Flow Sensor Monitoring Option ... 56-583 Must be ordered at the same time as the controller.
Flow Cell Assembly Options
For ease of installation and maintenance, the sensors can be mounted on this optional flow cell assembly. The assembly includes a sensor cell with an air vent and clear cover, two compression fittings for the ORP and pH sensors, paddle wheel flow switch, a water sampling tap, two ball valves for controlling the water flow in and out.
Flow Cell Assembly with Flow Switch ............................................... 56-595
Includes flow cell with tap and valves ONLY. Flow Cell (ONLY) ............................. 56-535 Includes only the sensor cell and (2) 1⁄2" compression fittings.
Wheel Rotary Flowswitch .
Features 1⁄2" NPT connections.
(Includes 10' of cable)
NOTE: To ensure proper water flow, make sure that the bypass line is properly connected. The intake side should be off the pressure side of the recirculation system, i.e., after the filter. The return side should be to a low-pressure area-such as the vacuum side before the recirculation pump, or downstream after the heater, or atmospheric pressure in the pit of a vacuum sand filter or balancing tank.
CAT Chemical Controllers, Saline Systems, Erosion Feeders
CAT 2000® Professional Package
The CAT 2000 offers powerful, affordable water chemistry management. It monitors pH and sanitizer activity to maintain safe and healthy water quality at all times and is compatible with chlorine, bromine and salt systems. CAT 2000 pairs CAT Professional Series pH and ORP sensors with a digital, microprocessor-based control interface. 5 year warranty on electronics, 26-month warranty on sensors.
Includes pH, ORP control, PVC backboard, flow cell/sensor and flow switch.
CAT 4000® Professional Packages
The CAT 4000 is a wireless commercial remote water quality controller complete with CAT Professional Series pH and ORP sensors. It provides remote monitoring and access of water quality data with PoolComm via the internet or mobile device. It’s available with Wi-Fi® or cellular capability for 24/7 system access. 5 year warranty on electronics, 26-month warranty on sensors.
CAT 4000 PP (Wi-Fi) ...................... 56-460
Includes pH, ORP control, *water level, *tank level, *digital flow, back-up sanitizer, (1) aux relay, PVC backboard, flow cell/sensor and flow switch.
Includes pH, ORP control, *water level, *tank level, *digital flow, back-up sanitizer, (1) aux relay, PVC backbord, flow/cell sensor and flow switch.
Replacement Probes
pH Probe with 24" Cable ................ 53-001
pH Probe with 10' Cable ................ 53-002
ORP Probe with 24" Cable ............ 53-003
ORP Probe with 10' Cable 53-004
*Requires the purchase of additional sensors.
Hayward Saline C® Series Salt Chlorine Generators
The Saline C® Series salt chlorine generators provide a simplified, powerful solution for commercial applications. The Saline C 11.0 is capable of generating 11 pounds of chlorine per day, while the Saline C 6.0 generates 6 pounds per day. The single
unit system eliminates the need for multiplexing numerous salt cells and optimizing use of space. Both systems plug and play with chemical automation systems and include an industrial-grade, clear cell with 4" and 2" inlet/outlet connections for the Saline C 11.0 and Saline C 6.0, respectively along with power supply. Features a 50 psi vessel pressure rating, reverse polarity and self-cleaning technology as well as a 2-year warranty. Salt operating range is 3,500 to 5,000 ppm. Minimum required flow is 80 GPM (Saline C 11.0) and 40 GPM (Saline C 6.0).
Saline C 6.0 ..................................... 52-300
Includes Single electroytic cell with 2" connections and 110-volt plug in power supply. Saline C 11.0 .................................... 52-302
Includes Single electroytic cell with 4" connections and 110-volt plug in power
Rainbow Erosion Feeders
These feeders use large or small trichlor or bromine slow-dissolving tablets. They install on the pressure side of the pump, downstream of the filter and heater.
Rainbow (300-29X) Feeder ........... 52-604
Off-line with 1⁄2" control valve and tubing. Treats up to 161,000 gallons @ 3PPM using 1" chlorine tablets, 9.8 lb. capacity.
Dimensions: 12” Dia. x 39-3⁄4" Tall
Rainbow (320) Feeder ................... 52-605 In-line with 1⁄2" control valve. Treats up to 13,040 gallons @ 3PPM using 1" chlorine tablets, 3.5 lb. capacity.
Dimensions: 10" Dia. x 17-3⁄4" Tall High Capacity Feeder .................... .52-610 Off-line, 1" connections. Treats up to 97,000 gallons-chlorine/20,200-bromine. 15 lb. capacity.
Dimensions: 8" Dia. x 21-1⁄2" Tall High Capacity Feeder ..................... 52-612 Off-line, 1" connections. Treats up to 160,000 gallons-chlorine/40,900-bromine. 30 lb. capacity.
Dimensions: 8" Dia. x 39-1⁄8" Tall High Capacity Feeder ..................... 52-614 Off-line, 1" connections. Treats up to 332,000 gallons-chlorine/61,600-bromine. 40 lb. capacity.
Dimensions: 8" Dia. x 51" Tall Spring Loaded Check Valve .......... 52-608 1-1⁄2" inside and outside slip connections.
Low-Flow Flowmeters
1-1⁄4" Flowmeter ................................ 32-077 9 to 36 GPM (sch. 40), 8-40 GPM (sch. 80). Includes clamps and gaskets. 1⁄2" NPT In-Line Flowmeter .............32-078 .5 to 5 gallons per minute. Female threads. 1" NPT In-Line Flowmeter ...............32-079 1 to 10 gallons per minute. Female threads.
Ultraviolet Treatment Systems
Ultraviolet Treatment Systems
Aquionics offers two models of ultraviolet treatment systems; the UV Swim U and the UV Swim I. The treatment chamber of these units is fabricated out of high quality 316L stainless steel and
UV Swim U
UV Swim U is Aquionics’ new and improved generation of UV water treatment systems engineered for pools, spray pads, spas, and other aquatic applications. The UV Swim U has been tested to and meets the rigorous standards of NSF/ANSI Standard 50 2002. Because it’s from Aquionics, it builds on our exceptional heritage of products and is chosen by leading pool operators across the country. It’s an ideal system to use as an add-on to the existing facility or built-in during new construction. The UV Swim U gives you cleaner water by providing high level of disinfection but also is an ideal solution for chloramine re-
each model has been sized based on the most rigorous standards used today. A sensor installed on the treatment chamber provides continuous measurement of the ultraviolet intensity and ensures the system runs at peak efficiency. Process conditions are continuously monitored with both warnings and alarms provided as standard features. The UV Swim series has been designed for easy installation and minimum maintenance.
duction. Standard features include automatic wiping, over temperature protection, automatic dose control and power stepping. The UV Swim U is more efficient and environmentally friendly and offers better features than any range we’ve ever created
ramine reduction. Utilizing medium pressure lamps, the UV Swim I is an excellent solution where space is limited. Standard features include an automatic wiping system, over temperature protection, power stepping and real-time dose display.
Other Features
Both of these systems include a control unit that features a full suite of indicators, alarms and ability to display either UV intensity or dose utilizing a real time LCD display. The control unit is built to the highest electrical standard and is UL Approved. Each system has warnings and alarms for the unlikely event of a failure, including a lamp or sleeve failure. Systems are available in a wide range of sizes to accommodate all facility sizes. Maintenance is minimal and extremely simple. Typically the ultraviolet lamps are changed once per year and only take 5-10 minutes.
UV Swim I
The UV Swim I Series from Aquionics is now fully compliant with NSF/ANSI Standard 50 2012 Cryptosporidium Inactivation and the USEPA Disinfection Guidance manual (UVDGM). With seven units in the range, the UV Swim I has one of the largest validation envelopes available. Units can be sized for a few GPM up to 5,000 GPM to include both disinfection and chlo-
Why Use UV
The primary action of UV is to initiate photochemical and photo oxidation reactions which destroy chloramines, a range of compounds responsible for unpleasant smells in pools. This is particularly important for indoor pools where features such as water slides and waves give a greater surface area for the release of chloramines into the air. UV reduces the chloramines burden, making the atmosphere safer and more pleasant. UV has an important secondary action; it kills bacteria, viruses and mold spores, thus reducing the risk of transmission of stomach, skin and respiratory tract infections to bathers.
Third Party Validated
(K-2000) Starter Test Kit ................ 56-184
This Starter (high range) test kit features .75 oz. liquid reagents, a color comparator, waterproof instructions, chemistry guide, and treatment charts. Tests for free and total chlorine (1-10 ppm), bromine (2-20 ppm), pH (7.0-8.0), acid and base demand. (K-2100) Starter™ Test Kit ................ 56-183
Same features and tests as 56-184, except free and total chlorine (.25-2.5 ppm), bromine (.5-5 ppm).
(K-2015) Test 4™ Test Kit ................. 56-210
This test kit has all the same features and tests as the 56-184. Tests for free and total chlorine (1-10 ppm), bromine (2-20 ppm), pH (7.0-8.0), acid and base demand, total alkalinity.
(K-1741C) Prof. Complete Test Kit . 56-300
This Professional Complete test kit features 2 oz. liquid reagents, a liquid-to liquid slide comparator with 9 color standards, reagents color-coded to waterproof instructions, treatment charts, chemistry guide, Watergram®, attaché-style case with room to add more tests. Tests for free and total chlorine (0-3.0 ppm and 1.0-10 ppm), pH (6.8-8.4), acid and base demand, calcium and total hardness, total alkalinity, cyanuric acid, copper and iron.
(K-2005) Complete™ Test Kit .......... 56-192
This complete (high range) test kit features .75 oz liquid reagents, a color comparator, waterproof instructions and treatment charts, chemistry guide and Watergram® Tests for free and total chlorine (1-10 ppm), bromine (2-20 ppm), pH (7.0-8.0), acid and base demand, total alkalinity, calcium hardness and cyanuric acid.
(K-2005-Salt) Complete™ Test Kit .. 56-201
Same as 56-192, except also includes a test for salt. NSF Listed (K-2105) Complete™ Test Kit ........... 56-193
Same as 56-192, except free and total chlorine (.25-2.5 ppm), bromine (.5-5 ppm).
(K-2005C) Service Complete™ Kit .. 56-194
Same as 56-192, except features 2 oz. reagents and larger carrying case. NSF Listed (K-2105C) Service Complete™ Kit ... 56-195
Same as 56-193, except features 2 oz. reagents and larger carrying case.
(K-2006) Complete™ Test Kit
56-204
This (high range) test kit uses the 9058 comparator and the sanitizer tests are titrations for improved accuracy. This kit features .75 oz. liquid reagents, a color comparator, waterproof instructions and treatment charts, chemistry guide and Watergram.® Tests for free and combined chlorine (1 drop = 0.2 or 0.5 ppm), pH (7.08.0), acid and base demand, total alkalinity, calcium hardness and cyanuric acid.
(K-2006-Salt) Complete™ Test Kit . 56-205
Same as 56-204, except includes a test for salt. NSF Listed.
(K-2006C) Service Complete™ Test Kit.............................................. 56-225
Same as 56-204, except features 2 oz. reagents and larger carrying case. NSF Listed.
(K-2106) Complete™ Test Kit
(K-1765) Commercial™ Test Kit
56-190
This DPD commercial (low range) test kit uses chlorine and pH slides to test for free and total chlorine (0-3.0 ppm) and pH (6.8-8.4).
(K-1765H) Commercial™ Test Kit ....
56-214
Same as 56-190, except free and total chlorine (1.0-10 ppm).
(K-2009) Pool Inspector™ Test Kit ... 56-237
This FAS-DPD (high range) Pool Inspector test kit measures free and combined chlorine (1 drop = 0.2 or 0.5 ppm), pH (7.08.0) and cyanuric acid (includes four extra bottles of CYA reagent).
(K-2007) Pool Inspector™ Kit ......... 56-239
This DPD (high range) Pool Inspector test kit uses a color comparator to measure free and total chlorine (1-10 ppm), bromine (2-20 ppm), pH (7.0-8.0) and cyanuric acid (includes four extra bottles of CYA reagent).
(K-2007C) Pool Inspector™ Kit ....... 56-240
Same as 56-239, except features 2 oz. reagents and larger carrying case. NSF Listed.
56-235
Same as 56-204, except tests for bromine (1 drop = 0.5 ppm or 1.25 ppm). No test for CYA.
Taylor ® Replacement Reagents
Taylor Replacement Reagents
NOTE: Note: All reagents have a shelf life, whether they are liquids, powders, crystals, tablets, or test-strip pads. If kept dry, powders and crystals are very stable; acids are also long lived. Date of manufacture is not the controlling factor when it comes to shelf life—storage conditions are more important. As with all perishables, reagents are sensitive to environmental influences and will last longer under controlled conditions. We recommend storing reagents at a consistent temperature in the range if 36°–85°F (2°–29°C). Keeping them out of prolonged direct sunlight. Replacing caps immediately and tightening them carefully so that exposure to air and humidity is limited. As a general precaution, replace all reagents more than one year old, or at the beginning of a new testing season.
Comparator Blocks for 2000™ Series (High Range) Comparator Block.... P9056
Used for test kits: 56-184, 56-210, 56-192, 56-194, 56-201, 56-239, 56-240 (Low Range) Comparator Block ......P9057
Used for test kits: 56-183, 56-211, 56-193, 56-195 P9056
(K-1106) Phosphate Test Kit ............ 57-619
Phosphate is a primary food source for algae, so it’s extremely important to monitor this parameter. The color comparison test can detect phosphate from 0-6,000 ppb.
(K-1766) Salt Test Kit
56-361
This test kit contains a drop test (1 drop = 200 ppm) for measuring salt (sodium chloride) in pools that use salt water chlorine generators.
(K-1518) Monopersulfate Kit ........... 56-218
Developed in concert with Dupont, this drop test measures free and combined chlorine accurately in the presence of potassium monopersulfate oxidizing shocks.
(K-1738) Copper Test Kit 56-252
Measures total copper concentrations (0.2-3.0 ppm) using a Midget™ comparator.
(K-1579) Chlorine Bleach Kit
When you buy bleach solutions in bulk, test to be sure you’re getting the full strength you’re paying for using the drop test (1 drop = 10 or 100 ppm) in this kit.
Allows direct reading of pH from 0.01 to 14.00 pH in 0.01 increments. Temperature can be measured from 34° to 149°F. Can store up to 15 readings. The PockeTester has an extra bold display that includes an analog bar graph feature.
pH/ORP PockeTester™ Kit ............... 56-774
Measure pH 0.01 to 14.00 and ORP -999 to +999 mV with interchangeable flat surface sensors. The meter identifies which sensor probe is in use and retains its calibrations. Can store up to 15 readings. Features an extra bold display that includes an analog bar graph feature and pH mode also displays temperature. All the items are packaged in a rugged carrying case.
ORP Tracer PockeTester™ 56-772
Measures oxidation reduction potential from -999 to +999 mV with a 1 mV resolution using a flat surface sensor. Convenient for quick checks of active sanitizers. Can store up to 15 readings. The PockeTester has an extra bold display that includes an analog bar graph feature.
Salt/TDS/Temp PockeTester™ ........ 56-776
The Salt PockeTester™ measures the Sodium Chloride level in salt water pools with a range from 0 to 9,999 ppm. TDS is measured from 0 to 9,999 ppm and Temperature from 34° to 149°F. A memory feature saves up to 25 test results.
Salt/TDS/Temp PockeTester™ Kit ... 56-778
Measures the Sodium Chloride level in salt water pools with a range from 0 to 9,999 ppm. TDS is measured from 0 to 9,999 ppm and Temperature from 34° to 149°F. A memory feature saves up to 25 test results. The PockeTester is packaged in a rugged carrying case with a special calibration standard.
Tracer PockeTesters™
LaMotte Test Kits and Reagents
Pool Manager Series
The Pool Manager series includes diagrammed instructions, saturation index, calculator, water quality handbook, case, and the precise octa-slide comparator system. All in a tough, blow molded carrying case. Kit is supplied with sufficient tablets for 50 tests on free chlorine, total chlorine and pH. Tablet reagents for 20 tests are provided for alkalinity, hardness, acid demand and cyanuric acid.
Pool Manager Tablet Test Kit ......... 56-176 (0.2-3.0 Chlorine)
Pool Manager Tablet Test Kit ......... 56-173 (.5-10.0 Chlorine)
Pool Manager Tablet Test Kit (Bromine).56-177 (.5-10.0 Bromine)
DipCell Series
The DipCell comparator is simple to use. Just dip the comparator in the water to get a sample, add reagents, cap, mix, read chlorine and pH immediately. Six color standards are provided for wide range chlorine from 0.5-10.0 ppm. The six standards include for pH range from 6.8–8.2. Kit also tests for total alkalinity, calcium hardness, acid demand, base demand and cyanuric acid.
DipCell Pool Test Kit ......................... 56-181
PRO 250 Series
Each unit features liquid reagent systems for chlorine, pH, total alkalinity, calcium hardness, acid demand, base demand, cyanuric acid, copper and iron. Kit includes two octo-slide color bars with eight translucent color standards, color coded caps, diagrammed instructions, handbook, and saturation index calculator.
PRO 250 Test Kit ......................... 56-182.H (0.5-10.0 Chlorine)
LaMotte Test Kits, Spin Lab and Test Strips
ColorQ 2x Pro 7 Kit
This hand held photometer directly measures Free Chlorine (DPD), Total Chlorine (DPD), Bromine (DPD), pH, Alkalinity, Calcium Hardness and Cyanuric Acid (Stabilizer) directly on a digital display using both liquid reagents and Testabs® Includes enough liquid reagents to measure 144 tests per test factor as well as 100 tablets for each Testabs® test. This test kit eliminates the need to visually determine slight color variations, thus taking the guesswork out of poolside water analysis. The photometer, testing reagents and photodiagrammatic trilingual instructions (English, Spanish, French) are packaged in a convenient carrying case for on-site testing.
ColorQ 2x Pro 7 Kit ..........................56-793
ColorQ 2x Pro 7-Plus Kit
This waterproof, Bluetooth® handheld photometer directly measures Free Chlorine (DPD), Total Chlorine (DPD), Bromine (DPD), pH, Alkalinity, Calcium Hardness, and Cyanuric Acid directly on a digital display using both liquid reagents and Testtabs®. The handheld meter is easy to use and includes liquid reagents that measure 288 tests per 60 mL size bottle for Free Chlorine, Total Chlorine (Bromine) and pH. The Alkalinity, Calcium Hardness and Cyanuric Acid test is measured by using one TesTabs® tablet per test with 100 tablets included with the kit. The photometer, pool manager handbook, saturation index calculator, testing reagents, and trilingual instructions are packaged in a rugged blow molded carrying case for onsite testing.
ColorQ 2x Pro 7-Plus Kit .................56-794
ColorQ 2x Pro 9-Plus Kit
This waterproof, Bluetooth® photometer directly measures nine tests that include Free Chlorine (DPD), Total Chlorine (DPD), Bromine (DPD), pH, Alkalinity, Calcium Hardness, Cyanuric Acid, Copper and Iron directly on a digital display using both liquid reagents and TesTab®. This test kit eliminates the need to visually determine slight color variations or use look-up tables, thus taking the guesswork out of poolside water analysis. The photometer, pool manager handbook, saturation index calculator, trilingual instructions (English, Spanish, French) and reagents are packaged in a rugged carrying case for on-site testing.
ColorQ 2x Pro 9-Plus Kit .................56-795
ColorQ 2x TesTabs® Pro 7 Kit
This waterproof, Bluetooth® handheld photometer directly measures seven tests which includes Free Chlorine (DPD), Total Chlorine (DPD), Bromine (DPD), pH, Alkalinity, Calcium Hardness and Cyanuric Acid. The photometer is easy to use and includes 100 TesTabs® tablet reagents per test factor packaged in blister-style foil. The user dispenses each tablet into a test tube by pressing the tablet through the foil. This eliminates the need to manually tear open a foil packet and carefully dispense the tablet. The photometer, testing reagents and photo-diagrammatic multilingual instructions (English, Spanish, French) are packaged in a convenient carrying case.
ColorQ 2x TesTabs® Pro 7 Kit ......... 56-797
WaterLink® Spin Touch™
The Mobile WaterLink® Spin Touch™ is a simple-to-use, portable photometer designed for commercial pools. This photometer can communicate through Bluetooth® with smartphone or tablet device or can be used as a standalone device with results shown on the touch screen. Pool or spa water is added into a unique WaterLink® Spin reagent disk (disks sold separately), then the disk is placed into the WaterLink® Spin Touch™ photometer. In just 60 seconds all of the tests are completed.
The Mobile WaterLink® Spin Touch™ lab includes a photometer, USB cable/wall adaptor to charge the internal battery, disk shield, meter check disk, three syringes, and instruction manual packaged in a durable, waterproof carrying case.
The Insta-TEST 5 Plus pool & spa strip measures free chlorine (010 ppm), bromine (0-20 ppm), total chlorine (0–10 ppm), total alkalinity (0240 ppm), pH (6.2-9.0) and total hardness (0800 ppm). This test strip is a dip-n-read strip with instant results.
Insta-TEST Plus 5
Test Strips
56-750
Contents: 50 strips per bottle
Palintest Pool and Spa Test Systems
Lumiso Pooltest Expert
Lumiso Pooltest Expert Photometer featuring large touchscreen and USB connectivity. Supplied in hard carry case with all equipment needed with a reagent starter pack including: DPD XF, DPD XT, pH Phenol Red, Alkaphot, Cyanuric Acid, Coppercol, Calcicol, Iron MR, Phosphate LR and DPD Oxy Stop.
Lumiso Pooltest Expert .................. 56-930
Lumiso Pooltest Expert Check Standards
Neutral Density Filter, Verification Standards for Lumiso Pooltest Expert Photometer. One blank and one standard in specially designed holders will check all wavelengths. Supplied in hard case with certificate.
Lumiso Expert Check Standards 56-931
Lumiso 6 Pooltest Photometer Kit
The Lumiso Pooltest 6 enables a complete water balance calculation, with tests for alkalinity, bromine, calcium hardness, chlorine, cyanuric acid and pH. This kit includes a highly accurate electronic pool tester with USB connectivity to enable data management and compliance. The Pooltest 6 is packaged in a custom case, inclusive of all necessary reagents and accessories. With space for additional items including spare test tubes and check standards.
Lumiso 6 Pooltest Photometer Kit 56-928
Includes (5) test tubes, 450 reagents, (4) crushing rods, test tube brush and USB cable.
Lumiso 3 Pooltest Photometer Kit
The Lumiso Pooltest 3 combines testing for chlorine, pH and cyanuric acid, for reliable assessments of water quality. This kit includes a highly accurate electronic pool tester with USB connectivity to enable data management and compliance. The Pooltest 3 is packaged in a custom case, inclusive of all necessary reagents and accessories. With space for additional items including spare test tubes and check standards.
Lumiso 3 Pooltest Photometer Kit . 56-927
Includes (5) test tubes, 350 reagents, (4) crushing rods, test tube brush and USB cable.
Replacement Accessories
and 25
Raypak® Hi Delta Commercial Pool Heaters
Hi Delta has a patented burner with an innovative design that provides an optimized air-gas pathway for complete combustion, making the Hi Delta the most adaptable sealed-combustion heater on the market. Onboard VERSA IC control and Safety certified for indoor/outdoor installation, is direct vent capable, and comes standard with an outdoor intake air cover. 83.1% efficiency – reduce operating costs and heat your pool or spa water quicker. Low NOx certified. Available in 11 sizes and in natural or propane gas. Heater purchase includes factory certified start-up inspection and support.
Raypak® MVB Commercial Pool Heaters
MVB pool heater provides installation flexibility, ease-of-commissioning, reliability, and long-term performance. The vertical design allows for the MVB’s small footprint, making it the perfect solution for small spaces and retrofit projects. Easily control with the 7" touchscreen display. Raymote connectivity enables real time
service notifications to keep you informed, allows you to view and manage your Raypak systems at multiple sites, and provides instant visibility to historical data and performance reports. Safety certified for indoor/outdoor installation. Up to 83.3% efficiency. Low NOx certified. Available in 5 sizes in natural or propane gas. Heater purchase includes factory startup, inspection and support.
Raypak® MVB ® Commercial Pool Heaters
Note: Add a .P to the catalog number for propane models. Gas Conn. Differ.
Commercial Pool Heaters
Ultra High-Efficiency Pool Heaters
Raypak XTherm Commercial Heater
Never before has a vertical heater provided both the installer and pool builder such installation flexibility, ease-of-commissioning, reliability and long-term performance. The XTherm has one of the smallest installed footprints of any vertical condensing heater. The compact design makes it the perfect choice for those hard to reach retrofit projects.
Raypak’s XTherm is built with commercial-grade components and materials. From the steel channel base to the stainless steel flue wrapper, and condensing
heat exchanger, you can tell the XTherm is built to last.
Category IV – CSA-certified 97% efficiency at full fire for water heaters in pool applications. The XTherm can use either AL29-4C stainless steel, PVC or CPVC for venting. Just specify the D-32 vent option when using PVC vent.
Raypak Xtherm® Commercial Pool Heaters
Comes standard with on-board diagnostic center, real English, no codes. All models are certified for both indoor and outdoor applications. Meets all current Low NOx regulations. Suitable for altitudes up to 10,000 ft/ (derate above 5,000 ft). Equipped with cupro-nickel, copper, bronze and stainless steel waterways. Factory installation inspection, start-up and owner training are all included in the purchase price. High Efficiency Heater
Clearances (Inches) for 60-600, 60-602 and 60-604
Raypak Xtherm® Heater Options
• Primary Heat ExchangerASME Cupro-nickel Tubes and Brass Headers
• Condensing Heat Exchanger - High grade Stainless Steel
• Small Footprint
• Direct Vent Capability
Raypak® X94 Professional High Efficiency Gas Heater (ASME)
This heater is specifically designed for semi-commercial applications. The unique cabinet shape allows for close nesting on multi-unit installations, The X94 features stainless steel ASME heat exchanger, sealed combustion, direct vent and digital controls that allow it to control the system pump and 3-way valves. The X94 is rated at 94% efficiency.
Warranty
Comes standard with a 3-year parts and labor warranty.
Commercial Pool Heaters
Raypak® Professional Indirect Commercial Pool Heaters
The Professional Indirect powered by XTherm is Corrosion Resistant and can be built with cupronickel or titanium indirect heat exchanger. Easy to Install – Factory plumbed and tested skid mount saves time/money on installation and commissioning. Easily control with the 7" touchscreen display. Raymote connectivity enables real time service notifications to keep you informed, allows you to view and manage your Raypak systems at multiple sites, and provides instant visibility to historical data and performance reports. Up to 96% efficiency – reduce operating costs and heat your pool or spa water quicker. Low NOx certified. Available in 3 sizes and natural or propane gas. Propane gas connection sizes are different from natural gas connection sizes. Heater purchase includes factory start-up, inspection and support.
Raypak Xtherm® Indirect Heaters - Cupro Nickel
Raypak Xtherm® Indirect Heaters - Titanium
Note: Add a .P to the catalog number for propane models. Gas Conn. Size Differs.
Raypak® X94 Professional Series Commercial Heaters
Multiple Venting Options
The X94 Professional offers several different venting options. The unit can be installed with a 4" PVC, CPVC, polypro or stainless steel flue vent. The heater is equipped with a multiport vent adapter so no extra parts are required. The heater can also be installed with 4" PVC or metal pipe duct to bring fresh combustion air from outside the equipment room.
Multiple Plumbing Options
Provides for 4 possible water connection configurations.
Super-Austenitic Stainless Steel Heat Engine
The heat engine on the X94 is made from AL-6XN® Alloy Stainless Steel. AL-6XN® alloy is used primarily in condensers and heat exchangers on offshore oil platforms and power plants. This special alloy blend is far superior in strength, pitting and corrosion resistance that other types of stainless. The X94 is built specifically for the most rigorous environments including salt chlorine generated pools.
Heat Exchanger
The X94 is the first gas-fired heater that features a stainless steel heat exchanger designed specifically for pool heating. Excellent for salt chlorine generated pool. Flow Switch, T&P Gauges and PRV Valve These heaters ship complete with a flow switch, pressure relief valve and temperature/pressure gauge.
Heater Options
Commercial Pool Heaters
Raypak® Digital Pool Heater (ASME)
This heater is specifically designed for semi-commercial applications. The unique cabinet shape allows for close nesting on multi-unit installations. The X94 features stainless steel ASME heat exchanger, sealed combustion, direct vent and digital controls that allows it to control the system pump and 3-way valves. The X94 is rated at 94% efficiency.
Warranty Comes standard with a 3-year parts and labor warranty. (For 60-400, -408, -402, -412) Power Vent (240-Volt Only)............60-457
Shipping Weight: 38 lbs.
Pentair ETi™ 400 High Efficiency Heater
The ETi 400,000 BTU natural gas pool and spa heater features corrosion resistant, TitanTough Direct-Fire Titanium, ASME certified heat exchanger. This heater features 96% thermal efficiency. The Eti™ 400 heater is certified for ultra low NOx emission and operates at an ultra quite noise level.
Easy category IV venting with air intake up to 120' with 4" PVC and 300’ with 6" PVC pipe. Is rated for both indoor and outdoor installation.
Convenient installation featuring a rotatable front door that allows the control pad to be rotated 180 degrees which allow
the heater to be plumbed on the right or left-hand side. Convenient front and rear gas connection capability. Unit is built standard for natural gas applications. A gas conversion kit can be purchased for propane applications.
ETi™ 400 High Efficiency Heater... 60-680 400,000 BTU (Natural Gas
Shipping Weight: 365 lbs.
Direct Air Intake Kit ......................... 60-215 (For Indoor Applications.)
Five EnergyRite models are available; from 150,000 Btu/hr to 399,000 Btu/ hr. Lochinvar’s engineering delivers the highest thermal efficiency in its class. Also available for use with propane gas at elevations from 6,000 to 9,000 feet.
Service-Friendly Control System –
Fingertip setup, temperature adjustment and troubleshooting featuring 2-line, 16-character display in words instead of confusing codes.
Commercial-Grade Heat Exchanger –Highly efficient copper-finned tube design, time-proven in Lochinvar commercial water heaters and boilers*.
– Advanced heat exchanger design with no O-rings, virtually eliminates leaks and failures.
– ASME certified cast iron headers with slip-fit or threaded connections.
Advanced Combustion System –
Direct-spark ignition for superior reliability and efficiency as well as high-efficiency stainless steel burners.
Built-in Floor Shield –
Be confident installing on combustible flooring; there’s no need to purchase a separate kit.
These horizontal chassis, fan-assisted, copper-finned tube pool heaters yield up to 85% thermal efficiency. Copper-Fin² achieves this efficiency through the combination of an advanced fan assisted combustion system and a gasketless heat exchanger. The sealed combustion design of the Copper-Fin² eliminates external heat losses, this means the energy dollars heat the water, not the mechanical room. The Copper-Fin² offers eight venting options to meet the most challenging installation requirements. The SMART SYSTEM is an advanced, state of the art integrated operating control. With up to four stages of individual operation, the SMART SYSTEM control can reduce the firing rate down to approximately 25% BTU/HR input. This simple but effective design matches the pool heater’s firing capacity to the heat loss of the pool or spa. All Copper-Fin² pool heaters are equipped with an automatic pumped bypass ensuring proper flow and return water temperatures to the heat exchanger. These heaters require mandatory factory authorized start-up supervision (not included in base price).
Commercial Pool Heaters
The AQUAS commercial pool package is a factory assembled system featuring a free-standing boiler piped to a dedicated titanium pool heat exchanger. By separating the pool water from the direct-fired heat source, AQUAS reduces maintenance and promotes longer equipment life.
The heat exchanger is sized to maximize the heat transfer of the boiler water to the pool water flowing through the heat exchanger with up to 98% thermal efficiency. Low return water temperature from a pool makes for an ideal application.
CE Series (12kw-18kw)
These pool and spa heaters feature a flow switch to prevent operation when there is no water flow. An all stainless steel tank for long life and corrosion resistance is also standard. Available in single phase and three phase configurations. Accommodates flow rates of from 20 to 80 GPM.
CPH Series (24kw-30kw)
Along with the same features as the 12-18kw heaters, the 24-30kw heaters now include a digital thermostat for more precise control of pool water temperature. Accommodates flow rates of from 20 to 80 GPM.
AQUAS also offers users the innovative SMART SYSTEM control allowing for unequaled control and monitoring functions such as pump control, cascading of up to 8 AQUAS packages and much more.
Additionally, AQUAS offers multiple venting options and tremendous flexibility for placement of units within the building, because it permits direct-vent air intake and exhaust runs up to 100 equivalent feet using either PVC, CPVC, polypropylene or AL29-4C stainless steel vent pipe. Intake and exhaust runs can terminate horizontally through a sidewall or vertically through the roof. Call our sales consultants for additional information and pricing.
PHS Series (36kw-57kw)
Along with the same features as the 12-18kw heaters, the 36-57kw heaters now include a digital thermostat for more precise control of pool water temperature. Accommodates flow rates of from 20 to 80 GPM.
VERY IMPORTANT
These heaters are not warranted for salt water application. New heaters specifically designed for salt water pools are available upon request.
C.S.A.
Weksler Industrial Thermometers
These top-quality industrial thermometers are approved for use by architects, engineers and consultants everywhere for use in swimming pool applications.
9" Adjustable Angle Thermometer
This thermometer may be adjusted for any desired angle while installation is being made. Thermometer case is made of molded Valox® with a clear acrylic window.
9" Adj. Angle Thermometer with 3-1⁄2" stem .................................32-700
(0-120° F), 11⁄4" – 18" NEF Swivel Nut
31⁄2" Brass Thermowell for Adjustable Angle Thermometer ........................ 32-730
Molded ABS tube body. Thermometer has Fº and Cº scale in sealed glass tube.
3' polyethylene cord. Weight: 6 oz.
Floating Thermometer .................... 56-122
Molded ABS tube body with flotation cap.
Cap has colorful design. .......... Weight: 8 oz.
Jumbo Thermometer ......................
56-124
Black body is 10-3⁄8" long by 2-7⁄8" wide with jumbo easy-to-read markings.
Dimensions: 12" long Weight: 8 oz. 10" Economy Thermometer............ 56-132
This 10" plastic thermometer includes a water pocket for sampling and cord.
Dimensions: 10" long Weight: 8 oz.
In-Line Dial Thermometer with 1/2" Brass Sweat Well ............. 56-130 Dimensions: 3" diameter with 2" stem, (50°-220°F)
In-Line Dial Thermometer with 3/4" Brass Sweat Well ............. 56-131
Dimensions: 3" diameter with 2" stem, (50°-220°F)
Skimmers Lids with Built-in Thermometers
Retrofit your pool with these unique skimmer lids that have a built-in thermometers.
Square Skimmer Lid ........................ 56-128 Fits Hayward Square Lid Skimmer.
Dimensions: 10" L x 10" W
Weight: 1 lb.
Round Skimmer Lid ......................... 56-129 Fits SwimQuip, Swimrite, Jacuzzi.
Dimensions: 9-7⁄8" diameter
Weight: 1 lb.
In-Line Dial Thermometer ...............
Dimensions: 3" diameter with 2" stem, 1⁄2" NPT (50°-220°F)
In-Line Dial Thermometer with Nylon Well ................................ 56-155
Dimensions: 3" diameter with 2" stem, 1⁄2" NPT (30°-130°F)
Commercial Swimming Pool Lights
Amerlites Pool Lights
Features a stainless steel shell, 83⁄8" prismatic tempered glass lens, and a stainless steel face ring. Available in four wattages, two voltages and with three different cord lengths. Niche sold separately.
IntelliBrite® Architectural Series Lights
These white lights deliver more dazzling and dynamic LED pool lighting experience using and improved optics provides a cleaner white light and reduces glare. Tempered glass convex lens allows a wider angle of light distribution. Stainless steel face ring adds a sleek finish and helps to prevent cracking and corrosion. Available in 26Watt (Equavalent to 300-W incandescent), 31-Watt (Equavalent to 500-W incandescent), 120-Volt, 12-volt and in several cord length options. These LED lights are 60% brighter and 50% more energy efficient.
PureWhite Pro® High Output LED Lamps
The commercial grade bright white (120Volt) LED lamps are available in in both cool white and warm white. Equivalent to a 500-Watt incandescent lamp. Convert all of your incandescent pool lights for increased energy savings and reduced maintenance cost. Compatible with Pentair Amerlite, Hayward Astrolite incandescent fixtures.
HO LED Lamp (Cool White) ............ 65-140
Includes silicone lens gasket for Amerlite fixtures.
Replacement Lens ........................... 65-180 8-5⁄8" dia. clear tempered glass lens. Replacement Gasket ....................... 65-181 Should be replaced every time the light is re-lamped.
IntelliBrite® 5G LED Lights
These white LED light underwater lights are equivalent to 500-watt of incandescent light. LED technology offers powerful illumination with a green benefit of using 86% less electricity of incandescent lights. Niche sold separately.
HO LED Lamp (Warm White) .......... 65-142 Includes silicone lens gasket for Amerlite fixtures.
These replacement LED lamps offer ultra-bright white LED illumination equivalent to a 400-watt incandescent bulb, but only use 10% of the electricity. Rated for up to 50,000 hours of use and carries a three-year limited warranty. Ships complete with a high-quality silicon gasket for the Amerlite light only. This gasket must be utilized for warranty to be valid. Hayward lights can use the Hayward gasket (sold separately).
Two models to choose from based on the original underwater light.
120-Volt PureWhite™2 LED Lamp ... 65-135 (Compatible with Amerlite 784 and Hayward SP058 Series Lights)
120-Volt PureWhite™2 LED Lamp 65-137 (Compatible with Sta-Rite/Swimquip™ Series 0508 lights). Includes a silicone gasket for the Swimquip light.
Hydrel 4426 Monochromatic LED Lights
The 4426 36 LED, 86-watt monochromatic wet niche mounted underwater swimming pool light provides optimized energy performance and superior lumen output (up to 10,985) This light features a cast bronze fixture housing with stainless steel face ring and twist-lock mounting. Temperature sensing low water cut-off is standard. All fixtures are tested at 10 PSI internal pressure while totally submerged in water. The 4426 monochromatic LED light will replace the 4425 and 4427 incandescent lights that have now been obsoleted due to DOE regulations. Light comes standard with wide flood distribution, convex linear spread lens and 35' of cord. Custom cord lengths are available up to 120'. Stainless niche sold separately.
Monochromatic 86-W LED Light.... 64-617
Available LED Colors: (30K Warm White .WW), (41K Cool White .CW), (53K Daylight White .DW), Red and Phosphor Converted Amber (.A), Blue (.B), Green (.G) and Red (.R).
Niche For 64-617 ............................ 64-522
Stainless steel with cast bronze mounting ring which locks the fixture in position. Niche has four ears to tie to forms or steel structural rods. Pressure grounding lugs on interior and exterior surfaces. Niche conduit entrance is ¾" NPT and is located in the upper portion of the niche rear. This niche is ONLY for the 64-617 monochromatic light.
NOTE: Wattage, Light Distribution options are available upon request. All orders for Hydrel lights are non-cancelable and non-returnable. All orders will require a signed light configuration cut-sheet.
Commercial Swimming Pool Lights
Hydrel Model 4426 DMX RGB LED Lights
The 4426 36 LED, 96-watt RGB LED array creates DMX controlled dynamic color. This wet niche mount underwater swimming pool light provides optimized energy performance and delivers 1,660 lumens. This light features a cast bronze fixture housing with stainless steel face ring and twist-lock mounting. Temperature sensing low water cut-off is standard. All fixtures are tested at 10 PSI internal pressure while totally submerged in water. Light comes standard with wide flood distribution, convex lens and 35' of cord. Custom cord lengths are available up to 120'. Stainless niche sold separately. DMX Color Changing LED Light .... 64-618 3-Channels (Red, Green, Blue). DMX console and DMX splitter sold separately. EZ™ Solo DMX Controller ............... 64-625 Stand alone entry-level controller enabling show creation and playback direction at a LCD touchscreen.
Start-Up for EZ Solo ....................... 64-626 (Pricing for start-up varies based on location) Stainless Steel Niche.......................64-576
This special stainless steel niche with cast bronze mounting ring provides conduit connections for both power and direct DMX signal. Niche conduit entrances are ¾” NPT and are located at the rear of the niche. This niche is ONLY for the 64-618 DMX RBG light
The 4426 light comes standard with 35' of #16/3ST submersible rated cord for standard 120VAC line. Cord entrance is epoxy encapsulated. Additional cord lengths must be specified. Sold per lineal foot in 5'-0" increments up to a total of 120'.
The underwater light is a wet nichemounted pool light with temperature-sensing low water cut-off. The lamp housing and face ring is fabricated from stainless steel. Lights come standard with 35' cord. Custom cord lengths are available. Stainless niche sold separately. Available LED Colors: 3000K (Warm White .WW), 4100K (Cool White .CW), 5300K (Daylight White .DW), Amber (.A), Blue (.B), Green (.G) and Red (.R)
The 4421C is a static white, wet niche, swimming pool fixture. The fixture will accentuate pools with breathtaking color temperatures, offering the latest LED innovations and advanced energy-saving technology. Light comes standard with bronze face ring, wide flood distribution, 40K color temperature, convex lens and 35’ of electrical cord. Stainless steel niche sold separately. Hydrel Model 4421 LED Light…….64-630 Niche For 64-630…….………………..64-575
Fountain Lights, Junction Boxes, Transformers and Pool Lights
PureWhite LED Underwater Fixture
These LED fixtures immediately and significantly reduce energy consumption by up to 80%. Will last up to 50,000 hours, which is 20 times longer than incandescent lights. Compatible with most Pentair®, Hayward®, Jandy® and Jacuzzi® niches.
NOTE: All Orders for Hydrel Lights are non-cancelable and non-returnable.
Hydrel Model 4800BM (LED)
The 4800 series base-mounted fountain fixture features a stainless steel housing, cast bronze rock guard, yoke and base assembly. Includes a 9-watt LED lamp that delivers 554 lumens (medium flood distribution). Available in 12 or 120-volt. Transformer is NOT included on 12-volt versions and must be purchase separately. Specify desired LED colors (30K white, 41K white,
Safety Transformers
These Safety Transformers are specifically designed to supply 12 volts to pool/spa lights, submersible fixtures and outdoor garden lights. A grounded shield between the primary and secondary windings assures safe operation and the built-in circuit protection will disconnect power to the transformer in case of defect or overload.
Lexan Junction Boxes Dimensions: 6-1⁄2"
Flush Junction Boxes
53K white, Phosphor Converted Amber, Limited Wavelength Amber (590nm), Red, Green or Blue. Specify desired lens (clear convex, amber cones, blue convex, green convex, red convex, spread convex or frosted convex). Comes standard with 10' of cord. Additional cord lengths are available in 5' increments.
7-Watt LED BM Fixture (120-Volt) .... 64-455
53k White LED, Medium Flood, Convex Clear Lens, Base Mount, 10' Cord.
7-Watt LED BM Fixture (12-Volt)..... 64-457
53k White LED, Medium Flood, Convex Clear Lens, Base Mount, 10' Cord.
Additional Cord in 5' Increments .. 64-528
Note: longer cord lengths can cause voltage drops on 12-volt fixtures.
Hydrel Fountain Light Junction Boxes
The bronze junction boxes are designed for connection of supply cords from underwater lighting fixtures and service conduits. They feature heavy-wall cast bronze construction, silicone gaskets with integral grounding lugs. All conduit entry points must be tapped at the factory.
Base Mount
Replacement Lens Gasket ............... 65-181
8-3⁄8" Outside Diameter. Fits Pentair Amerlite® and IntelliBrite® lights.
Replacement Lens Gasket .............. 65-176
7-5⁄16" Outside Diameter. Fits Hayward SP0805 Series lights.
9-11⁄16" Wide x 8-11⁄16" Tall. Fits Hydrel Model 4426 and 4428 lights.
Replacement Lens Gasket .............. 65-165
8-9⁄16" Outside Diameter. Fits Hydrel Model 4423, 4425 and 4427 lights.
Replacement Grid Gasket............... 65-167
9-1⁄8” Outside Diameter. Fits Hydrel Model 4427 light.
Replacement Grid Gasket 65-171
8-3⁄8” Outside Diameter. Fits Hydrel Model 4423 and 4425 lights.
NOTE: All light gaskets should be replaced every time the light is re-lamped or serviced.
Replacement Gaskets and Lamps
Recreonics Lamp Reference Chart
Base Types
Flooring
Dri-Dek™ Flooring System
Ideal for around pools or spas. Works well with wheeled traffic. Dri-Dek quickly snaps together to fit anywhere It easily trims to fit wall-to-wall or around equipment.
No more puddles. No more wet floors. No more germs. Now there’s Dri-Dek. The perfect solution for showers, steam rooms, dressing areas and locker rooms. Any place that gets wet.
Why? Because Dri-Dek’s textured surface not only drains water. Its patented design lifts you above wet floors too. And it comes in 12 designer colors, so you can match any decor. Anywhere. Any time.
Pre-Cut Safety Strips
Combat slippery areas with our self-sticking Safety Strips. One side of each strip is a medium texture, diamond-hardmineral surface, and the other is a peel-and-stick adhesive. These strips are very easy to use, and are ready for traffic as soon as they are pressed into place. Standard color is black. Special colors are available in blue, green, brown or white.
Pre-Cut Flex-Tread Safety Strips
3/4" W x 24" L (50-piece box)
Marine
Weight: 2 lbs.
2"x12"Edge (Beveled Border) (77-881)
Blue (.PB)
2"x2"Corner (77-882) (Samples available upon Request)
2" W x 24" L (50-piece box) Marine Black.............................. 12-394.MB
Sheets ...............................
Flex-Tread Anti-Slip Rolls
Dimensions: 3' W x 4'
Dimensions: 12" x 2"
Shipping Weight: 4 lbs. (Minimum of 6)
Dimensions: 2" x 2"
Pool
Perfect for towelling-off areas. Changing rooms. Locker rooms.
PEM® Aquatic Matting
Reduce injury related risk and enhance your facility’s appearance with this new durable poly-extruded matting.
The textured surface of this matting provides sure footing that reduces slippage under wet conditions.
The porosity of the material allows moisture to flow through footing surface, eliminating standing water.
This aquatic matting includes anti-microbial guard which is a non-leachable biocide which guards against the growth of mildew, fungiand bacteria.
The soft PVC construction protects bare feet from splinters on surfaces such as bridges. Cleans easily with sweeping or washdown. Available in two thicknesses and four standard colors.
Entrap
This unique flooring material is designed to provide slip-resistant footing in barefoot traffic areas. Comfortable, attractive and durable, the all vinyl material allows water to run through its “z” construction, keeping it dry and safe.
Dimensions: 3' x 20' roll
Weight: 48 pounds
Blue (.B)
Gray (.G) Sandstone (.S)
Hunter Green (.HG) Lightweight
Flooring, Water Polo Floor Markings
Floorline® Matting
This slip resistant, low profile (1⁄4" thick) matting is certified to ASTM 1677 - providing excellent safety and comfort. Made from high quality open-grid, flexible PVC that is infused with anti-microbial and anti fungal additives - Floorline® is perfect for light to medium traffic areas, indoor and out.
For outdoor applications, Floorline provides a great thermal barrier that will keep bare feet cool during hot summer days. Cleaning is easy - just roll up the matting and clean the surface underneath. The matting itself can be cleaned with typical household cleaning products or pressure washing. Available in 33' long rolls in widths of 2' or 3' and colors of Blue (.B), Beige (.BG), Green (.G), and Red (.R) 1-Year Warranty.
2' W x 33' L Floorline ............... ……..77-625
Shipping Weight: 56 lbs.
3'W x 33' L Floorline ................ ……..77-627
Shipping Weight: 80 lbs.
Heronrib® Matting
For high-traffic areas, Heronrib® is a slip resistant (ASTM 1677), multi-directional drainage product that is comfortable underfoot. Made from flexible PVC with anti-microbial and anti-fungal additives. The matting can be loose laid over existing surfaces. The 4 way drainage design will channel water away from the mat - ensuring no pooling underneath. Heronrib® matting provides a great thermal barrier that will keep bare feet cool during hot summer days.
Cleaning is easy - simply roll up the matting and clean underneath. The matting itself can be cleaned with typical household cleaning products or pressure washing. Available in 33' long rolls in widths of 2', 3' or 4' and colors of Buff (.B), Charcoal Gray (.CG), Forest Green (.FG), Ocean Blue (.OB), and Oxford Blue (.OXB) 3-Year Warranty.
2' W x 33' L Heronrib™ ........... ………77-630
Shipping Weight: 75 lbs.
3' W x 33' L Heronrib™ ........... ………77-632
Shipping Weight: 111 lbs.
4' W x 33' L Heronrib™ ........... ………77-634
Shipping Weight: 146 lbs.
Heron Walk Safety Matting
This 3/8” thick self-draining mat makes spaces accessible for both wheelchair users and pedestrians, with cross-directional top ribs for extra traction and and embossed surface for comfort underfoot.
It’s one-piece construction means Heron Walk is easy to clean and maintain, and can be quickly rolled out where needed or cut to fit on site. This UV-resistant mat can be used indoors and outdoors. Two-tier construction provides a thermal barrier by elevating bare fee off of hot surfaces.
Available 2’, 3’, 4’ wide x 40’ or 50’ long roles in Black (.BLK) or Blue (.B)
2’ W x 40’ L Heron Walk……………..77-645
Shipping Weight: 101 lbs.
3’ W x 40’ L Heron Walk……………..77-646
Shipping Weight: 142 lbs.
4’ W x 40’ L Heron Walk……………..77-647
Shipping Weight: 189 lbs.
Weather-Resistant Outdoor Clock
These clocks operate in a wide range of climate conditions. The clock case is constructed of metal with a black wrinkle powder coated finish. The clock face is made of shatter-resistant plexiglass. Avail-able in 12", 15", 18" and 24" diameters with either UL electric or (1-”AA”) battery movement.
Battery Booster Plus ...................... 88-075
Changing batteries once a year costs valuable maintenance time. The Battery Booster can put an end to that and extend the battery life of your clocks up to 8 years. (Batteries not included.)
Universal Clock Guards
Features a hinged front door for easy access. For indoor or outdoor use.
Clock Guard for 12" Clock 88-077
Clock Guard for 15" Clock ............. 88-078
Clock Guard for 18" Clock ............. 88-079
Clock Guard for 24" Clock............. 88-080
Clocks, Thermometers,
Weather-Resistant
Cover
Clock sold separately.
Constructed of high-impact polycarbonate, this all weather resistant cover will add to the life of your clock.
12" Clock Cover................................ 88-081 16" Dia. x 8" Deep
Big Clock (Inside/Outside) 88-057 Requires (1) AA battery (not included). 12" Diameter Shipping Weight: 2 lbs.
Excellent quality elastic wristbands with all brass hardware. Any style checking tag may be attached. Complete with S-hook. Available in Red (.R), Blue (.B), Green (.G), White (.W), Black (.BK), Orange (.O), Black & White (.BKW), Blue & White (.BW), Red & White (.RW), Green & White (.GW), Orange & Black (.OBK), Orange & White (.OW)
Ideal for attaching locker keys to check pins or tags, or to replace lost S-hooks. Sold per 100 only.
Hand Talley Counter ...................... 80-365
For keeping accurate count of repeat events, numbers, or any activity where an accurate count is essential.
Dimensions: 2" x 2" Weight: 3 oz.
SUITMATE ® , Suit Wringer, Totemasters
SUITMATE®
The SUITMATE® swimsuit water extractor removes 95% of the water from a wet swimsuit in eight seconds, without heat. An ideal amenity for swimmers, facility staff and owners, it helps prevent water damage caused by dripping wet swimsuits. Constructed of stainless steel and durable plastic. Features easy installation.
Dimensions: 15" x 15" X 23" Tall
Shipping Weight: 64 Ibs.
SUITMATE® (115-Volt, 60 Hz) ...........77-451
SUITMATE® Select Custom Wrap
Introducing the SUITMATE® Select program from Extractor Corporation. SUITMATE® Select allows you to customize the case of your SUITMATE® Swimsuit Water Extractor. Whether you want your SUITMATE® unit to blend-in or stand-out – we’ve got you covered.
Show your team spirit by wrapping your SUITMATE® in your team logo or school colors. Or seamlessly blend your SUITMATE® Swimsuit Water Extractor into your environment by selecting a solid color or designer pattern of your choosing.
All the benefits of The Original SUITMATE® Swimsuit Water Extractor, personalized for your facility!
• Reduced maintenance costs
• Reduces slip hazards
• Easy installation
• Dedicated technical support
• Minimal power consumption
• Improves swimmer satisfaction
Suitmate® Select Cutom Wrap ....... 77-452
Suit Wringer
The tried and true suit wringer has proven over the years to be indispensable in a locker room. This model features a heavy, institutional quality steel frame, with rubber rollers that leave suits almost dry.
This all-purpose carrier with open top storage baskets is great for storing and organizing your swim training or aquatic exercise equipment. Includes rotating hangers which are great for hanging training bands. Available in Blue.
Dimensions: 48" L x 26" W x 54" H
Weight: 46 lbs
Totemaster™ Open Top 92-325
Totemaster Plus™
Great for storing and keeping your aquatic programming accessories secure. Costructed of 3⁄16" all-welded wire with 3" square mesh with divider to separate equipment. Features four heavy-duty swivel wheels and dual lockable hinge top (lock not included). No tools are required for assembly. Available in Royal Blue only.
Dimensions: 24" W x 60" L x 36" H
Weight: 70 lbs.
Totemaster Plus .............................. 92-322
Original Equipment
Totemaster™
Great for storing and keeping your aquatic programming accessories secure. Constructed of 3⁄16" all-welded wire with 3" square mesh. Features four heavy-duty swivel wheels and lockable hinge top (lock not included). No tools are required for assembly. Available in Royal Blue (.B)
Dimensions: 24" W x 36" L x 36" H
Weight: 48 lbs.
Equipment Totemaster.................... 92-310
Mini Totemaster™
Great for storing and keeping your aquatic programming accessories secure. Constructed of 3⁄16" all-welded wire with 3" square mesh. Features four heavy-duty swivel wheels and lockable hinge top (lock not included). No tools are required for assembly. Available in Royal Blue only.
Dimensions: 21" W x 21" L x 30" H
Weight: 48 lbs.
Mini Totemaster .............................. 92-320
Replacement casters (set of 4) for all three of the Totemaster™ units we offer.
High impact UV resistant ABS plastic with a rigid base. Ships assembled.
Exterior Dimensions: 33"w x 31"d x 74"h
Interior Dimensions: 28"w x 27"d x 64"h
Weight: 160 lbs.
Wall-Mounted Aluminum Benches
These sturdy and attractive wall-mounted benches are the perfect solution for aquatic facility seating requirements. This bench system consists of 10" wide non-skid aluminum planks and corrosion resistant aluminum under structure supports.
Planks come in 7'-6", 15', 21' and 27' lengths. Mounting hardware is NOT included.
Standard Powder Coating Colors
Powder-Coating is available for both the bench planks and supports. Add (.PC) to catalog number to indicate the powder-coating option. Specify desired color of both the plank and the supports from the color selection indicated above.
7'-6" Wall-Mounted Bench .............. 77-300
Shipping Weight: 20 Ibs.
15' Wall-Mounted Bench ................. 77-302
Shipping Weight: 40 Ibs.
21' Wall Mounted Bench ................. 77-304
Shipping Weight: 60 Ibs.
27' Wall Mounted Bench................. 77-306
Shipping Weight: 80 Ibs.
Fiberglass Stackable Benches
These all-weather, portable and ruggedly durable fiberglass benches are the perfect team seating solution. EasyRec athletic benches can handle any environmental conditions from the pool, field, gym or locker room. Light-weight and stackable construction makes these high-capacity benches ideal for quick set-up and compact storage. Manufactured as a single piece provides strong, stable seating with a weight capacity of 500lbs. The Indoor/ Outdoor marine-grade gelcoat is corrosion, moisture, UV and scratch resistant. Choose from a large selection of colors and then customize the benches with your team logo or sports graphics. No assembly required. 2-year limited manufacturer warranty.
x 15"W x 18"H:
weight: 33 lbs.
For custom graphics there is a minimum order of 6 units. Purchaser must provide digital log files.
Available Colors:
Traffic Red, Wine Red, Pure Orange, Golden Yellow, Traffic Yellow, Traffic Green, Fir Green, Light Blue, Signal Blue, Cobalt Blue, Terra Bown, Traffic Black, Iron Gray, Cool Gray, Silk Grey, Traffic White
Lane Line Storage Bench
This extremely durable and attractive storage bench is a must for all aquatic facilities. Each bench is constructed of tough, heavy-duty fiberglass panels, cast aluminum frames and heavy-duty hinges. Purchase the benches in series to accommodate your particular storage needs. These benches, when in series, can accommodate up to nine racing lanes having 4" diameter floats. These benches can also accommodate kickboards, hand paddles, vacuum hoses and many other items around the pool. Sits six people per bench.
92"L x 15 - 5⁄8"H x 15" D
Storage Boxes, Lockers and Shade Structures
Quality Fiberglass Storage Boxes
These storage boxes are constructed of 3⁄16" thick fiberglass with UV gel coat that offers unsurpassed strength and long-last-
ing beauty and protection. All hardware is stainless steel. Perfect for storage of swimming pool accessories and doubles as a bench. Available in white, tan or gray.
Boxes
Structures
Towel/Gym Locker Combo
This vertical fiberglass storage locker features both wet and dry compartments. Both sides of the locker have five shelves. Each shelf compartment has two vents. This locker, featuring long lasting fiberglass construction, is resistant to chlorine and has 43 square feet of storage space. Available in white, tan or gray.
Dimensions: 36" W x 24" D x 87" H (Outside dimensions). Wt. 185 lbs.
PERFECTSHADE™
These popular post-and-fabric shade structures are perfect for poolside shade. Includes a black powder-coated frame and a UV Shadecloth (95% UV Block) in your choice of Aquatic Blue (.AB), Brunswick Green (.BG), Cherry Red (.CR), Turquoise (.T) , and Yellow (.Y) . Designed to be installed on concrete pads using baseplates and anchoring bolts. When installed per specifications the structure exceeds ASCE 7-10 requirements for 115 mph wind gusts. Anchoring hardware is to be provided by others.
Installation Kit
88-260
Used when installing or removing the fabric top from the frame.
Aquatic Blue (.AB) Brunswick Green (.BG)
Turquoise (.T) Yellow (.Y)
Cherry Red (.CR)
Vinyl Panel Tilting Umbrella
These 6- 1⁄ 2' diameter umbrellas are made from tough, weather-resistant, nylon and vinyl laminate panels. Features a 2-piece 7-1⁄2' x 1-1⁄4" Dia. aluminum pole with tilt mechanism.
Available in Blue/White (.BW), Green/White (.GW), Red/White (.RW), Yellow/Red (12344.YR) and Yellow/White (12-344.YW).
Weight: 8 lbs.
Vinyl Tilting LIFEGUARD Umbrella
This 6- 1 ⁄ 2 ' diameter umbrella with LIFEGUARD imprinted on three panels is made from tough, weather-resistant, nylon and vinyl laminate panels. Features a 2-piece 7-1⁄2' x 1-1⁄4" Dia. aluminum pole with tilt mechanism.
LIFEGUARD Umbrella ..................... 12-349
Available in Blue (.B) and Red (.R)
Weight: 8 lbs.
Funbrella Classic
Funbrella serves a multitude of purposes, beautifully. Perfectly suited to settings where natural shade isn’t available. Shade while you decorate public and private areas.
Funbrella enhances pool sides, outdoor leisure areas and keeps recreational facilities operating in the heat of the day. Removable handle, hidden winch and safety pin are all safety features. Funbrella is a unique alternative to pavilions and gazebos and is built to perform year after year. (Specify color.)
Features heavy-walled, tubular aluminum extrusion, powder-coated frame with 5-year warranty. Virgin double-wrapped vinyl straps with ultraviolet stabilizers and weatherproof rivets. The nesting design allows for minimal storage when not in use. (26) powder coat and (31) vinyl strap colors to choose from.
Oasis Crossweave Series
Features heavy-walled, tubular aluminum extrusion, powder-coated frame with 5-year warranty. Virgin double-wrapped vinyl crossweaved straps with ultraviolet stabilizers and weatherproof rivets. The nesting design allows for minimal storage when not in use. (26) powder coat and (31) vinyl strap colors to choose from.
Scandia Sling Series
Features heavy-walled flat oval aluminum extrusion, powder-coated frame with 5-year warranty. The nesting design allows for minimal storage when not in use. (26) powder coat and numerous sling fabrics to choose from.
Width: 25" Height: 33" Weight: 19 lbs. Fiberglass Lid 88-120.L Weight: 8lbs. Cross-Weave Bin w/ Liner.............88-122.L This heavy-duty aluminum frame bin with cross-weaved vinyl strapping includes a 32-gallon plastic liner. (Lid Sold Separately)
Width: 23.75" Height: 33" Weight: 23 lbs.
Fiberglass Lid ................................ 88-120.L
Features fully-welded aluminum base with slate textured fiberglass top. Includes umbrella hole accommodates 1.5" dia. pole.
Height: 28" Dia of Table Top: 42"
Weight: 33 lbs.
18" Side Table ................................... 88-126
Features slate fiberglass top.
Height: 18.5" Dia. of Table Top: 18"
Weight: 7 lbs.
Features 6-rib textiline top and heavy-duty aluminum pole with manual crank mechanism. Does not tilt. Available in several colors shown below. Height: 90" Dia.: 90" Weight: 15 lbs.
Colors are shown as accurately as possible. Actual color may vary slightly from color chart shown.
Polypropylene Umbrella Base ....... 88-145
This umbrella base is constructed of polypropylene and is concrete filled. Base features and adjustable set screw for tightening pole to base. Available in white, black or dark brown. Dia. 16" Height: 6.5" Weight: 50 lbs.
Fiberglass Finishes
Colors are shown as accurately as possible. Actual color may vary slightly from color swatches above.
Resin Pool Deck Furniture
Bahia Resin Chaise Lounge
These stacking adjustable chaise lounges are specifically made for commercial use. Features reinforced slats and frame for extra support, the Bahia is rated to 300 lbs. Impervious to salt water and chlorine. Available in Sand (.S) and White (.W). Bahia Chaise Lounge ..................... 88-240
(Sold in Increments of 6 Only)
Dimensions: 75" L x 27" W x 12" T
Cushions for Bahia Lounge
These low maintenance cushions feature hood and velcro side ties that secure cushion from sliding off chaise. Made with quick-dry polyurethane foam. Available in Royal Blue (.RB), White (.W), Sky Blue (.SB), Sand (.S) and Aqua Marine (.AM)
Bahia Lounge Cushions .................. 88-241
(Sold in Increments of 6 Only)
Dimensions: 73" L x 23" W x 2.5" T
Bahia Resin Stacking Chair
This versatile lounger features an extra wide seat and back, along with spacious armrests. Impervious to salt water and chlorine. Includes a pull-out footrest for added comfort. Available in White (.W)
The traditionally styled Miami low-back chair is constructed of 100% polypropylene with UV protection. Resistant to sunlight, moisture and weathering. Available in Amazon Green (.AG), Sand (.S) and White (.W)
Miami Low-Back Chair………….....88-246
(Sold in Increments of 4)
Miami Low-Back Chair ................... 88-248
(Sold in Increments of 16)
Dims.: 31.75" Back-HT x 22.5" D x 21" W
Miami Low Table
This poolside table is made of 100% prime resin. Impervious to salt air and chlorine. Seats up to 6 people comfortably. Includes umbrella hole with cap. Available in Sand (.S) and White (.W)
This brand new chair is made using MPC high-grade polymer with a dramatic woodlike finish. Features exceptional lumbar support and oversized seat for maximum comfort.Available in Barn Blue (.BB) Barn Gray (.BG), Barn Red (.BR), French Taupe (.FT), and White (.W)
The heavy duty, stackable chair features a high-gloss finish. Constructed of 100% polypropylene with UV protection. Resistant to sunlight, moisture and weathering. Availabe in Amazon Green (.AG), Sand (.S) and White (.W)
Designed to resemble wood slats. Made of 100% UV stabilized prime resin. Available in Amazon Green (.AG), Bronze (.BZ), Charcoal (.C), Teakwood (.TW), and White (.W)
These umbrellas are made from marine grade acrylic fabric with a heavy-duty aluminum 1.5" dia. pole and replaceable fiberglass ribs. Features vent flap to release wind pressure. Umbrellas should always be lowered in windy conditions to avoid damage. Available in PacificBlue (.PB), Navy (.NY), ForrestGreen (.FG), Pistachio (.PI), Taupe (.TP), Turquoise (.TQ),Terra Cotta (.TC), Orange (.OR), Sky Blue (.SKB), Khaki (.KH), Canvas (.CV) and Linen (.LN) w Windmaster 9' Umbrella………….88-258
Dimensions: 9' Round x 76.5" T
Umbrellas , Recycled Plastic Furniture
Resin Umbrella Base
Made of 100% prime resin.Must be filled with water or sand. Available in Bronze (.BZ), Black (.BK) and White (.W)
Resin Umbrella Base ...................... 88-300
Dimensions: 21" Dia. x 13" Stem
Weight: 5 Lbs. (Empty)
Free-Standing Umbrella Base
This cement filled base is designed for free-standing umbrellas. Features resin cover and wheels. Available in Bronze (.BZ), Charcoal (.CH),Sand (.S) and White (.W)
Free-Standing Umbrella Base ....... 88-303
Dimensions: 24" Dia. x 16" Stem Height
Table Umbrella Base
Designed to hold a table umbrella. Molded anchor bolt holes secure the base to deck for extra stability. Order the optional 35 lb. ring for increased stability. Available in Bronze (.BZ), Black (.BK), Sand (.S) and White (.W)
Table Umbrella Base ....................... 88-301
Dimensions: 20" Dia. x 10" Stem Optional 35 Lb. Ring ...................... 88-302
Recycled Plastic Round Dining Table
These round, durable and attractive dining tables provide up to (4) seating positions. 37.5" Round Dining Table ............... 88-310
Dimensions: 37.5"L x 37.5"W x 29"H
Shipping Weight: 85 lbs. (Ships UPS – 2 Boxes)
Recycled Plastic Square Dining Table
These square, durable and attractive dining tables provide up to (4) seating positions.
36" Square Dining Table ................. 88-312
Dimensions: 36"L x 36"W x 29"H
Shipping Weight: 90 lbs. (Ships UPS – 2 Boxes)
Recycled Plastic Dining Chair
These dining chairs are available with and without arms. These chairs do not fold.
Dining Chair w/o Arms 88-315
Dimensions: 22"L x 18"W x 17"H
Shipping Weight: 28 lbs. (Ships UPS)
Dining Chair with Arms 88-316
Dimensions: 22"L x 26.25"W x 33"H
Shipping Weight: 32 lbs. (Ships UPS)
Recycled Plastic Furniture, Benches and Loungers
Recycled Plastic Arm Chair
88-321.W
Extremely comfortable and easy to clean chair. Ships partially assembled. Available in white, green, sand and cedar.
Dimensions: 25" L x 29" W x 37" H
Seat Height: 17"
Shipping Weight: 50 lbs.
47" Backless Bench .................... 88-322.W
Features contoured seating. Ships partially assembled. Available in white, green, sand and cedar.
Dimensions: 47" L x 19" W x 17" H
Shipping Weight: 60 lbs.
70" Backless Bench.................... 88-323.W
Features contoured seating. Ships partially assembled. Available in white, green, sand and cedar.
Dimensions: 70" L x 19" W x 17" H
Shipping Weight: 75 lbs.
24" Backless Bench
88-325.W
Features flat seating. Ships partially assembled. Available in white, green, sand and cedar
Dimensions: 24" L x 14" W x 17" H
Shipping Weight: 25 lbs.
47.5" Backless Bench
88-326.W
Features flat seating. Ships partially assembled. Available in white, green, sand and cedar.
Dimensions: 47.5" L x 14" W x 17" H
Shipping Weight: 45 lbs.
71.5" Backless Bench ..................
88-327.W
Features flat seating. Ships partially assembled. Available in white, green, sand and cedar.
Dimensions: 71.5" L x 14" W x 17" H
Shipping Weight: 70 lbs.
NOTE: Save by ordering in packs of (2)
Destination
Lounger
These beautifully designed loungers are ideal for heavy duty commercial use in water depths up to 12". Fabricated from high-quality RTM composite material with UV protection to resist fading. Easy to drain, remove and store when not in use. Available in Tan (.T), Gray (.G), Starry Night (.SN) and SeaShell (.SS) Add “2” to the end of the catalog number to purchase in packs of (2)
Destination Lounger....................... 88-305
Dimensions: 64" L x 22" W x 21-1/2" Back Height
Weight: Empty: 25 lbs.
Filled with water –
Add adventure to your aquatic area with a poolside climbing wall. Climbing increases fitness levels through development of strength, coordination, cardiovascular endurance and muscle endurance. It also provides participants with positive risk taking and creative problem solving.
Kersplash® is suited for indoor or outdoor use and is available in two panel styles. Kersplash Crystal Clear™ complements any aquatic center and offers visibility to areas behind the wall. Kersplash Color makes a bold visual statement with brightly colored panels. Both styles are made from UV- and chlorine-resistant materials and feature red, yellow and orange Groperz™ Hand Holds designed specifically for aquatic environments. The Kersplash frame is constructed of high-quality, 100% 304L US made stainless steel that resists rust and corrosion and is available in a variety of heights for differing pool depths.
The Kerplash® pool wall package includes Kersplash panels, Stainless Steel Structure, Groperz Hand Holds with stainless steel mounting hardware, Kersplash Rules & Guidelines Signs and Safety, Care and Maintenance Instructions. NOTE: A designated “drop zone” is recommended at the base of Kersplash to keep swimmers out of this area.
Kersplash® Pool Climbing Walls are modular and can be made to fit any space and deck configuration. The 4' panels attach to a stainless steel frame allowing you to customize the height and width of the wall to meet your needs. Kersplash requires a minimum footprint of 35" of deck space and 4' of clearance behind the wall for a walkway. It requires at least 5' to either side of your wall and 10' drop zone.
The facility pool depth and state and local codes determine the maximum height of the wall for each application.
Kersplash® Pool Climbing Wall Systems
Available in Clear, Translucent Blue, or Green Panels
Kersplash ® Challenger Climbing Wall
The Kersplash® Challenger pool climbing walls add sleek design elements and fun for all ages in both indoor and outdoor applications. Available in 2, 3, and 4 panel heights, they are modular to fit any space and deck configuration.
The Kersplash Challenger pool climbing wall is constructed of a powder-coated stainless steel frame and UV and chlorine resistant panels. The see-through panels eliminate any visual barrier on the deck and hold an attractive visual appeal and fun to any pool setting. Translucent blue or green panels are also available.
Features 8’, 12’, or 16’ climbing heights. Designed to last in harsh indoor and outdoor aquatic settings. Powder-coated stainless steel frame. Modular, scalable design. Custom logos and powder-coating options available.
The facility pool depth and state and local codes determine the maximum height of the wall for each application.
Water-Roll 4 ft .................................. 94-107
Kids and instructors alike love this product because it can be used in free swim to play an array of games and challenges. Instructors like it because kids can practice balancing while lying on their stomach, as well as practice diving into the water from a sitting position. The Water-Roll is made from high quality EVA foam. Colors may vary and assembly is not required.
Dims: 9" Dia. x 4' L
The Canoe 94-105
This EVA foam canoe can accommodate 1 to 2 children at the same time. It is a great tool in developing coordination and balance in the water. Two paddles included.
Dims.: 76" L x 26" W
(Must Ship Motor Freight)
Flat Water-Roll 4 ft. .......................... 94-109
A useful tool in aiding to develop equilibrium, this foam toy is multifunctional and can be used in free swim periods as well as in swim courses. A variation of the original water-roll, this model is an oval shape instead of perfectly round. Made to accommodate several children at the same time, the water-roll is manufactured from the high quality, vibrantly colored EVA foam. This foam toy will be enjoyed for years to come! Colors may vary and assembly is not required.
Dims: 5" T x 13-1⁄2" W x 4' L
Lounges, Pool Floats and Foam Toys
48" RiverRough™ Tube 94-095
This attractive tube is constructed of heavy-duty vinyl and features two sturdy vinyl handles.
Dimensions: 48" Diameter
Weight: 6 lbs.
Jumbo Island .................................. 94-093
This durable inflatable jumbo island is made from heavy-duty vinyl construction. Includes two drink holders, all-around grab line and sturdy vinyl handles.
Dimension: 84" diameter
Weight: 10 lbs.
Serenity Pool Floats
Soft, luxurious foam floats will not sink or deflate. Glossy vinyl coating resists sun, chlorine and salt water. These floats are durable and easy to clean. Features ripple texture that provides long lasting cooling and comfort. Available in Bahama Blue (.BB), Fierce Green (.FG) and Teal (.T)
Serenity Pool Float ......................... 94-069
Dim.: 25"W x 70"L x 1.5"T
Weight: 10 lbs.
94-090
This super comfortable float includes backrest, headrest, foot rest and cup holder. Easily folds for storage in mesh carry bag.
Dimensions: 55.5"L x 37.5"W x 16.5"H
Weight: 4 lbs.
................... 94-091
This is the best floating chair for chatting with friends in the pool, lake or ocean. Includes cup holder and mesh storage bag.
Dimensions: 38"L x 36"W x 15" Tall
Shipping Weight: 4 lbs.
Spring Float® Recliner
Spring Float® SunSeat™
Funny Floats and Pool Games
ReadyIn-StocktoShip!
Our unique Funny Floats are sure to make your facility more popular. Gone are the days when a pool had to be for swimming laps only! We’ve learned from the Europeans that FUN is what makes a swimming pool popular (and profitable!).
We’ve created a menagerie of shapes so you can offer a variety of floats to your patrons. There’s something for everyone — including adults and those hard-to-please teenagers.
Funny Floats are made from a specially designed, closed-cell EVA foam in bright, assorted colors. They are unaffected by pool water, ultra-violet rays—even roughand-tough kids. They measure a full 29"
x 45" and can support several children at one time for tremendous fun. Try them for active play or just floating around. Great for deck activities, too. Available in Blue (.B), Yellow (.Y) and Red (.R)
Dimensions: (average) 29" x 45" x 1"
Weight: 7 Ibs.
Chubby Plus ...................................... 94-112
The Blob ............................................ 94-122
The one, the only, the original rubber duckie!! — Straight from Recreonics to you. Perfect for the spa or pool. This little guy will keep you company no matter how long you stay in the water! Ideal for children or adults who are children at heart. This squishy friend makes watertime fun-time. Be sure to take the Recreonics Rubber Duckie along for your next swim. Recreonics Rubber Duckie ............. 94-150 Funny Floats (See below for various designs)
Dive Discs
Throw them in the pool and they drift their way to the bottom. Dive and catch them before they land or get them off the bottom. Discs are made of non-corrosive plastic with brightly colored numbers. Set includes 6 numbered discs.
Multiply pool fun with this set of 6 numbered “sticks” for diving and racing. Sticks are made of non-corrosive PVC tubing with soft vinyl end caps.
Giant Water Batons ....................... 94-025
Weight: 2 Ibs.
Recreonics Rubber Duckie
Dive Rings
These Dive Rings (6-1⁄2" diameter) are specially weighted to stand upright on the bottom of the pool. Divers pick up rings, scoring points for each one. Brightly colored for high visibility under water.
Great fun for kids, the eggs are made of a heavy plastic material with permanent numbered chips inside.
Rotten Egg Game (set of six)......... 94-028 Weight: 1 lb.
Water Noodles
Water Noodles are ideal buoyancy floats to assist in Aqua-Therapy, Water Fitness, and Swim Training Programs. They can wrap around the body leaving the arms free. Colors are based on available inventory.
Dimensions: 57" L x 2-3⁄4" D
Water Noodle ................................... 94-071
4" Dia. Big Boss Water Noodle
These extra-large noodles provide maximum buoyancy for exercise or fun in the sun. Colors are based on available inventory.
4" Dia. Big Boss Water Noodle ..... 94-000
Dimensions: 58" L x 4" D
Vortex Corkscrew Slide
Watch your facility attendance grow with the addition of these innovative corkscrew slides that combine big twisting fun with exceptional attention to safety. These slides provide a 19' water-filled corkscrew ride that drops nearly 8'-0" from start to finish. The flexibility of this slide is perfect for commercial applications. The high-volume water delivery system gives you up to 40 gallons of water per minute.
The enclosed roto-molded tube provides safe fun. The small footprint small price compared to other slides in its class offer big thrills without the big investment. These slides fully comply with the CPSC Safety Standard for Swimming Pool Slides (16 CFR 1207). These slides are available with both an open or closed flume design with either a ladder or a spiral staircase entry. Tube colors are Blue or Granite Gray. Overall height of slide is 10'-6". Weight limit is 325 lbs. Children under 48" in height must be supervised at all times when using the slide.
Vortex Full Tube Slide with Staircase Entry
Staircase Entry Side
Slide Footprints:
Full and Open Tube with Ladder Entry: 110" x 110"
Full Tube with Staircase Entry: 110" x 136"
Open Tube with Staircase Entry: 110" x 95"
Seal Waterslide
These portable slides are easily moved and designed to encourage excitement and introduce young children to the water environment. These slides feature a 24" O.D. polyethylene flume, non-skid 18" wide x 8" enclosed rise x 8" run aluminum stair treads with drains slots to prevent puddling.
Stainless-steel handrails with T-304 stainless steel hardware and a 15" x 18" textured aluminum safety deck. All aluminum components are coated with textured Aqua-Plast coating. Handrails and supports are powder-coated.
Large 6" diameter, retractable wheels attach to the stainless steel undercarriage which makes both slides easily moved (Minnow – 1 person, Seal – 2 people).
The water activation kit is sold as an option for the Minnow and comes standard on the Seal.
These are excellent slides for children ages 12 and under. (150 lb. weight limit.) Call for available colors for the flume, railings/supports, stairs and landings.
Seal Waterslide .................................97-127
Pool Water Depth Required: 4'-0" Min.
Splashdown Dimension: 12' x 20'
Centerline Run: 11'-0"
Required Footprint: 5' 0" x 14' 0"
Required Water Flow: 5 to 10 GPM
Weight: 475 lbs.
Minnow Waterslide
Vortex Half Flume Slide with Staircase Entry
40-Watt Megaphone ....................... 92-744
This rechargeable megaphone features handheld microphone, siren alarm mode, 10-Sec. memory record, volume control. Includes 8-volt, lead/acid rechargeable Battery. Up to 1,000 yard range.
NEW
Portable Self-Contained Air & Water Sound Systems
This complete Air & Underwater Sound System, which provides LOUD & CLEAR air and underwater sound in 25 yard pools. This powerful state-of-the-art system is proven for training high school and collegiate competitive swimmers, allowing coaching via wireless microphone, or music and beats via Bluetooth or digital media. This remarkable system holds many patents, and carries the distinction of being the first truly affordable performance system offered to the sport of Competitive Swimming. Bluetooth, dual 250 watt amplifiers, 10 inch woofer, 1 inch compression driver, rechargable batteries, 100V-250V global charger, wireless hand mic, SD/USB card reader & recorder, 2 channel mixer with combo mic/line inputs + 3.5mm input, separate volume control for air and underwater speaker. Includes underwater speaker and transformer box.
Portable Air & Water Sound System .. 92-719
Weight: (1) at 53 lbs. plus (1) at 23 lbs.
Megaphones and Underwater Speakers
50-Watt Megaphone .......................92-748
This megaphone features handheld microphone, siren modes, USB input for music, Aux input jack, and volume control. Requires (8) C-Batteries (Not Included). Up to 1,700 yard range.
In-Wall Underwater Speaker
This underwater loudspeaker has remained the most popular underwater speaker in the world since 1968, as it’s patented design is significantly louder and clearer than competing designs and products. This unique design (U.S. Patent #3,391,385) utilizes a dual-piston PVC overmolded aluminum enclosure as the sound transducer, offering true pistonic operation and low Q in a compact corrosion-free package. Coupled with a powerful 8-cylinder piezoelectric engine (with efficiencies approaching 60%), no other brand compares!
The in-wall underwater speaker kit includes niche, grille, 25V / 37.5W impedance / safety interface, support, and underwater speaker. Install one unit @ 6’ (1.83 m) water depth in each 20’ x 20’ (6.1 m x 6.1 m) section of new gunite pool constructions. Speaker depth may be reduced to 4 feet (1.22 meter) in shallow end only to fill in sound, with some reduction in bass / distribution. It is recommended that a 25-yard x 7 or 8 lane pool have (4) speakers and 50-meter pool have (8) speakers. Installation, bonding, and grounding by licensed electrician only per NEC 680 and IRC E4106.9.3. 1 @ 26 pounds / 13 IN x 13 IN x 22 IN. US CE 8518.29.0000, 8518.90.3000, 8504.31.4065. Cable Length: 50’ (Longer Cable Lenghts Available)
Personal Megaphone Mouthpiece .. 12-369 Make your mouthpiece sanitary, comfortable and colorful. Available in Blue (.B), Red (.R), White (.W) and Yellow (.Y). 92-711.N and 92-711.G
Underwater Speakers
Underwater speakers by University Sound are ideal for providing background music for synchronized or recreational swimming. Installed flush in an underwater niche covered by a protective grille in new pools. Easily adapted to existing pools. Totally encapsulated cycolac design will not leak water. Corrosion and electrolysis problems are eliminated.
University speakers offer:
• Omni-directional dispersion underwater
• An 8 ohms operating impedance
• Power capacity up to 30 watts
• Frequency response from 100-10,000 hertz
• Each speaker is supplied with 50' of 3-wire connector cable
This state-of-the art regulation size pool basketball set features your choice of a white poly or clear 30" x 44" backboard with 2' of overhang. The vinyl coated stainless steel rim easily adjusts anywhere from 2' to 6' above water level. Four-way-leveling systems accommodates sloped decks. The super-tough polyethylene base weighs 500 lbs. when filled with water. All hardware is powder-coated aluminum or stainless steel. Comes complete with regulation size, color matched ball. Three Year Warranty.
Splash & Slam .................................. 92-851
Splash & Slam (Clear Backboard) 92-851.C
Shipping Weight: 117 lbs. (Motor Freight Only)
Actual Base Dimensions:
Base 29-3⁄4" W x 35-1⁄2" L x 20-1⁄2" H
Splash & Slam Volleyball Conversion Kit
Convert your Splash & Slam into a volleyball game. The conversion kit includes (1) heavy-duty aluminum posts, 32' net with 40' extension rope and ball. Molded poly bases weigh 500 lbs. each when filled with water. Easy to set up and no tools required. Three year warranty.
The Splash & Shoot includes a compact 200 lbs. water-filled base, heavy duty 2-3⁄8" aluminum post, your choice of a white poly or clear 29" x 43" backboard with vinyl coated stainless steel rim, and regulation size color matched ball. Features variable height adjustment up to 49".
All stainless steel hardware. Great for salt system pools. Three year warranty.
Splash & Shoot 92-848
Splash & Shoot Clear Backboard92-848.C
Shipping Weight: 47 lbs.
Deck Shoot Basketball Goal
This regulation size pool basketball game with a 46" above deck fixed height includes special color matched ball and notched powder coated aluminum post with finishing ring. Features a heavy-duty coated stainless steel rim and your choice of a white poly or clear backboard. Special brass anchor comes with finishing cap to replace post when not in use.
All hardware is stainless steel. Great for salt system pools. Three year warranty.
Deck Shoot Basketball Game ....... 92-852
Deck Shoot (Clear Backboard) .. 92-852.C
Shipping Weight: 43 lbs.
Ships in 3 boxes
Deck-Mounted Basketball Game
This regulation pool basketball game includes our tough 32" x 43" clear acrylic backboard, heavy duty 18" regulation vinyl coated stainless steel rim, regulation size color matched ball and notched 2-3⁄8" stainless post with escutcheon ring. Rim height is fixed at 46" above the decking. Ships complete with special brass anchor with finish cap to replace post when not in use. All hardware is stainless steel. Great for salt system pools. Three year warranty.
Deck-Mounted Basketball Game .. 92-854
Shipping Weight: 35 lbs.
Ships in 3 boxes
92-843
92-842
NOTE: Custom heights and set backs are available.
Water Basketball, Volleyball and Water Polo
RockSolid™ Basketball Game
This basketball game features the patented RockSolid anchor to eliminate movement against the toughest opponents. Features a rugged SealedSteel® Salt Friendly single post frame and rim to guard against corrosion. When you need your deck to be clear, the game can be easily removed from the anchor, and the optional anchor cap put in place. 18" setback to center of anchor. Commercial grade 2.50" square, 304 stainless steel frame (Salt Friendly vinyl coated). Regulation rim, net, basketball, needle, anchor and escutcheon are included.
RockSolid™ Basketball Game w/o Anchor ....................................... 94-231
NOTE: Custom heights and set backs are available.
RockSolid™ Extended Reach
This is the same commercial basketball game as above only in an extended reach version that features a 30" setback that works well with wide overflow or parapet gutters.
RockSolid™ Basketball Game (Extended Reach) - With Anchor ... 94-237
RockSolid™ Basketball Game (Extended Reach) - Less Anchor 94-238
RockSolid™ Anchor (ONLY) ............ 94-240
Slam Volley Portable Volleyball Game
This commercial size pool volleyball set includes 2 heavy duty aluminum posts, 32' net with 40' extension rope and colored ball. Molded poly bases weigh 500 lbs. each when filled with water. Easy to set up and no tools are required. Great for salt system pools.
Slam Volley Game........................... 92-864
Shipping Weight: 35 lbs.
Ships in (5) Boxes
32' Replacement Net...................... 92-846 Includes 40' Extension Ropes
The Slamma Adjustable Basketball Hoop
This adjustable height basketball game system features a robust 4" square stainless-steel pedestal, heavy duty 36" x 48" clear backboard and double ring static rim. Can adjust height from the pool deck in order to accommodate varying water depths. It will also accommodate up to a 12" deck to water. 30" Maximum anchor set-back. Minimum assembly is required. Anchor is sold separately.
Approximate Inflated Footprint: 36'-10" L x 7'-4" W x 5'-0" H
Includes Electric Pump, Volleyball and Ball Pump.
Stainless Deck Volley
This volleyball set fits standard 1.90 anchors and includes 2 stainless steel 1.90 posts with escutcheon rings, heavy duty 24' net with net shortening kit, adjustable height net clamps and hot colored ball. Anchors sold separately. Not recommended for salt pools.
All AquaJogger® products are made from resilient closed cell foam that won’t absorb water. Each belt features a contoured design that supports and strengthens the lower back.
AquaJogger® Active Belt 95-217
The most economical model offered. Features a non-elastic web belt that will fit up to a 44" waist.
AquaJogger® Classic Belt .............. 95-229
Great all around belt for most average body types. Patented arch design engages core muscles.
AquaJogger® Pro Belt .................... 95-200
This belt is 30% more buoyant than the classic belt. Higher arch engages core muscle groups. A favorite of athletes and rehabilitation professionals.
AquaJogger® Fit Belt 95-231
Designed for petite, athletic and short waisted women. Raised arch strengthens core muscles. Tapered sides for better fit, comfort and support.
Adult Replacement Belt ................. 95-226 48" Long.
Adult Replacement Belt ..................95-227 55" Long.
AquaJogger® Jr. Belt (Blue) ............ 95-212
AquaJogger® Jr. Belt (Purple) ......... 95-213
Learn to swim flotation belt. Does not inhibit arm strokes. Includes a Splash Club Handbook featuring water games, swimming tips, and safety information.
AquaRunners RX (Blue) .................. 95-219
AquaRunners (Purple) .................... 95-220
Resistance footwear increases cardiovascular workout, strengthens, and tones lower body. Made from soft, durable, and chlorine-resistant EVA foam. Slip-on design features strapping system that will adjust to width of every foot. Free workout guide included.
Medium resistance hand held Delta Bells tone, strengthen, and support your upper body. Features a triangular design that adjusts resistance with the turn of a wrist. Made from premium EVA foam with soft padded grips. Free water workout guide included.
Just loop and fasten around the AquaJogger®’s black belt and attach to a ladder, grab rail, anchor, racing lane. Increases resistance and intensity. Great use for minimum pool space. Link up with a partner for a team workout.
Use the Tri Bar for a complete upper- body workout. Moveable foam rounds create a variety of new exercise options.The Tri Bar is also a great flotation aid for children or balance bar for adults.
Tri-Bar Max ...................................... 95-236
Use the Tri Max for a complete upper body workout. Twice the moveable foam rounds create a variety of new exercise options.The Tri Max is also a great flotation aid for children or balance bar for adults.
AquaFit Bells 95-237
Medium resistance hand held AquaFit Bells tone, strengthen, and support your upper body. Features soft, padded grip. Includes workout guide.
WAVE WEB® PRO
Comfortable and durable gloves are webbed to enhance the natural resistance of water. WAVE WEBs provide variable and accommodating resistance for upper body toning and strengthening.
Wave Web Pro, Small ..................... 95-040 (Up to 6-1⁄2") Color: Purple/Black Wave Web Pro, Medium................. 95-042 (6-1⁄2" to 7-1⁄2") Color: Blue/Black Wave Web Pro, Large ..................... 95-044 (7-1⁄2" to 8-1⁄2") Color: Black
95-054
Three products in one, these cuffs provide aid to floatation when worn on the upper arms, around the waist, and provide resistance and buoyancy when worn around the ankle.
95-056
Mini Cuffs provide half the level of buoyancy and resistance as our regular Buoyancy & Resistance Cuffs while offering an enhanced level of comfort.
Hand Buoys™ (Pair)
Durable ethafoam barbells are ideal for upper body conditioning and buoyant support. Hand Buoys™, Mini 95-051
Hand Buoys™, Regular......................95-052
Hand Buoys™, Jumbo.......................95-w055
WAVE Belt® PRO
The WAVE Belt® PRO distributes buoyancy evenly around the body. X-Large (.XL - 50"-60")
Wave Belt ......................................... 95-069
WAVE Belt®
Features the same streamlined fit as the WAVE Belt PRO–with 20% additional buoyancy.
Wave Belt, (Small) ........................... 95-066 (Up to 32" waist)
Wave Belt, (Medium) ...................... 95-065 (33" to 38" waist)
Wave Belt, (Large) .......................... 95-067 (39" plus waist)
Gear Bag .................. 95-064
Sturdy, nylon mesh duffle bag features a full length zipper and comfortable shoulder straps. Holds up to 16 pairs of Hand Buoys or 22 Buoyancy & Resistance Cuffs. (20"H x 36"W x 15"D)
(18) Unit Hydro-Fit Systems
Turn your pool into a complete in-water fitness center. Choose from four different system configurations. Each rack measures 58" high x 27" deep x 65" long. Each system includes 18 pairs of hand buoys and your choice (18) cuffs, mini-cuffs, wave belts or wave belt pros.
System w/Cuffs ...............................
Shipping Weight: 105 lbs. (4 boxes) System w/Mini-Cuffs .......................
Weight: 100 lbs. (4 boxes) System w/Wave Belts ..................... 95-092
Great for storing water noodles and other equipment. (38" T x 28"L x 16"W)
Noodle Caddy (Bag only)............... 95-082
Holds 20 noodles. Made of nylon. (25" W x 36" H x 10" deep)
Storage Caddy (Bag only).............. 95-084
All purpose nylon storage. (25" W x 25" H x 10" deep)
Noodle (White) ................................ 95-087 3" Diameter x 54" L
Classic Cuffs
Classic Mini Cuffs™
Aquatic Exercise Gear
Aqua Fitness Gloves
These quality neoprene gloves feature webbed fingers, rubber palms and adjustable wrist closures. The flexible webbing will create water resistance and will increase propulsion through the water. These gloves are ideal for water resistance training. They come in charcoal/red. Available in small, medium, large and X-Large.
Aqua Fitness Glove, Small....... 96-044.CR
Aqua Fitness Glove, Medium .. 96-045.CR
Aqua Fitness Glove, Large 96-046.CR
Aqua Fitness Glove, X-Large .... 96-047.CR
Aqua Fitness Jog Belt
This adjustable belt with quick release button expands to fit up to a 56" waist. The jog belt provides support and stability during deep water exercises. The jog belt is available in charcoal with red belt in (.SM) Small/ Medium and (.LXL) Large/ X-Large. Aqua Fitness Jog Belt ..................... 96-187
Aqua Fitness Barbell
The foam barbells provide excellent water resistance for building upper body strength and training. Feature soft padded grips for extended workouts. Color is charcoal and red. Sold in pairs.
Aqua Fitness Barbell ....................... 96-186
Speedo® Trialon Rubber Swim Fin
The long natural rubber fin blade translates the lightest kick into a forward thrust. Features soft orthopedic foot pockets for comfortable extended use. Great for all levels of training, teaching and recreation. Sold in Pairs.
Fins ..(XXXS: 11-13) ......................... 96-330 Fins ..(XXS: 1-3) ................................ 96-331 Fins ..(XS: 3-4) ................................. 96-332
Fins ..(S: 5-6) .....................................96-333 Fins ..(M: 7-8) ................................... 96-334 Fins ..(L: 8-9) 96-335 Fins ..(XL: 10-11) ............................... 96-336 Fins ..(XXL: 12-13) ............................. 96-337
Speedo® Switchblade Fin
Features a 10-degree blade angle, which maximizes down kick segment, creating propulsion. Sculpted side rails engage hip rotation and down-kick drive. Extended toe pocket allows for ultimate comfort. Mid foot flex points to eliminate cramping. Allows swimmers to increase kick cadence with ease and fluidity.
Switchblade Fin (XS) ...................... 96-302
Switchblade Fin (Small) ................. 96-303
Switchblade Fin (Medium) ............. 96-304
Switchblade Fin (Large) ................. 96-305
Switchblade Fin (X-Large) ............. 96-306
Switchblade Fin (XX-Large) ............96-307
Contoured Swim Paddles
Helps to develop proper stroke mechanics. Made of lightweight polypropylene material with silicone rubber straps that are contoured to fit any hand. Comes with a wrist strap for better paddle control.
Elevates hips and legs to the proper streamline body position. Allows the swimmer to focus on stroke technique and rotation. Improves upper body strength. Made from soft durable EVA foam.
Team Pull Buoy ................................ 96-179
Shipping Weight: 1 lb.
Switchblade Fin Size Chart
of toe to end of heel)
5‘-9“
FastTrack 6 ............................. 94-881
Includes (1) WIBIT Basic Accessory Kit with Patch Kit.
